28 Manual

SIMOVERT Master Drives Operating Instructions
Rectifier/Regenerating Unit
Sizes C to K
Edition: F Order No.: 6SE7087-6AK85-1AA0

12.95 General
These Operating Instructions are available in the following languages:
Language German French Spanish Italian
Order-No.: 6SE70 . . . . 80-0AK85-1AA0 . . 87-7AK85-1AA0 . . 87-8AK85-1AA0 . . 87-2AK85-1AA0
Unit Software Release: starting with 3.0
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its

contents is not permitted without express written authority.
Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights cre-
ated by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are
reserved.
Conformity
We have checked the contents of this document for conformity with
the hardware and software described. However, this does not
absolutely preclude deviations, and we therefore cannot guarantee
complete conformity. The information in the document is subjected
to regular scrutiny. Any necessary corrections will be made in
subsequent editions. We also welcome any suggestions you may
have in the way of improvement. SIMOVERT Registered Trade Mark
Siemens AG 1994 All rights reserved

12.95 Contents
Contents
Page
0 Definitions ................................................................................................................... 0-7
1 Description .................................................................................................................. 1-1

1.1 Applicability....................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Principle of operation ........................................................................................................ 1-1
2 Transport, unpacking, assembly ....................................................................... 2-1

2.1 Transport, unpacking........................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2 Storage ............................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.3 Assembly .......................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.4 Dimension drawings ......................................................................................................... 2-3
3 Connection .................................................................................................................. 3-1

3.1 Power connections ........................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2 Power supply and main contactor .................................................................................... 3-14
3.2.1 Short-circuit withstand capability for sizes H and K.......................................................... 3-15
3.3 Control terminal block and serial interface ....................................................................... 3-15
3.3.1 Connectors for the control terminal block ......................................................................... 3-15
3.3.2 Connecting the control leads ............................................................................................ 3-16
3.3.3 Terminals and setting elements on the CUR (A10) module ............................................. 3-17
3.3.4 Connecting-up the parameterizing unit (PMU) ................................................................. 3-19
3.4 Measures for keeping to RFI suppression regulations ..................................................... 3-19
3.5 Single-line diagrams with suggested circuit arrangements .............................................. 3-20
3.6 Power sections ................................................................................................................. 3-28
3.7 Parallel connection of parallel unit(s), size K ................................................................... 3-47
3.7.1 Single-line diagrams with suggested circuit arrangements for parallel connection .......... 3-50
3.8 12-pulse mode (only possible with the optional RS485 interface).................................... 3-52
3.8.1 General information on 12-pulse mode, application ......................................................... 3-52
3.8.2 Hardware requirements, configuration of the power sections .......................................... 3-52
3.8.3 Parameterization for 12-pulse mode ................................................................................ 3-54
3.8.4 Control/status word for 12-pulse mode (r599) and control word 2, bit 23......................... 3-56
3.8.5 Start-up with 12-pulse mode ............................................................................................ 3-57
3.8.6 Redundancy mode .......................................................................................................... 3-59
3.8.7 RS485 interface cable for the peer-to-peer link on SST2 ................................................ 3-60
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-1AA0 0-3

Rectifier/Regenerating Unit Operating Instructions
Contents 12.96
4 Start-Up............................................................................................................................ 4-1
4.1 Introduction and handling start-up .................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 Handling the start-up instructions ..................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 General explanation of the terminology and functional scope of the
rectifier/regenerating unit .................................................................................................. 4-1
4.2 Initial start-up .................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.2.1 Preparatory measures ...................................................................................................... 4-4
4.2.2 Parameterization "Standard application" .......................................................................... 4-5
4.2.3 Parameterization for "Expert application" ......................................................................... 4-7
4.2.5 Simple application examples for connecting process data with connection assignment.. 4-10
4.3 Start-up aids ..................................................................................................................... 4-11
4.3.1 Process data..................................................................................................................... 4-11
4.3.1.1 Control word (control word 1 and control word 2)............................................................. 4-11
4.3.1.1.1 Introduction and application example ............................................................................... 4-11
4.3.1.1.2 Overview of the control word (control word 1 and control word 2) ................................... 4-13
4.3.1.1.3 Selecting the source for control word 1 (bit 0-7) ............................................................... 4-14
4.3.1.1.4 Selecting the source for control word 1 (bit 8-15) ............................................................. 4-15
4.3.1.1.5 Selecting the source for control word 2 (bit 16-23) ........................................................... 4-16
4.3.1.1.6 Selecting the source for control word 2 (bit 24-31) ........................................................... 4-17
4.3.1.1.7 Significance of control word- (1 and 2) commands........................................................... 4-18
4.3.1.2 Status word (status word 1 and status word 2) ................................................................ 4-23
4.3.1.2.1 Introduction and application example ............................................................................... 4-23
4.3.1.2.2 Overview of the status word (status word 1 and status word 2) ....................................... 4-24
4.3.1.2.3 Selecting the destinations for the status word (bits 0 - 31) ............................................... 4-25
4.3.1.2.4 Significance of the status word messages........................................................................ 4-26
4.3.1.3 Setpoints........................................................................................................................... 4-28
4.3.1.4 Actual values .................................................................................................................... 4-29
4.3.2 Binary inputs ..................................................................................................................... 4-30
4.3.3 Binary outputs................................................................................................................... 4-30
4.3.5 Analog output.................................................................................................................... 4-31
4.3.6 Serial interfaces ................................................................................................................ 4-34
4.3.6.1.1 Basic converter interface SST1 ........................................................................................ 4-34
4.3.6.1.2 Basic converter interface SST2 (A2-X117), see Section 9.6, Options ............................. 4-34
4.3.6.2 Dual-port RAM (DPR for SCB, CB, TB)............................................................................ 4-34
4.3.9 Function selection (P052) .............................................................................................. 4-35
4.3.9.1 Generating the factory setting (P052 = 1)...................................................................... 4-35
4.3.9.2 Initialization (MLFB setting) (P052 = 2)........................................................................... 4-37
4.3.9.3 Download or upread (P052 = 3)....................................................................................... 4-39
4.3.9.4 Hardware configuration (P052 = 4)................................................................................ 4-40
4.3.9.5 Drive setting (P052 = 5) ................................................................................................. 4-41
4.3.9.6 Form DC link (P052 = 20) .............................................................................................. 4-42
4.3.9.7 Circuit identification (P052 = 21).................................................................................... 4-43
0-4 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-1AA0

12.95 Contents
4.3.9.8 Display modified parameters (P052 = 22) ..................................................................... 4-45

4.3.10 Functions .......................................................................................................................... 4-45
4.3.10.1 WEA (automatic restart) .................................................................................................. 4-45
4.4 Function diagrams ............................................................................................................ 4-47
5 Parameter list ............................................................................................................. 5-1

5.1 Operation display.............................................................................................................. 5-3
5.2 General observation parameters ...................................................................................... 5-4
5.3 General parameters.......................................................................................................... 5-6
5.4 Drive data ......................................................................................................................... 5-8
5.5 Hardware configuration .................................................................................................... 5-10
5.6 Data of the DC link............................................................................................................ 5-11
5.7 Control .............................................................................................................................. 5-12
5.8 Convenience functions ..................................................................................................... 5-14
5.9 Setpoint channel ............................................................................................................... 5-16
5.10 Control and status word.................................................................................................... 5-17
5.11 Analog input/output........................................................................................................... 5-27
5.12 Communications ............................................................................................................... 5-30
5.13 Diagnostics ....................................................................................................................... 5-35
5.14 Modulator.......................................................................................................................... 5-37
5.15 Factory parameters .......................................................................................................... 5-38
5.16 Profile parameters ............................................................................................................ 5-39
6 Operator control ....................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1 Operator control elements ................................................................................................ 6-1
6.2 Displays .......................................................................................................... 6-2

6.3 Structure ........................................................................................................................... 6-3
7 Fault and Alarm Messages ................................................................................... 7-1

7.1 Fault messages ................................................................................................................ 7-1
7.2 Alarm messages............................................................................................................... 7-10
8 Maintenance ............................................................................................................... 8-1

8-1 Maintenance recommendations ....................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 Replacing components ..................................................................................................... 8-2
8.2.1 Replacing the fan.............................................................................................................. 8-2
8.2.2 Replacing modules ........................................................................................................... 8-4
8.2.3 Replacing thyristor modules with sizes C and E............................................................... 8-6

Contents 12.96
8.2.4 Replacing thyristor blocks................................................................................................. 8-7

8.2.4.1 Disassembling the thyristor blocks for size H ................................................................... 8-7
8.2.4.2 Disassembling the thyristor blocks for size K ................................................................... 8-8
9 Options ......................................................................................................................... 9-1

9.1 Options which can be integrated into the electronics box................................................. 9-1
9.2 Interface boards................................................................................................................ 9-2
9.3 Power Supply.................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.4 Operator control................................................................................................................ 9-3
9.5 Mechanical design ............................................................................................................ 9-3
9.6 RS485 interface (PTP1).................................................................................................... 9-4
9.6.1 Order designation ............................................................................................................. 9-4
9.6.2 Assembly .......................................................................................................................... 9-4
9.6.3 Function and terminal description..................................................................................... 9-5
9.6.4 Parameterization............................................................................................................... 9-5
9.7 SIMOVIS........................................................................................................................... 9-5
10 Spare parts .................................................................................................................. 10-1
11 Blank
12 Logbook........................................................................................................................ 12-1
13 Environmental compatibility................................................................................ 13-1
14 Technical data............................................................................................................ 14-1

14.1 Power reduction at increased coolant temperature .......................................................... 14-10
14.2 Power reduction at altitudes > 1000m above MSL ........................................................... 14-10
14.3 Applied standards ............................................................................................................. 14-11
15 Index .............................................................................................................................. 15-1

11.94 Definitions
0 Definitions
QUALIFIED PERSONNEL
within the meaning of these operating instructions or the warning information on the product itself, are
persons who are entrusted with installation, assembly, commissioning and operation of the product and who
avail of qualifications corresponding to their activities, e.g.:
1. training or instruction or authorization to activate and deactivate, to earth and to mark circuits and
equipment in accordance with the standards of safety engineering.
2. training or instruction in accordance with the standards of safety engineering in the care and use of
suitable safety equipment.
3. training in First Aid
DANGER
within the meaning of these operating instructions or the warning information on the product itself, indicates
that death and/or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
that severe personal injury and/or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
that slight personal injury or property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTE
within the meaning of these operating instructions indicates important information about the product or the
respective part of the operating instructions to which attention is drawn.
NOTE
For reasons of clarity, these operating instructions do not contain all details of all types of the product and can
also not take into account every conceivable installation, operation or maintenance circumstances.
You can consult your local Siemens branch if you should require further information or if particular problem
occur that are not dealt with in adequate detail in the operating instructions.
Attention is also drawn to the fact that the contents of this instruction manual shall not become part of or
modify any prior or existing agreement, commitment or legal relationship. The sales contract, which also
contains the complete and solely valid warranty stipulations, contains the entire obligations of Siemens. These
contractual warranty stipulations are neither extended nor limited by the statements given in instructions and
documentation.

Definitions 11.94
CAUTION
Electrostatically Sensitive Devices (ESDs)
The equipment contains electrostatically sensitive devices. These components may be destroyed very easily
by improper handling. Please observe the following notes if you nevertheless have to work with electronic
modules:
Electronic modules should only be touched if absolutely necessary to carry out work on them.
If modules nevertheless have to be touched, you must discharge your own body directly beforehand (this is
best done by touching an earthed conductive object such as the PE contact of a socket).
Modules must not come into contact with highly insulating materials e.g. plastic films, insulating desktops
or synthetic fibber clothing items.
Modules must only be placed on conductive surfaces.
When soldering modules, the tip of the soldering iron must be earthed.
Modules and components must only be stored or dispatched in conductive packaging (e.g. metallized
plastic boxes or metal tins).
If packagings are not conductive, modules must be placed in a conductive envelopment prior to packaging.
In this case, use can be made of conductive foam rubber or domestic aluminum foil, for example.
The necessary protective measures for ESDs are elucidated once again in the following figure:
a = conductive floor d = ESD coat
b = ESD desk e = ESD armband
c = ESD shoes f = earthing terminal on cabinets
d d d
b b
e e
f f f f f
c a c
a a
Sitting position Standing position Standing / Sitting position

11.94 Definitions
WARNING
When operating electrical equipment, certain parts of such equipment are inevitably live.
Owing to the dc link capacitors, hazardous voltages are present on the equipment up to
5 min. after deenergization (power terminal and electronic power supply). This is why it is
not permitted to open the housing until after waiting for 5 minutes.
Non-observance of warning notices can result in death, severe personal injury or
considerable property damage.
Such personnel must be thoroughly acquainted with all warnings and maintenance
activities.
Perfect and safe operation of the equipment requires proper transport, expert storage,
installation and assembly and cautious operation and maintenance.

Definitions 11.94

12.95 Description
1 Description
1.1 Application
The rectifier/regenerating units of the SIMOVERT Master Drives 6SE70 series are power electronics devices for
supplying the DC voltage to the SIMOVERT Master Drives 6SEE70 series of inverters. The rectifier/regenerating
units convert the voltage of a three-phase system into a fixed DC voltage (depending on the operating mode and
voltage tolerance). This voltage is kept constant within a specified range even when the inverter is feeding power
back into the system. The following voltages are specified for the DC voltage output (DC link voltage):
DC 280V to 310V ±15% at AC system input voltage 208 to 230V ±15%

DC 510V to 620V ±15% at AC system input voltage 380 to 460 V ±15%
The units with system input voltages of 208 to 230V are identical to the units with system input voltage of 380 to
460V. You only have to set the P071 to the corresponding system input voltage.
You can connect one or more inverters to the output. The total of the rated currents of the installed inverters may
then exceed the rated current of the rectifier/regenerating unit. When planning your system, however, make sure
that the aggregate DC load currents at no time exceed the rated DC current of the rectifier/regenerating unit
The output current can be increased by connecting power sections of size K in parallel. Up to 2 parallel units of
the same rated current can be connected in parallel with one basic unit (see Section 3.7 for further details on
parallel connection)
You can make technological adaptations and expansions over a defined interface in the control section.
Harmonic loading on the supply network can be reduced by coupling 2 units for "12-pulse mode" (for further
details on "12-pulse mode", see Section 3.8).
1.2 Principle of operation

The power section of the rectifier/regenerating unit consists of two thyristor bridges connected in anti-parallel for
supplying power to the inverter DC link and feeding power back from the DC link into the system. To avoid a
voltage drop in the regenerative mode, you must increase the input voltage for the regenerating bridge by 20% .
You can do this with an (auto) transformer or connecting the bridge to its own power system. If a higher voltage
is not applied to the regenerative terminals, the DC link voltage must be decreased by phase angle control
(permanently (permanent or by external control in regenerative mode only). The link voltage is automatically
controlled by a digital microprocessor-based controller.
A 24 V external supply is required for operating the units (see Sections 3.5 and 9.3).
The rectifier/regenerating unit is suitable for connecting several inverters to a common DC bus. This permits the
exchange of energy between motoring and generating drives, and thus saves energy.
Once the DC link capacitors have been precharged, the inverters are ready for operation.
The rectifier/regenerating unit is controlled from an operator panel which is in the door of the unit for size C, and
on the electronics box for sizes E, H and K. The operator can also control the unit over a terminal block or
through a serial interface.
Optional interfaces and intelligent I/O modules are available in conjunction with programmable controllers and
other automation equipment for controlling the rectifier/regenerating units.

Description 12.95

12.96 Transport, Unpacking and Assembly
2 Transport, Unpacking and Assembly
2.1 Transport and unpacking

The units are packed at the manufacturing works. A product packaging label is attached to the box.
Avoid extreme vibrations and hard impacts during transport, e.g. when lowering the unit.
Pay attention to the notes on the packaging relating to transport, storage and proper handling.
The converter can be installed after unpacking it and checking the consignment for completeness and
damage.
The packaging consists of cardboard and corrugated cardboard for units of size C. The units of size E, H
and K are bolted onto pallets with fixing pieces in their usual operating position and packed with
cardboard. The packaging may be disposed of in accordance with local cardboard disposal regulations.
You should notify your freight forwarder immediately if you discover any transportation damage.
2.2 Storage
The units must be stored in clean dry rooms. Temperatures between 25 °C (13 °F) and + 70 °C (158 °F) are
permissible. Temperature fluctuations > 20 K per hour are not permissible.
2.3 Aids to assembly

The following are required for securing size C:
G rail conforming to EN50035 with screws for securing
one M6 bolt
dimension drawing (Figure 2.2 for size C)
The following are required for securing size E:

four M8 bolts
dimension drawing (Figure 2.3 for size E)
The following are required for securing size H:

four M8 bolts
dimension drawing (Figure 2.4 for size H)
The following are required for securing size K:

six M8 bolts
dimension drawing (Figure 2.5 for size K)

Transport, Unpacking and Assembly 12.96
WARNING
For safe operation of the unit, it is presumed it will be assembled and commissioned by
qualified personnel, paying attention to the warning notes given in these operating
instructions.
Particular note must be taken both of the general and national erection and safety
regulations regarding work on power installations (e.g. VDE) and regulations regarding the
proper use of tools and of personal protective equipment.
The unit must be protected against the ingress of foreign matter as otherwise proper
functioning and safety will not be guaranteed.
Requirements for the installation site

Local guidelines and standards must be observed in relation to assembly.
Dissipated
Operating facilities must be dry and dust-free. Air fed in must not contain power
any gases, vapors or dusts that are electrically conductive or detrimental
to functioning. Air containing dust must be filtered.
WARNING
Dimension cabinet ventilation according to the
dissipated power! (Technical data in Chapter 14)
The unit’s ambient climate in operating rooms must not exceed the values
6SE70
of code 3K3 as detailed in DIN IEC 721 Part 3-3 /04.90. A reduction of
power as detailed in Chapters 14.1 and 14.2 is necessary in the event of
temperatures > 40 °C (104 °F) and altitudes >1000m. The terminal
voltage has to be reduced for altitudes > 2000m.
Carry out assembly in accordance with the dimension drawings in Cooling air
Section 2.4. ≤ 40 °C (50 °C)
Figure 2.1 Installation in control cabinets
NOTE
In the case of units of size H and K, all plastic covers must be mounted to ensure correct air flow and
cooling for the units.

View without front cover
2.4
12.96
3)
2) Exhaust air 6)
100
Z 1) Mounting hole for screw M6.
82 126,7
69 52
2) Hook (suspension) for mounting on a
16
SIEMENS g-rail according to EN50035
1 2 3 4 5
54
X9
U1 V1 W1 1PE C D X9
3) Space required for cooling the unit.
PMU X1
L1 L2 L3 L+ L-
A23 4) Screen connection for two cables.
X1
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-1AA0
Figure 2.2 Dimension drawing, size C
X300
V21+24 V25+22 5) Shock-hazard protection
V23+26
6) Connector for power supply DC24V and
A10 main contactor
R100
Dimension drawings

5)
F10
F10
Options
A10
600
600
No displacement of the centre of gravity
V11+14 V13+16 V15+12
Weight: refer to section 14 (technical data)

F2
F1 Dimension: mm
SIEMENS
X20.1
X47
X48
R77
R78
A23
X30.1
X30.2
Detail Z
R75
R76
1U2 1V2 1W2
X4 4) max. 5,7
WARNUNG
X4
WARNUNG
1T1 1T2 1T3 DANGER
DANGER
54
43
23
25
34
90 56 Air intake 86
100
180 350
1) 3)
2-3
Transport, Unpacking and Assembly
5) 1) Mounting hole for screw M8
2-4
2) Mounting hole for power connections:
Front view M16 for 6SE7036-1EE85-1AA0, 6SE7035-4FE85-1AA0
350 6SE7034-2HE85-1AA0 and 6SE7035-3HE85-1AA0
9) 340 M12 for every other units
b
294 3) Connection for PE, mounted:
269 M16 for 6SE7036-1EE85-1AA0, 6SE7035-4FE85-1AA0
44,5 Exhaust air 6SE7034-2HE85-1AA0 and 6SE7035-3HE85-1AA0
180
1) M12 for every other units
2) 4) Hole for crane hook ∅30mm
PMU 4)
C/L+ D/L- PMU 5) Front cover only for design IP20
X300 5) 6) connector for power supply DC24V and main contactor
A10
7) Fan-Customer connection (X19)

Options
Figure 2.3 Dimension drawing, size E

8) Screen connection for cables
F10 F10 9) Space required for connection and cooling the unit
Unit Dimension a Dimension b
(mm) (mm)
6SE7031-7EE85-1AA0 400 300
8) 6SE7032-2EE85-1AA0 400 300
X47 V11 to V16
170 A23 6SE7033-1EE85-1AA0 450 350
228 X48 6SE7033-8EE85-1AA0 500 400
6SE7034-6EE85-1AA0 500 400
A23
6SE7036-1EE85-1AA0 600 500
1025
1050
6SE7031-5FE85-1AA0 400 300
1000
F1 F2
941
6SE7032-4FE85-1AA0 450 350
X29 X19 6SE7032-7FE85-1AA0 450 350
X9 F3 F4 V21 to V26 6SE7033-5FE85-1AA0 500 400
6SE7034-2FE85-1AA0 500 400
148 6SE7035-4FE85-1AA0 600 500
6) 6SE7031-4HE85-1AA0 400 300
U1 V1 W1 7) E1 6SE7032-2HE85-1AA0 400 300
L1 L2 L3 6SE7032-7HE85-1AA0 400 300
94,5 6SE7034-2HE85-1AA0 500 400
41
352
6SE7035-3HE85-1AA0 600 500
286
2) 1U2 1V2 1W2
1T1 1T2 1T3 10) Remove transport plates before start-up
PE PE
147
25
10
17 ∅17 ∅13 17 Air intake Weight: refer to section 14
30 10) 30 ∅13
100 9) a 70 Dimension: mm
10) 3) 1) 168,5 ∅17
237,5
292

12.96
Front view
12.96
508 285
376 225
Mounting holes for wall mounting 26
234 40 119 155
with M8 bolts Exhaust air
7) 92 40 26 7) 130 7)
61 63 85
67
C/L+ D/L- D/L- C/L+
2)
26
250
252
1) Mounting hole for M12 screw
40
U1/L1 V1/L2 W1/L3 2) 2) M12 thread
Figure 2.4 Dimension drawing, size H
W1 V1 U1
PE1
L3 L2 L1 3) Screen connection for cables
50
50
T1 4) Connector for 24 V DC power supply
PE1 T2 and main contactor
F11 F14 F13 F16 F15 F12

5) Fan connection
1)
6) Remove transport plates before start-up
7) For cabinet installation:
Level B Level A Insulate this part of the unit against the
X19 X29
F4 cabinet walls and door
PMU F3
X300
A10
1400
1300
Options
A23
X27
F5 F1 F2
3) X9
When the units are installed in cabinets,it must
X9 4)
be ensured that the air intake and exhaust is
X19 adequate (for air requirements and intake air
X19 5) X9 temperature, see Section 14 "Technical Data").

1)
F24 F21 F26 F23 F22 F25 Weight: refer to Section 14 (Technical Data)
PE2 T3
T4
1) Dimension: mm
PE2
80
45
1U2/1T1 1V2/1T2 1W2/1T3
40 50
119 270
92 40 70 6) Air intake 296
234 40 424
376 40 551
2-5
2-6
Front view
40
400 665
340 555 3)
Mounting holes for wall mounting
40 with M8 bolts
270 420
200 310
40 Exhaust air
130 175
40 26 26 26 26
85 50
1)
26
1U 1V 1W 1C 1D
87
PE1 PE1
L1 L2 L3 L+ L- 1) Mounting hole for M12 screw
50 62
7b)
26
PMU 1U/L1 1C/L+ 1V/L2 1D/L- 1W/L3 2) M12 thread
X300
A10 3) Screen connection for cables
Figure 2.5 Dimension drawing, size K

Options
4) Connector for 24 V DC power supply
and main contactor
3) 3)
A23 5) Fan connection
A23 6) Remove transport plate and

transport cross before start-up
7) For cabinet installation:
Level A Level B a) Insulate this part of the unit against
the cabinet walls and door.
b) Loosen fixing screws for fan casing
(M8/SW13) and lift up plastic cover
7a) as far as the cabinettop panel.
7a)
1730
1650
Tighten screws again.
7a)
When the units are installed in cabinets,it

X19 must be ensured that the air intake and
X9 exhaust is adequate (for air requirements
X19 5) and intake air temperature, see Section
PE2
1) 14 "Technical Data").
6) X9 4) 1U2 1V2 1W2
1T1 1T2 1T3
PE2 1)
Weight: refer to Section 14 (Technical Data)
137,5
112,5 50
25
190 90 50 258 Dimension: mm

340 335 50 483
550 580 50 708
40
710
6)
800 Air intake

12.96
12.96 Transport, Unpacking and Assembly
PMU
27
43
82
Printed-circuit board
Front cover
44
Front of
enclosure
Printed-circuit board
Figure 2.6 Clearance between PCBs and front cover (size C) Figure 2.7 Clearance between PCBs and PMU (size E)
Line connection without autotransfomer (size E)

(For sizes C, H and K, these connections have to be made externally on the system side.
Order No. for three Unit Order No.

busbars
6SE7032-7FE87-3AE0 6SE7031-7EE85-1AA0
6SE7032-2EE85-1AA0
6SE7033-1EE85-1AA0
6SE7031-5FE85-1AA0
6SE7032-4FE85-1AA0
6SE7032-7FE85-1AA0
Rect. connection 6SE7032-7HE87-3AE0 6SE7033-8EE85-1AA0
6SE7034-6EE85-1AA0
6SE7033-5FE85-1AA0
6SE7034-2FE85-1AA0
Busbar 6SE7031-4HE85-1AA0
6SE7032-2HE85-1AA0
6SE7032-7HE85-1AA0
Regen. connection
6SE7034-2HE87-3AE0 6SE7036-1EE85-1AA0
6SE7035-4FE85-1AA0
6SE7034-2HE85-1AA0
Figure 2.8 Line connection w/o autotransformer (size E)

Transport, Unpacking and Assembly 12.96

12.96 Connection
3 Connection
WARNING
The units are operated at high voltages.
Only carry out connection work after disconnecting the voltage!
All work on the unit must only be carried out by qualified persons.
Damage or destruction can result if the unit is incorrectly connected.
As the result of the dc link capacitors in the connected SIMOVERT Master Drives, the unit
still contains a hazardous voltage up to 5 min. after isolation. This is why it is only permitted
to open the unit after observing an appropriate waiting time.
The power terminals and control terminals may carry a voltage even when the motor is at
standstill.
When working on the open unit, pay attention to the fact that live parts are exposed. The
unit may only be operated with the front covers attached.
The user is responsible for ensuring that the motor, converter, rectifier/regenerating unit
and other units are installed and connected in accordance with the technical regulations
recognized in the country of installation (in Germany: VDE, VBG4) and other regionally
valid regulations. In doing so, particular attention must be paid to cable dimensioning,
fusing, earthing, deactivation, isolation and overcurrent protection.
CAUTION
The power cables must be fixed in position mechanically outside the unit.
NOTES
An external 24 V power supply is required for operation of the units (see Chapters 3.5 and 9.3).
Operational range of the unit: 20 V to 30 V.

Rectifier/Regenerating Unit Operating instructions
Connection 12.96
3.1 Power connections
DC link Autotransformer/ DC link

Mains (DC output) regen. system (DC output)
Mains
W1 X4 C D
C
V1 L3 L+ L+ L-
L2 PE1 U1 V1 W1
U1 D
L1 L- L1 L2 L3
1U2 1V2 1W2
X19-1
X19-2
1T1 1T2 1T3
A23
1U2 Autotransformer/
1T1 regen. system Mains fan
1V2
1T2
PE PE
1W2
X1 1T3
Figure 3.1 Mains connection size C Figure 3.2 Mains connection size E
DC-link 1) DC-link 1)
(DC output) (DC output)
C/L+ D/L-
C/L+ D/L-
PE1
Mains 1)
U1/L1 V1/L2 W1/L3
U1/L1 V1/L2 W1/L3
PE1
Mains fan
X19
Mains 1)
Mains fan X9
X19
X9 PE2
1U2/1T1 1V2/1T2 1W2/1T3 1U2/1T1 1V2/1T2 1W2/1T3 PE2
Autotransformer / regen. system Autotransformer / regen. system
Figure 3.3 Mains connection size H Figure 3.4 Mains connection size K
1) Due to the press-in nuts, cable lugs or DC rails can only be connected to the terminal rails from the front.

12.96 Connection
WARNING
The operating coils of contactors and relays that are connected to the same supply network
as the unit or that are located in close proximity of the unit must be connected to
overvoltage limiters, e.g. RC circuits.
An RCCB (residual-current-operated circuit-breaker) must not be used to protect the
rectifier/regenerating unit (DIN VDE 0160).
Voltage is only permitted to be applied to the unit when SIMOVERT Master Drives are
connected. Operation without a connected DC link capacitor is not permitted!
If the DC link terminals are connected incorrectly or short-circuited, the SIMOVERT Master
Drives inverter will be destroyed!
To reduce mains pollution, limit harmonics and reduce current ripple, the total system
inductance for the supply and feedback connection (incl. commutating reactor and, where
applicable, autotransformer must result in a total relative short-circuit voltage u k between
4% and 10%.
Connect the fan power supply to X19.
The fan continues to run for about four minutes or until a certain cooling element
temperature threshold is undershot (provided its power supply is connected) after the unit
has been switched off, following fault messages, on canceling the enable signal and after
isolating the system supply connection.
Despite switching the voltage off at the power terminals, a voltage may still exist on
terminal X19 due to the external fan supply.
NOTES
The supply voltages applied to the rectifier and regenerating power terminals (U1/L1, V1/L2, W1/L3 and
1U2/1T1, 1V2/1T2, 1W2/1T3) must have an identical phase angle and identical frequency.
Recommendation: The inductive components of the impedance drop uk of the (auto) transformer should lie
between 1.5 and 3% (see Table 3.4).
Commutating reactor: Selection of the reactors for 4 % uk should be based on the rated current in
regenerative mode on the line side (see Technical Data). In weak or low-power systems, the uk of the
commutating reactor must be decreased in order not to exceed the upper limit for the total uk of 10%.
A further measure in the case of extremely high uk values for the supply network can be implemented
by connecting the primary side of the autotransformer to the supply network directly (before the
commutating reactors), to ensure that the total uk value in the regenerating direction will not be too
high.
Rectification Rectification
DC link DC link
Regeneration Regeneration
Mains Mains
Arrangement for high-power system Arrangement for low-power system
For the selection of the commutating reactors, see Table 3.5 and Catalog DA93.1.
With an extremely high total uk value in the regenerative direction, it may be necessary due to the
increased thyristor current commutating time, to reduce the inverter step limit (parameter P776). This
may mean it is necessary to reduce Ud.
Output reactors in the DC circuit are not permitted (even with the parallel connection of power sections or in
12-pulse mode), because the DC link voltage is measured at the unit output terminals.

Connection 12.96
Function Terminal Connected load / Description

Incoming supply terminals X1-U1/L1 See Technical Data
X1-V1/L2 Chapter 14
X1-W1/L3
Protective conductor PE/GND
Power feedback terminals X4-1U2/1T1 See Technical Data
autotransformer/system X4-1V2/1T2 Chapter 14
X4-1W2/1T3
Power terminals X1-C/L+ See Technical Data
DC link voltage X1-D/L- Chapter 14
(inverter)
Fan terminals X19-1 Supply connection for fan

Sizes E, H, K X19-2 230V AC ±10%, 50 to 60 Hz ±5%
Size E
Current consumption: 0.84A
Size H
Current consumption: at 50 Hz: 2.6 A, at 60 Hz: 3.3 A
Size K
Current consumption: at 50 Hz: 5.2 A, at 60 Hz: 6.6 A
Table 3.1 Power connections
Sizes C and E
Terminal X19 fused with fuse (F3 and F4):
T2A/250V time-lag 5x20 mm
(19198-T2A/250V Messrs. Wickmann-Werke GmbH or 0034.3993 FSD Messrs. Schurter)
or
T2A/250V time-lag 6.3x32 mm (¼“ x 1¼“)
(19343-T2A/250V Messrs. Wickmann-Werke GmbH or 0034.5231 FST Messrs. Schurter)
Sizes H and K
Terminal X19 fused with fuse (F3 and F4):
T2A/250V time-lag 6.3x32 mm (¼“ x 1¼“)
(19343-T7A/250V Messrs. Wickmann-Werke GmbH or 0034.5243 FST Messrs. Schurter)

12.96 Connection
The units are designed for permanent connection to the system in keeping with DIN VDE 0160 Section 6.5.2.1.
Protective conductor connection: Min. cross-sectional area 10 mm2 (see Table 3.2).
The conductor cross-sectional areas listed in Table 3.2 are maximum connectable cross-sections. The data is
given for multicore cable. The cross-sections actually connected must be determined in accordance with the
applicable regulations - e.g. DIN VDE 100 Part 523, DIN VDE 0276 Part 1000.
Unit Order No. Mains DC link Protective conductor

Rated Conductor Conductor Conductor
input U1/L1, V1/L2,W1/L3 C/L+, D/L- PE
1U2/1T1, 1V2/1T2,
1W2/1T3
voltage current max. max. max. max.
2)
6SE70 (V) (A) mm2 1) AWG mm2 1) AWG 2) mm2 1) AWG 2)
22-1EC85-1AA0 380 to 460 18 50 3) 1/0 50 3) 1/0 10 10
24-1EC85-1AA0 380 to 460 36 50 3) 1/0 50 3) 1/0 16 6
28-6EC85-1AA0 380 to 460 74 50 3) 1/0 50 3) 1/0 25 4
31-7EE85-1AA0 380 to 460 149 2x120 2x4/0 2x150 2x300 70 2/0
32-2EE85-1AA0 380 to 460 192 2x120 2x4/0 2x150 2x300 95 3/0
33-1EE85-1AA0 380 to 460 269 2x120 2x4/0 2x150 2x300 150 300
33-8EE85-1AA0 380 to 460 326 2x240 2x500 2x300 2x600 185 350
34-6EE85-1AA0 380 to 460 403 2x240 2x500 2x300 2x600 240 500
36-1EE85-1AA0 380 to 460 526 2x240 2x500 2x300 2x600 300 600
38-2EH85-1AA0 380 to 460 710 C 4x300 4x600 C 4x300 4x600 C 4x300 4x600
R 100x10 R 60x10 R 100x10
41-0EH85-1AA0 380 to 460 888 C 4x300 4x600 C 4x300 4x600 C 4x300 4x600
R 100x10 R 60x10 R 100x10
41-3EK85-1AA0 380 to 460 1156 C 4x300 4x600 C 6x300 6x600 C 4x300 4x600
R 100x10 R 100x10 R 100x10
41-3EK85-1AD0 380 to 460 1156 C 4x300 4x600 C 6x300 6x600 C 4x300 4x600
R 100x10 R 100x10 R 100x10
41-8EK85-1AA0 380 to 460 1542 C 4x300 4x600 C 6x300 6x600 C 4x300 4x600
R 100x10 R 100x10 R 100x10
41-8EK85-1AD0 380 to 460 1542 C 4x300 4x600 C 6x300 6x600 C 4x300 4x600
R 100x10 R 100x10 R 100x10
22-7FC85-1AA0 500 to 575 24 50 3) 1/0 50 3) 1/0 10 8
24-1FC85-1AA0 500 to 575 36 50 3) 1/0 50 3) 1/0 16 6
27-2FC85-1AA0 500 to 575 62 50 3) 1/0 50 3) 1/0 16 6
28-8FC85-1AA0 500 to 575 82 50 3) 1/0 50 3) 1/0 25 4
31-5FE85-1AA0 500 to 575 131 2x120 2x4/0 2x150 2x300 70 2/0
32-4FE85-1AA0 500 to 575 203 2x120 2x4/0 2x150 2x300 120 4/0
32-7FE85-1AA0 500 to 575 233 2x120 2x4/0 2x150 2x300 120 4/0
33-5FE85-1AA0 500 to 575 307 2x240 2x500 2x300 2x600 185 350
1) C=Cable, R=Rail
2) American Wire Gauge
3) Terminal connection area: Multicore10mm2 to 50mm2 AWG 8 to AWG 1/0
Stranded 3.5mm2 to 35mm2 AWG 12 to AWG 2

Connection 12.96
Unit Order No. Mains DC link Protective conductor

Rated Conductor Conductor Conductor
input U1/L1, V1/L2,W1/L3 C/L+, D/L- PE
1U2/1T1, 1V2/1T2,
1W2/1T3
voltage current max. max. max. max.
2)
6SE70 (V) (A) mm2 1) AWG mm2 1) AWG 2) mm2 1) AWG 2)
34-2FE85-1AA0 500 to 575 366 2x240 2x500 2x300 2x600 185 350
35-4FE85-1AA0 500 to 575 465 2x240 2x500 2x300 2x600 300 600
37-7FH85-1AA0 500 to 575 671 C 4x300 4x600 C 4x300 4x600 C 4x300 4x600
R 100x10 R 60x10 R 100x10
41-0FH85-1AA0 500 to 575 888 C 4x300 4x600 C 4x300 4x600 C 4x300 4x600
R 100x10 R 60x10 R 100x10
41-3FK85-1AA0 500 to 575 1119 C 4x300 4x600 C 6x300 6x600 C 4x300 4x600
R 100x10 R 100x10 R 100x10
41-3FK85-1AD0 500 to 575 1119 C 4x300 4x600 C 6x300 6x600 C 4x300 4x600
R 100x10 R 100x10 R 100x10
R 100x10 R 100x10 R 100x10
R 100x10 R 100x10 R 100x10
R 100x10 R 100x10 R 100x10
R 100x10 R 100x10 R 100x10
31-4HE85-1AA0 660 to 690 123 2x120 2x4/0 2x150 2x300 70 2/0
32-2HE85-1AA0 660 to 690 193 2x120 2x4/0 2x150 2x300 95 3/0
32-7HE85-1AA0 660 to 690 234 2x120 2x4/0 2x150 2x300 120 4/0
34-2HE85-1AA0 660 to 690 366 2x240 2x500 2x300 2x600 185 350
35-3HE85-1AA0 660 to 690 465 2x240 2x500 2x300 2x600 300 600
37-7HH85-1AA0 660 to 690 671 C 4x300 4x600 C 4x300 4x600 C 4x300 4x600
R 100x10 R 60x10 R 100x10
41-0HH85-1AA0 660 to 690 898 C 4x300 4x600 C 4x300 4x600 C 4x300 4x600
R 100x10 R 60x10 R 100x10
41-3HK85-1AA0 660 to 690 1119 C 4x300 4x600 C 6x300 6x600 C 4x300 4x600
R 100x10 R 100x10 R 100x10
41-3HK85-1AD0 660 to 690 1119 C 4x300 4x600 C 6x300 6x600 C 4x300 4x600
R 100x10 R 100x10 R 100x10
R 100x10 R 100x10 R 100x10
R 100x10 R 100x10 R 100x10
R 100x10 R 100x10 R 100x10
R 100x10 R 100x10 R 100x10
Table 3.2 Connection cross-sections
1) C=Cable, R=Rail
2) American Wire Gauge

12.96 Connection
Unit Mains supply fuses

Order No. Column 1 Column 2
Siemens (SITOR) Bussmann
US standard
6SE70 A Type A Type
22-1EC85-1AA0 32 3NE4101 40 170M3608
24-1EC85-1AA0 63 3NE4118 63 170M3610
28-6EC85-1AA0 125 3NE4122 125 170M3613
31-7EE85-1AA0 250 3NE3227 250 170M3616
32-2EE85-1AA0 315 3NE3230-0B 315 170M3617
33-1EE85-1AA0 450 3NE3233 450 170M3620
33-8EE85-1AA0 450 3NE3333 550 170M3622
34-6EE85-1AA0 560 3NE3335 700 170M4617
36-1EE85-1AA0 800 3NE3338-8 900 170M5615
22-7FC85-1AA0 40 3NE4102 50 170M3688
24-1FC85-1AA0 63 3NE4118 63 170M3689
27-2FC85-1AA0 100 3NE4121 125 170M3692
28-8FC85-1AA0 125 3NE3222 160 170M3693
31-5FE85-1AA0 160 3NE3224 —
32-4FE85-1AA0 315 3NE3220-0B —
32-7FE85-1AA0 350 3NE3231 400 170M4693
33-5FE85-1AA0 450 3NE3333 550 170M6693
34-2FE85-1AA0 500 3NE3334-0B —
35-4FE85-1AA0 630 3NE3336 800 170M6696
31-4HE85-1AA0 160 3NE3224 —
32-2HE85-1AA0 315 3NE3230-0B 350 170M6689
32-7HE85-1AA0 350 3NE3231 —
34-2HE85-1AA0 560 3NE3335 —
35-3HE85-1AA0 630 3NE3336 800 170M6696
Table 3.3 Recommended mains fuses
Column 1, 2: Semiconductor protection only, lines are not reliably protected. Discriminative line protection is
assured only by correlating the line protection fuses to the installed conductor cross-section in
accordance with the applicable regulations - e.g. DIN VDE 0100 Teil 430.

Connection 12.96
Unit Order No. Built-in F10 DC link fuse

Siemens SITOR Bussmann
US standard
6SE70 A Type A Type
22-1EC85-1AA0 32 3NE4101 35 170L3832 1)
24-1EC85-1AA0 63 3NE4118 80 170L3836 1)
28-6EC85-1AA0 125 3NE4122 —
31-7EE85-1AA0 250 3NE3227 315 170M3696
32-2EE85-1AA0 250 3NE3227 350 170M3697
33-1EE85-1AA0 450 3NE3233 500 170M4695
33-8EE85-1AA0 500 3NE3334-0B 630 170M4697
34-6EE85-1AA0 560 3NE3335 800 170M5698
36-1EE85-1AA0 800 3NE3338-8 1000 170M5700
22-7FC85-1AA0 40 3NE4102 50 170L3834 1)
24-1FC85-1AA0 63 3NE4118 80 170L3836 1)
27-2FC85-1AA0 100 3NE4121 125 170L3838 1)
28-8FC85-1AA0 160 3NE4124 —
31-5FE85-1AA0 200 3NE3225 250 170M3695
32-4FE85-1AA0 315 3NE3230-0B 400 170M4693
32-7FE85-1AA0 350 3NE3231 450 170M4694
33-5FE85-1AA0 450 3NE3333 550 170M4696
34-2FE85-1AA0 500 3NE3334-0B 700 170M5697
35-4FE85-1AA0 710 3NE3337-8 900 170M5699
31-4HE85-1AA0 200 3NE3225 250 170M3695
32-2HE85-1AA0 315 3NE3230-0B 400 170M4693
32-7HE85-1AA0 350 3NE3231 450 170M4694
34-2HE85-1AA0 560 3NE3335 700 170M5697
35-3HE85-1AA0 710 3NE3337-8 900 170M5699
Table 3.4 Built-in DC link fuse
1) Not a US standard

12.96 Connection
Unit Built-in branch fuses F11 to F16

Order No. Siemens SITOR Bussmann
US standard
6SE70 A Type A Type
38-2EH85-1AA0 630 3NE3336 700 170M4717
41-0EH85-1AA0 800 3NE3338-8 900 170M5715
37-7FH85-1AA0 560 3NE3335 630 170M5696
41-0FH85-1AA0 800 3NE3338-8 900 170M5699
37-7HH85-1AA0 560 3NE3335 630 170M5696
41-0HH85-1AA0 800 3NE3338-8 900 170M5699
Built-in branch fuses F111 to F116
41-3EK85-1AA0 630 3NE3336 —
41-3EK85-1AD0 630 3NE3336 —
41-8EK85-1AA0 800 3NE3338-8 —
41-8EK85-1AD0 800 3NE3338-8 —
41-3FK85-1AA0 560 3NE3335 630 170M5696
41-3FK85-1AD0 560 3NE3335 630 170M5696
41-5FK85-1AA0 710 3NE3337-8 630 170M5696
41-5FK85-1AD0 710 3NE3337-8 630 170M5696
41-8FK85-1AA0 800 3NE3338-8 800 170M5698
41-8FK85-1AD0 800 3NE3338-8 800 170M5698
41-3HK85-1AA0 560 3NE3335 630 170M5696
41-3HK85-1AD0 560 3NE3335 630 170M5696
41-5HK85-1AA0 710 3NE3337-8 630 170M5696
41-5HK85-1AD0 710 3NE3337-8 630 170M5696
41-8HK85-1AA0 800 3NE3338-8 800 170M5698
41-8HK85-1AD0 800 3NE3338-8 800 170M5698
Table 3.5 Built-in branch fuses

Connection 12.96
Unit Order No. Rated input Regen.- Commutating reactor

Type Voltage / Frequency Rated
voltage curr. current current
6SE70 (V) (A) (A) (V / Hz) (V / Hz) (A)
22-1EC85-1AA0 380 to 460 18 20 4EP3700-7UK 400 / 50 460 / 60 18
24-1EC85-1AA0 380 to 460 36 40 4EP3900-5UK 400 / 50 460 / 60 35,5
28-6EC85-1AA0 380 to 460 74 82 4EU2451-4UA00 400 / 50 460 / 60 80
31-7EE85-1AA0 380 to 460 149 165 4EU2751-1UB00 400 / 50 460 / 60 160
32-2EE85-1AA0 380 to 460 192 212 4EU2751-2UB00 400 / 50 460 / 60 200
33-1EE85-1AA0 380 to 460 269 297 4EU3051-7UA00 400 / 50 460 / 60 280
33-8EE85-1AA0 380 to 460 326 360 4EU3051-8UA00 400 / 50 460 / 60 355
34-6EE85-1AA0 380 to 460 403 444 4EU3651-3UB00 400 / 50 460 / 60 400
36-1EE85-1AA0 380 to 460 526 581 4EU3651-4UB00 400 / 50 460 / 60 560
38-2EH85-1AA0 380 to 460 710 784 4EU3951-6UA00 400 / 50 460 / 60 710
41-0EH85-1AA0 380 to 460 888 980 4EU3951-1UB00 400 / 50 460 / 60 910
41-3EK85-1AA0 380 to 460 1156 1276 4EU4351-3UA00 400 / 50 460 / 60 1120
41-3EK85-1AD0 380 to 460 1156 1276 4EU4351-3UA00 400 / 50 460 / 60 1120
41-8EK85-1AA0 380 to 460 1542 1702 4EU4351-7UA00 400 / 50 460 / 60 1600
41-8EK85-1AD0 380 to 460 1542 1702 4EU4351-7UA00 400 / 50 460 / 60 1600
22-7FC85-1AA0 500 to 575 24 26 4EP3800-8UK 500 / 50 22,4
24-1FC85-1AA0 500 to 575 36 40 4EP4001-0UK 500 / 50 35,5
27-2FC85-1AA0 500 to 575 62 69 4EU2451-5UA00 500 / 50 63
28-8FC85-1AA0 500 to 575 82 90 4EU2551-1UB00 500 / 50 80
31-5FE85-1AA0 500 to 575 131 145 4EU2751-3UB00 500 / 50 140
32-4FE85-1AA0 500 to 575 203 224 4EU3051-0UB00 500 / 50 200
32-7FE85-1AA0 500 to 575 233 257 4EU3051-1UB00 500 / 50 250
33-5FE85-1AA0 500 to 575 307 339 4EU3651-5UB00 500 / 50 315
34-2FE85-1AA0 500 to 575 366 404 4EU3651-6UB00 500 / 50 400
35-4FE85-1AA0 500 to 575 465 514 4EU3651-7UB00 500 / 50 500
37-7FH85-1AA0 500 to 575 671 741 4EU3951-7UA00 500 / 50 710
41-0FH85-1AA0 500 to 575 888 980 4EU4351-5UA00 500 / 50 910
41-3FK85-1AA0 500 to 575 1119 1235 4EU4551-1UA00 500 / 50 1120
41-3FK85-1AD0 500 to 575 1119 1235 4EU4551-1UA00 500 / 50 1120
41-5FK85-1AA0 500 to 575 1306 1442 4EU4551-2UA00 500 / 50 1250
41-5FK85-1AD0 500 to 575 1306 1442 4EU4551-2UA00 500 / 50 1250
41-8FK85-1AA0 500 to 575 1633 1803 4EU4751-0UA00 500 / 50 1600
41-8FK85-1AD0 500 to 575 1633 1803 4EU4751-0UA00 500 / 50 1600
31-4HE85-1AA0 660 to 690 123 136 4EU2751-4UB00 690 / 50 125
32-2HE85-1AA0 660 to 690 193 213 4EU3051-2UB00 690 / 50 180
32-7HE85-1AA0 660 to 690 234 258 4EU3651-8UB00 690 / 50 224
34-2HE85-1AA0 660 to 690 366 404 4EU3951-8UA00 690 / 50 400
35-3HE85-1AA0 660 to 690 465 514 4EU3951-0UB00 690 / 50 500
37-7HH85-1AA0 660 to 690 671 741 4EU4351-6UA00 690 / 50 710

12.96 Connection
Unit Order No. Rated input Regen.- Commutating reactor

Type Voltage / Frequency Rated
voltage curr. current current
6SE70 (V) (A) (A) (V / Hz) (V / Hz) (A)
41-0HH85-1AA0 660 to 690 888 980 4EU4551-3UA00 690 / 50 910
41-3HK85-1AA0 660 to 690 1119 1235 4EU4751-1UA00 690 / 50 1120
41-3HK85-1AD0 660 to 690 1119 1235 4EU4751-1UA00 690 / 50 1120
41-5HK85-1AA0 660 to 690 1306 1442 4EU5051-0UA00 690 / 50 1250
41-5HK85-1AD0 660 to 690 1306 1442 4EU5051-0UA00 690 / 50 1250
41-8HK85-1AA0 660 to 690 1633 1803 4EU5251-0UA00 690 / 50 1600
41-8HK85-1AD0 660 bi 690 1633 1803 4EU5251-0UA00 690 / 50 1600
Table 3.6 Recommended commutating reactor
Unit Order No. Rated Feed- Line voltage Autotransformer Autotransformer

input back range Duty factor Duty factor
current current 15%
Volt. Freq.. 100% 25%
6SE70 (A) (A) (V) (Hz)
22-1EC85-1AA0 18 20 380-415 50/60 4AP2795-0UA11-8A 4AP2595-0UA11-8A
440-460 60 4AP2795-0UA21-8A 4AP2595-0UA21-8A
24-1EC85-1AA0 36 40 380-415 50/60 4AP3095-0UA11-8A 4AP2795-0UA01-8A
440-460 60 4AP3095-0UA21-8A 4AP2795-0UA51-8A
28-6EC85-1AA0 74 82 380-415 50/60 4AU3995-0UA01-8A 4AP3095-0UA01-8A
440-460 60 4AU3995-0UA11-8A 4AP3095-0UA71-8A
31-7EE85-1AA0 149 165 380-415 50/60 4BU4595-0UA01-8A 4AU3995-0UA51-8A
440-460 60 4BU4395-0UA01-8A 4AU3695-0UA21-8A
32-2EE85-1AA0 192 212 380-415 50/60 4BU4595-0UA11-8A 4AU3995-0UA61-8A
440-460 60 4BU4595-0UA21-8A 4AU3995-0UB01-8A
33-1EE85-1AA0 269 297 380-415 50/60 4BU4795-0UA01-8A 4BU4395-0UA41-8A
440-460 60 4BU4795-0UA11-8A 4BU4395-0UA51-8A
33-8EE85-1AA0 326 360 380-415 50/60 4BU5295-0UA01-8A 4BU4595-0UA61-8A
440-460 60 4BU5195-0UA01-8A 4BU4595-0UA71-8A
34-6EE85-1AA0 403 444 380-415 50/60 4BU5395-0UA01-8A 4BU4795-0UA61-8A
440-460 60 4BU5395-0UA11-8A 4BU4795-0UA71-8A
36-1EE85-1AA0 526 581 380-415 50/60 4BU5495-0UA11-8A 4BU5195-0UA31-8A
440-460 60 4BU5495-0UA01-8A 4BU5195-0UA41-8A
38-2EH85-1AA0 710 784 380-415 50/60 4BU5695-0UA01-8A 4BU5395-0UA61-8A
440-460 60 4BU5695-0UA11-8A 4BU5295-0UA41-8A
41-0EH85-1AA0 888 980 380-415 50/60 4BU5895-0UA01-8A 4BU5495-0UA21-8A
440-460 60 4BU5895-0UA11-8A 4BU5495-0UA31-8A
41-3EK85-1AA0 1156 1276 380-415 50/60 4BU6095-0UA01-8A 4BU5695-0UA41-8A
440-460 60 4BU5995-0UA01-8A 4BU5595-0UA31-8A

Connection 12.96

current current 15%
Volt. Freq.. 100% 25%
6SE70 (A) (A) (V) (Hz)
41-3EK85-1AD0 1156 1276 380-415 50/60 4BU6095-0UA01-8A 4BU5695-0UA41-8A
440-460 60 4BU5995-0UA01-8A 4BU5595-0UA31-8A
41-8EK85-1AA0 1542 1702 380-415 50/60 4BU6295-0UA01-8A 4BU5895-0UA51-8A
440-460 60 4BU6295-0UA71-8A 4BU5695-0UA51-8A
41-8EK85-1AD0 1542 1702 380-415 50/60 4BU6295-0UA01-8A 4BU5895-0UA51-8A
440-460 60 4BU6295-0UA71-8A 4BU5695-0UA51-8A
22-7FC85-1AA0 24 26 500 50/60 4AP3095-0UA31-8A 4AP2795-0UA61-8A
575 60 4AP3095-0UA51-8A 4AP2595-0UA01-8A
24-1FC85-1AA0 36 40 500 50/60 4AU3695-0UA41-8A 4AP2795-0UA71-8A
575 60 4AP3695-0UA01-8A 4AP2795-0UA31-8A
27-2FC85-1AA0 62 69 500 50/60 4AU3995-0UA21-8A 4AP3095-0UA81-8A
575 60 4AP3695-0UA11-8A 4AP3095-0UA61-8A
28-8FC85-1AA0 82 90 500 50/60 4AU3995-0UA31-8A 4AU3695-0UA31-8A
575 60 4AU3995-0UA71-8A 4AU3095-0UA01-8A
31-5FE85-1AA0 131 145 500 50/60 4BU4595-0UA31-8A 4AU3995-0UB11-8A
575 60 4BU4595-0UB11-8A 4UA3995-0UA41-8A
32-4FE85-1AA0 203 224 500 50/60 4BU4795-0UA21-8A 4BU4395-0UA61-8A
575 60 4BU4795-0UB01-8A 4BU4395-0UA11-8A
32-7FE85-1AA0 233 257 500 50/60 4BU5195-0UA11-8A 4BU4595-0UA81-8A
575 60 4BU5195-0UA61-8A 4BU4395-0UA21-8A
33-5FE85-1AA0 307 339 500 50/60 4BU5295-0UA11-8A 4BU4595-0UB01-8A
575 60 4BU5295-0UA51-8A 4BU4595-0UA41-8A
34-2FE85-1AA0 366 404 500 50/60 4BU5395-0UA21-8A 4BU4795-0UA81-8A
575 60 4BU5495-0UA51-8A 4BU4795-0UA41-8A
35-4FE85-1AA0 465 514 500 50/60 4BU5595-0UA01-8A 4BU5195-0UA51-8A
575 60 4BU5595-0UA51-8A 4BU5195-0UA21-8A
37-7FH85-1AA0 671 741 500 50/60 4BU5895-0UA21-8A 4BU5495-0UA41-8A
575 60 4BU5895-0UA71-8A 4BU5395-0UA41-8A
41-0FH85-1AA0 888 980 500 50/60 4BU6095-0UA11-8A 4BU5595-0UA41-8A
575 60 4BU5995-0UA31-8A 4BU5595-0UA21-8A
41-3FK85-1AA0 1119 1235 500 50/60 4BU6295-0UA11-8A 4BU5695-0UA61-8A
575 60 4BU6295-0UA51-8A 4BU5695-0UA21-8A
41-3FK85-1AD0 1119 1235 500 50/60 4BU6295-0UA11-8A 4BU5695-0UA61-8A
575 60 4BU6295-0UA51-8A 4BU5695-0UA21-8A
41-5FK85-1AA0 1306 1442 500 50/60 4BU6295-0UA21-8A 4BU5895-0UA61-8A
575 60 4BU6295-0UA61-8A 4BU5895-0UA81-8A

12.96 Connection

current current 15%
Volt. Freq.. 100% 25%
6SE70 (A) (A) (V) (Hz)
41-5FK85-1AD0 1306 1442 500 50/60 4BU6295-0UA21-8A 4BU5895-0UA61-8A
575 60 4BU6295-0UA61-8A 4BU5895-0UA81-8A
41-8FK85-1AA0 1633 1803 500 50/60 4BU6495-0UA01-8A 4BU5995-0UA21-8A
575 60 4BU6395-0UA11-8A 4BU5995-0UA41-8A
41-8FK85-1AD0 1633 1803 500 50/60 4BU6495-0UA01-8A 4BU5995-0UA21-8A
575 60 4BU6395-0UA11-8A 4BU5995-0UA41-8A
31-4HE85-1AA0 123 136 660-690 50/60 4BU4795-0UA31-8A 4BU4395-0UA31-8A
32-2HE85-1AA0 193 213 660-690 50/60 4BU5295-0UA21-8A 4BU4595-0UA51-8A
32-7HE85-1AA0 234 258 660-690 50/60 4BU5395-0UA31-8A 4BU4795-0UA51-8A
34-2HE85-1AA0 366 404 660-690 50/60 4BU5595-0UA11-8A 4BU5295-0UA31-8A
35-3HE85-1AA0 465 514 660-690 50/60 4BU5895-0UA31-8A 4BU5395-0UA51-8A
37-7HH85-1AA0 671 741 660-690 50/60 4BU6095-0UA21-8A 4BU5695-0UA31-8A
41-0HH85-1AA0 898 992 660-690 50/60 4BU6295-0UA31-8A 4BU5895-0UA41-8A
41-3HK85-1AA0 1119 1235 660-690 50/60 4BU6395-0UA01-8A 4BU5995-0UA11-8A
41-3HK85-1AD0 1119 1235 660-690 50/60 4BU6395-0UA01-8A 4BU5995-0UA11-8A
41-5HK85-1AA0 1306 1442 660-690 50/60 4BU6495-0UA11-8A 4BU6095-0UA31-8A
41-5HK85-1AD0 1306 1442 660-690 50/60 4BU6495-0UA11-8A 4BU6095-0UA31-8A
41-8HK85-1AA0 1633 1803 660-690 50/60 4BU6595-0UA01-8A 4BU6295-0UA41-8A
41-8HK85-1AD0 1633 1803 660-690 50/60 4BU6595-0UA01-8A 4BU6295-0UA41-8A
Table 3.7 Recommended autotransformers

Connection 12.96
3.2 Power supply and main contactor

The power supply and main contactor control circuit are connected through five-pin connector X9 (sizes C and
E: on module A23, sizes H and K: at the bottom-left of the unit)
Single-core cables with conductor cross-sections of 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (AWG: 24 PS Main contactor
to 14) can be connected to X9 (finely stranded 1.5 mm2 with core end ferrules). 24V DC control
P M
The main contactor is driven over isolated contacts X9.4 and X9.5. 1 2 3 4 5
X9
Technical specifications of main contact control circuit: 230V
Size C: max. 3A at p.f.0.4; max. making capacity 1500VA; with switching
voltage of 30 V DC, max 5A DC 230V AC
Size E, H, K: max. 5A at p.f.0.4; max. making capacity 3000VA; with
Figure 3.3 24 V DC and main
switching voltage of 30 V DC, max 8A DC
contactor control
connections
Terminal Function description

X9-1 DC +24V (tolerance range 20V - 30V) max. current consumption 2A at +24V
max. current consumption without options:
1A for basic unit (master)
0.3A for parallel unit (slave)
X9-2 Reference potential for DC X9-1
X9-3 not connected (N.C.)
X9-4 Main contactor control circuit
X9-5 Main contactor control circuit
Table 3.8 Connector X9 pin assignments for auxiliary power supply and main contactor control
Terminal X9.1 fused with fuse (F1) T2A/250V time-lag 5x20mm

and for parallel unit via connector x27 (for size K):
fused with fuse (F5) T2A/250V time-lag 5x20mm
Terminal X9.2 Sizes C and E:
fused with fuse (F2) T3.2A/250V time-lag 5x20mm
(19198-T3,2A/250V Messrs. Wickmann-Werke GmbH or 0034.3998 FSD Messrs. Schurter)
Sizes H and K:
fused with fuse (F2) T7A/250V time-lag 6.3x32mm (¼“ x 1¼“)
(19343-T7A/250V Messrs. Wickmann-Werke GmbH and/or 0034.5243 FST Messrs. Schurter)
NOTE
The main contactor’s operating coil must be protected, for example, by RC elements (Chapter 9).

12.96 Connection
3.2.1 Short-circuit withstand capability for sizes H and K
In the event of a line-side short-circuit in front of the super-fast built-in fuses, the power fed in from the supply
depends on the protective devices provided on the system-side (NH fuses or circuit-breakers).
To ensure that the forces and temperatures that result from short-circuits of this type can be kept within
acceptable limits for the units, the following values calculated in accordance with DIN VDE 0660 Part 500 must
be complied with by the supply and by the fuses or circuit-breakers connected before the unit.
Size H:
Rated short-time withstand current: Icw = 27.86 kA / 1s or Icw = 88.1 kA / 0,1s
Rated surge withstand current: Ipk =85 kA
The power rails must be mechanically buffered to absorb the short-circuit forces directly in front of their entry
point into the unit.
Size K:
Rated short-time withstand current: Icw = 69,86 kA / 1s or Icw = 220 kA / 0,1s
Rated surge withstand current: Ipk =85 kA
The power rails must be mechanically buffered to absorb the short-circuit forces directly in front of their entry
point into the unit.
3.3 Control terminal block and serial interface
WARNING
The rectifier/regenerating unit must be isolated before connecting the control leads to the
CUR
You can control the rectifier/regenerating unit over the following interfaces:
Control terminal block on the CUR electronic module
RS 485 serial interface on the CUR electronic module
Operator panel OP 1 (see Chapter 9 Options)
RS485 and RS232 serial interface on the PMU X300
CAUTION
The CUR incorporates ESD-endangered components that may be destroyed if improperly
handled. See also under the measures recommended to protect ESD-endangered
components in the introductory chapter entitled "General".
3.3.1 Connectors for the control terminal block
Conductors with cross-sectional areas of 0.14 to 1.5 mm2 (AWG: 26 to 16), or 1 mm2 (AWG: 18), finely stranded
with core end ferrules, can be connected to the connectors (Recommended: 0.5 mm2 (AWG: 20)).

Connection 12.96
3.3.2 Connecting the control leads
NOTE
When installed, control leads must be shielded and isolated from the power cables, laying them at a minimum
spacing of 20 cm. The shield must be connected at both ends. On the unit's housing, the shield is
connected with shield clamps. Handling of these clamps is shown in Figure 3.4.
If they intersect, control and power cables must be run at an angle of 90° to each other.
Fitting the shielding clamp

15 mm 7.5 mm 5 mm
Connector
Slide on shield and

secure with
Adapt length shrink-on tubing, for
to design example
Do not bend Releasing the shielding clamp

spring over
35 Manually or using a screwdriver,
press the clamp together and extrac
it in the upward direction.
Shield Caution!
The clamps are sharp-edged!
Figure 3.6 Connecting the control leads and handling the shielding clamps
If two shielding clamps cannot cope with the number of control leads on the Size C unit, the "EMC shielding
enclosure" option should be used.
Order number:
Size C 6SE7090-0XC87-3CA0

12.96 Connection
3.3.3 Terminals and setting elements on the CUR (A10) module
R135
A10
CUR
PMU
X100 S1
S2
X101
X102
R136
X104
Figure 3.7 Control terminals and setting elements on the CUR
Setting elements:
DIP switches S1, S2: Both open: No bus termination for the RS485 interface (terminals X100-1 to X100-4)
Both closed: Bus termination for the RS485 interface active (1500 between
RS485P and RS485N, 3900 from RS485P to +5V supply, 390
from RS485N to earth)
R135 and R136: 0 resistances as earth-frame (M) connection
M is connected to earth when the unit is supplied. Remove these resistances only to
avoid faults due to earth loops, i.e. if the electronics frame is connected in some other
way to earth (e.g. through signal leads or the frame terminal of the power supply unit).
If option modules are used, a further earth-frame (M) connection may have to be
removed. (please refer to the description of these modules).

Connection 12.96
Electronics terminals:
Function Terminal Connected loads/Description

Serial interface X100-1 RS485P Plus line Send and receive-
RS485 (Bus) X100-2 RS485N Minus line line
X100-3 RS485P Plus line (difference input/output)
X100-4 RS485N Minus line
X100-5 Signal frame
For functions see Section 4.3.6.1
Binary inputs X101-6 P24S +24V power supply for external
contacts, max. load 100mA
X101-7 Frame for binary signals
X101-8 Frame for binary signals
X101-9 Binary input 1
Low level: -0.6V - 3V or floating terminals

High level: 13V - 33V
Input current at 24V: ca. 10mA
For functions see Section 4.3.2
Analog outputs X102-14 Analog output resolution 8 bits,
For functions see Section 4.3.5
X102-15 Frame for analog outputs
X102-16 Actual current value: 0V - 5V corresponds to
0A - rated DC current
Display range: 0 - 10V, max. 5mA load, current limited
Binary outputs X104-17 Binary output 1, pin 1

X104-18 Binary output 1, pin 2

The binary outputs are normally-open relay contacts

At 50V AC max. switching voltage, the following applies:
Max. switching current 1A~ at p.f. =1
Max. switching current 0.12A AC at p.f. = 0.4
At max. 30V DC switching voltage, the following
applies::
Max. switching current 0.8A (resistive loads)
For functions see Section 4.3.3 and 4.3.1.2 (status
word)
Table 3.9 Control terminal block

12.96 Connection
3.3.4 Connecting-up the parameterizing unit (PMU)
A serial connection to automation unit or a PC can be realized via

connector X300 on the PMU. Thus, the rectifier/regenerating unit
can be controlled and operated from the central control station or
control room.
X300
P 5 4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6
Figure 3.8 Parameterizing unit (PMU)
PMU -X300 Description

1 Housing ground
2 Receive line, RS232 standard (V.24)
3 Transmit- and receive line, RS485, two-wire, positive differential input/output
4 RTS (Request to send; for direction reversal in the case of interface converters
5 Ref. potential (ground)
6 5 V power supply for OP
7 Transmit line, RS232 standard (V.24)
8 Transmit- and receive line RS485, two-wire, negative differential input/output
9 Ref. potential for RS232 or RS485 interface
Table 3.10 Connector pin assignment for interface X300
3.4 Measures for keeping to RFI suppression regulations

To appear shortly

3AC 50-60Hz, 400V
3AC 50-60Hz, 500V 3.5
3-20
1AC 50-60Hz, 230V
Figure 3.9
Connection
K1
Filter
(optional)
binary selecting inputs
24V-power supply
RS485 ê OP1, SIMOVIS unit
RS232 ê SIMOVIS
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
X9-1 X9-2 X9-3 X9-4 X9-5
X101
X300
F1 F2
P24 M M
K1-2 PE X1: U1 V1 W1 X4: 1U2 1V2 1W2
Power supply L1 L2 L3 1T1 1T2 1T3
X308 X108 +24V
PMU A10
C98043-A1680 +5V +15V -15V +24V
Load
RESET
L_DSAVE
Option modules X107
X109 X239
BI
P5
X100 390Ω Microprocessor selection:

RS485P 12
1 Open and closed-loop
2 control of the DC link
S1
RS485 3 150Ω voltage
RS485N
4 12
5 M
S2
P5 390Ω
A23
R15 M C98043-A1681
X115 X30-1 R100 E1
P
Single-line diagram with suggested circuit arrangement without autotransformer, Size C

1 R16 10nF
N RS485 M ϑ M
2 820k X30-2
P A01 Iact BO
RS485 3 TTL
N R135
4 X20.1-1
M X116 R136 M X20.1-2
5 M
X117 10nF
X102 X104 F10
A2
C98043-A1690 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Single-line diagrams with suggested circuit arrangements
binary selecting outputs X1: C/L+ X1: D/L-
analog outputs

12.96
3AC 50-60Hz, 400V
3AC 50-60Hz, 500V
12.96
1AC 50-60Hz, 230V
Figure 3.10
K1
1
Filter
(optional)
24V-power supply
RS232 ê SIMOVIS ϑ
1U1 2U1
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1U1
X9-1 X9-2 X9-3 X9-4 X9-5 1V1 2V1
1V1
X101 1W1
X300 1W1 2W1
F1 F2
P24 M M
K1-2 PE X1: U1 V1 W1 X4: 1U2 1V2 1W2
X308 X108 +24V
PMU A10

C98043-A1680 +5V +15V -15V +24V
Bürde
RESET
L_DSAVE
Option modules X107
X109 X239
BI
P5

RS485P 12
S1
RS485N
4 12
5 M
S2
P5 390Ω
A23
R15 M C98043-A1681
Single-line diagram with suggested circuit arrangement with autotransformer, Size C

X115 X30-1 R100 E1
P
1 R16 10nF
N RS485 M ϑ M
2 820k X30-2
P A01 Iact BO
RS485 3 TTL
N R135
4 X20.1-1
M X116 R136 M X20.1-2
5 M
X117 10nF
X102 X104 F10
A2
C98043-A1690 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
analog outputs
3-21
Connection
3AC 50-60Hz, 400V
3AC 50-60Hz, 500V
3AC 50-60Hz, 690V
3-22
1AC 50-60Hz, 230V
Connection
Figure 3.11
K1
Filter
(optional)
24V-power supply
RS232 ê SIMOVIS
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
X9-1 X9-2 X9-3 X9-4 X9-5
X101
X300
F1 F2
P24 M M
K1-2 PE X1: U1 V1 W1 X4: 1U2 1V2 1W2
X308 X108
PMU +5V +15V -15V +24V

A10
C98043-A1680
RESET
Bürde
L_DSAVE
X109 X239
Option modules X107
BI
P5

RS485P 12
S1
RS485N
4 12
5 M
S2
P5 390Ω
A23
R15 M
C98043-A1682
X115 X30-1 R100 E1
P
Single-line diagram with suggested circuit arrangement without autotransformer, Size E

1 R16 10nF
RS485 M
N M ϑ 1~
2 820k X30-2
P A01 Iact BO
RS485 3 TTL X29.3
N R135
4 X29.2
M X116 R136 M
5 M
10nF F3 F4 X29.1
X117
X102 X104 F10
A2
C98043-A1690 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 X19-1 X19-2

analog outputs

12.96
3AC 50-60Hz, 400V
3AC 50-60Hz, 500V
3AC 50-60Hz, 690V
12.96
1AC 50-60Hz, 230V
Figure 3.12
K1
1
Filter
(optional)
24V-power supply
RS232 ê SIMOVIS ϑ
1U1 2U1
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1U1
X9-1 X9-2 X9-3 X9-4 X9-5 1V1 2V1
1V1
X101 1W1
X300 1W1 2W1
F1 F2
P24 M M
K1-2 PE X1: U1 V1 W1 X4: 1U2 1V2 1W2
X308 X108
PMU +5V +15V -15V +24V

A10

C98043-A1680
RESET
Bürde
L_DSAVE
X109 X239
Option modules X107
BI
P5
X100 390 Ω Microprocessor selection:

RS485P 12
S1
RS485 3 150 Ω voltage
RS485N
4 12
5 M
S2
P5 390 Ω
A23
R15 M
C98043-A1682
Single-line diagram with suggested circuit arrangement with autotransformer, Size E

X115 X30-1 R100 E1
P
1 R16 10nF
RS485 M
N M ϑ 1~
2 820k X30-2
P A01 Iact BO
RS485 3 TTL X29.3
N R135
4 X29.2
M X116 R136 M
5 M
10nF F3 F4 X29.1
X117
X102 X104 F10
A2
C98043-A1690 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 X19-1 X19-2

analog outputs
3-23
Connection
3AC 50-60Hz, 400V
3AC 50-60Hz, 500V
3AC 50-60Hz, 690V
3-24
1AC 50-60Hz, 230V
Connection
Figure 3.13
K1
24V-power Filter
supply unit (optional)
X9-1 X9-2 X9-3 X9-4 X9-5
RS485 ê OP1, SIMOVIS
RS232 ê SIMOVIS
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
X9-1 X9-2 X9-3 X9-4 X9-5
X101
X300
F5 F1 F2
P24 M M K1-2
PE X1: U1 V1 W1 X4: 1U2 1V2 1W2
L1 L2 L3 1T1 1T2 1T3
X308 X108
Power supply
PMU A10
C98043-A1680 +5V +15V -15V +24V
Bürde
RESET
X109 X239
L_DSAVE
Option modules X107
BI
P5
X100 390 Ω 12
Microprocessor selection:
RS485P
S1 12
RS485 3 150 Ω voltage A23
RS485N
4 C98043-A1685
5 M
S2
P5 390 Ω
M X30-1 ϑ E1 M
R15 1~
X30-2 R100
X115
P X31-1 ϑ
Single-line diagram with suggested circuit arrangement without autotransformer, Size H

1 R16 10nF
N RS485 M X31-2 R101
2 820k
P A01 Iact BO
RS485 3 TTL X29.3
N R135
X20.2 X20.1
4 M X29.2
X116 R136 M X29.1
5 M
X27 F3 F4
X117 10nF
A2 X102 X104 X19-1 X19-2
C98043-A1690 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
binary selecting outputs X19-1 X19-2

analog outputs X1: C/L+ X1: D/L-
1AC 230V

12.96
3AC 50-60Hz, 400V
3AC 50-60Hz, 500V
3AC 50-60Hz, 690V
12.96
1AC 50-60Hz, 230V
Figure 3.14
K1
24V-power 1
Filter
X9-1 X9-2 X9-3 X9-4 X9-5
RS232 ê SIMOVIS ϑ
1U1 2U1
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1U1
X9-1 X9-2 X9-3 X9-4 X9-5 1V1 2V1
1V1
X101 1W1
X300 1W1 2W1
F5 F1 F2
P24 M M K1-2
PE X1: U1 V1 W1 X4: 1U2 1V2 1W2
L1 L2 L3 1T1 1T2 1T3
X308 X108
Power supply
PMU A10

C98043-A1680 +5V +15V -15V +24V
Bürde
RESET
X109 X239
L_DSAVE
Option modules X107
BI
P5
X100 390 Ω 12
RS485P
S1 12
RS485N
4 C98043-A1685
5 M
S2
P5 390 Ω
M X30-1 ϑ E1 M
R15 1~
X30-2
Single-line diagram with suggested circuit arrangement with autotransformer, Size H

R100
X115
P X31-1 ϑ
1 R16 10nF
N RS485 M X31-2
2
R101
820k
P A01 Iact BO
RS485 3 TTL X29.3
N R135
X20.2 X20.1
4 M X29.2
X116 R136 M X29.1
5 M
X27 F3 F4
10nF
X117
A2 X102 X104 X19-1 X19-2
C98043-A1690 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

1AC 230V
3-25
Connection
3AC 50-60Hz, 400V
3AC 50-60Hz, 500V
3AC 50-60Hz, 690V
3-26
1AC 50-60Hz, 230V
Connection
Figure 3.15
K1
24V-power Filter
X9-1 X9-2 X9-3 X9-4 X9-5
RS232 ê SIMOVIS
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
X9-1 X9-2 X9-3 X9-4 X9-5
X101
X300
F5 F1 F2
P24 M M K1-2
PE X1: U1 V1 W1 X4: 1U2 1V2 1W2
L1 L2 L3 1T1 1T2 1T3
X308 X108
Power supply
PMU A10
C98043-A1680 +5V +15V -15V +24V
Bürde
RESET
X109 X239
L_DSAVE
Option modules X107
BI
P5
X100 390 Ω 12
RS485P
S1 12
RS485N
4 C98043-A1685
5 M
S2
P5 390 Ω
X30-1 ϑ E2 M E1 M
R15 M 1~ 1~
X30-2 R100
X115
P X31-1 ϑ
Single-line diagram with suggested circuit arrangement without autotransformer, Size K

1 R16 10nF
N RS485 M X31-2
2
R101
820k
P A01 Iact BO
RS485 3 TTL X29.3
N R135
X20.2 X20.1
4 M X29.2
X116 R136 M X29.1
5 M
X27 F3 F4
10nF
X117
A2 X102 X104 X19-1 X19-2
C98043-A1690 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Connections for

parallel unit
1AC 230V

12.95
3AC 50-60Hz, 400V
3AC 50-60Hz, 500V
3AC 50-60Hz, 690V
12.95
1AC 50-60Hz, 230V
Figure 3.16
K1
24V-power 1
Filter
X9-1 X9-2 X9-3 X9-4 X9-5
RS232 ê SIMOVIS ϑ
1U1 2U1
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1U1
X9-1 X9-2 X9-3 X9-4 X9-5 1V1 2V1
1V1
X101 1W1
X300 1W1 2W1
F5 F1 F2
P24 M M K1-2
PE X1: U1 V1 W1 X4: 1U2 1V2 1W2
L1 L2 L3 1T1 1T2 1T3
X308 X108
Power supply
PMU A10

C98043-A1680 +5V +15V -15V +24V
Bürde
RESET
X109 X239
L_DSAVE
Option modules X107
BI
P5
X100 390 Ω 12
RS485P
S1 12
RS485N
4 C98043-A1685
5 M
S2
P5 390 Ω
X30-1 ϑ E2 M E1 M
R15 M 1~ 1~
Single-line diagram with suggested circuit arrangement with autotransformer, Size K

X30-2 R100
X115
P X31-1 ϑ
1 R16 10nF
N RS485 M X31-2 R101
2 820k
P A01 Iact BO
RS485 3 TTL X29.3
N R135
X20.2 X20.1
4 M X29.2
X116 R136 M X29.1
5 M
X27 F3 F4
X117 10nF
A2 X102 X104 X19-1 X19-2
C98043-A1690 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Connections for

parallel unit
1AC 230V
3-27
Connection
3-28
Figure 3.17
3.6
Connection
1
X1: U1/ V1/ W1/ PE X4: 1U2/ 1V2/ 1W2/

Power section, 6SE7022-1EC85-1AA0, 6SE7024-1EC85-1AA0 and 6SE7028-6EC85-1AA0,(380-460V / 21A, 41A and 86A)
L1 L2 L3 1T1 1T2 1T3
Power sections
E1
Termal sensor M
ϑ
on the heatsink
R100 X47-1
X20.1-1
X20.1-2
k
X20-1
X20-2
K k K X47-4
Load 2
T1 T2 X47-3
R76
R78
L l L l X47-2
X30-1
X30-2
Load 1
R75
R77
- +
X48-1
X239
K k K k X48-4
T3 T4 X48-3
L l L l F1
X48-2 T2A
+ X9-1
A10-X109
(C98043-A1680) F2
X24-1 T3,2A X9-2
-
X11-1 G1 G2 X24-2
X11-2
K X9-3
N.C.
Arrangement of thyristor modules K AK A A AK
X9-4
V11+V14 V21+V24 X21-2 K1-2
D/L- X14-2 G2 G1 X21-1
X1: U1/L1 V1/L2 W1/L3 C/L+ X9-5
X14-1
X26-1
X13-1 G1 G2 X26-2
T1 T2 X13-2
K
X24 X21 X26 X23 X22 X25 K AK A A AK
F10 V13+V16 V23+V26
G2 G1 G2 G1 G2 G1 X23-2
X16-2 G2 G1 X23-1
X16-1
A A A
X22-1
X15-1 G1 G2 X22-2
K K K X15-2
K
K AK A A AK
AK AK AK
V15+V12 V25+V22 X25-2
V21+24 V23+26 V25+22
X12-2 G2 G1 X25-1
X12-1
V11+14 V13+16 V15+12

AK AK AK
1W2
1U2
1V2
U1
W1
V1
K K K
A23
C C98043-A1681 D
A A A
A23 A23
C98043-A1681 C98043-A1681
G1 G2 G1 G2 G1 G2
X11 X14 X13 X16 X15 X12

F10
T3 T4
X4: 1U2/1T1 1V2/1T2 1W2/1T3 X1: C/L+ X1: D/L-
12.95
12.95
X1: U1/ V1/ W1/ PE X4: 1U2/ 1V2/ 1W2/

L1 L2 L3 1T1 1T2 1T3
Figure 3.18
E1
Termal sensor ϑ M
on the heatsink 1~
R100 X47-1
K k K k X47-4
230V~
T1 T2 X47-3
R76
R78
R80
L l L l X47-2
Load 2
X30-1
X30-2
X29-1
X29-2
X29-3
X19-1
X19-2
R75
R77
R79
F3 F4
Load 1
T2A T2A X48-1

X239
K k K k X48-4
K101-2 T3 T4 X48-3
L l L l F1
X48-2 T2A
+ X9-1
A10-X109

(C98043-A1680) F2
X24-1 T3,2A
- X9-2
X11-1 G1 G2 K2 X24-2
X11-2
A AK K X9-3
N.C.
K AK A
V11+V14 V21+V24 X9-4
Arrangement of thyristor modules K1-2
X14-2 G2 G1 K1 X21-2
X21-1 X9-5
C/L+ D/L- X14-1
X26-1
X13-1 G1 G2 K2 X26-2
X13-2
Power section, 6SE7031-7EE85-1AA0 (380-460V / 173A)

F10 A AK K
X14 X11 X16 X13 X12 X15 K AK A
V13+V16 V23+V26
G2 G1 G2 G1 G2 G1
X16-2 G2 G1 K1 X23-2
A A A
X16-1 X23-1
X22-1
K K K X15-1 G1
G2 K2 X22-2
X15-2
AK AK AK A AK K
K AK A
V15+V12 V25+V22
X12-2 G2
G1 K1 X25-2
V11+14 V13+16 V15+12
X12-1 X25-1
T1 T2
R15+R12
R25+R22
R11+R14
R13+R16
R21+R24
R23+R26
G2 G1 G2 G1 G2 G1
X24 X21 X26 X23 X22 X25
K2 A K1 K2 A K1 K2 A K1
A23 A23
C98043-A1682 C98043-A1682
U1.1
U1.2
V1.1
V1.2
A601
W1.1
W1.2
1U2.1
1U2.2
1V2.1
1V2.2
1W2.1
1W2.2
K K K
C
C98043-A1683
D
AK AK AK
V21+ V24 V23+ V26 V25+ V22

F10
T3 T4
U1/L1 1U2/1T1 V1/L2 1V2/1T2 W1/L3 1W2/1T3 X1: C/L+ X1: D/L-
3-29
Connection
3-30
X1: U1/ V1/ W1/ PE X4: 1U2/ 1V2/ 1W2/
L1 L2 L3 1T1 1T2 1T3
Connection
Figure 3.19
E1
Termal sensor ϑ M
on the heatsink 1~
R100 X47-1
K k K k X47-4
230V~
T1 T2 X47-3
R76
R78
R80
L l L l X47-2
Load 2
X30-1
X30-2
X29-1
X29-2
X29-3
X19-1
X19-2
R75
R77
R79
F3 F4
Load 1
T2A T2A X48-1

X239
K k K k X48-4
K101-2 T3 T4 X48-3
L l L l F1
X48-2 T2A
+ X9-1
A10-X109
(C98043-A1680) F2
X11-1 X24-1 T3,2A X9-2
K1 G1
-
X11-2 G2 K2 X24-2
K AK A A AK K X9-3
N.C.
V11+V14 V21+V24 X9-4
K1-2
X14-2 K2 G2 G1 K1 X21-2
Arrangement of thyristor modules X14-1 X21-1 X9-5
C/L+ D/L- X13-1 X26-1

X13-2 K1 G1 G2 K2 X26-2

K AK A A AK K
F10
V13+V16 V23+V26
G2 G1 G2 G1 X13 G2 G1
X14 X11 X16 X12 X15 K2 G2 G1 K1
K2 A K1 K2 A K1 K2 A K1 X16-2 X23-2
X16-1 X23-1
K K K X15-1 X22-1
X15-2 K1 G1 G2 K2 X22-2
AK AK AK K AK A A AK K
V11+ V14 V13+ V16 V15+ V12 V15+V12 V25+V22

X12-2 K2 G2 G1 K1 X25-2
T1 T2 X12-1 X25-1
R11+R14
R13+R16
R15+R12
R21+R24
R23+R26
R25+R22
G2 G1 G2 G1 G2 G1
X24 X21 X26 X23 X22 X25
K2 A K1 K2 A K1 K2 A K1
A23 A23
C98043-A1682 C98043-A1682
U1.1
U1.2
V1.1
V1.2
A601
W1.1
W1.2
1V2.1
1V2.2
1U2.1
1U2.2
1W2.1
1W2.2
K K K
C
C98043-A1683
D
AK AK AK
V21+ V24 V23+ V26 V25+ V22
F10
T3 T4

12.95
12.95
X1: U1/ V1/ W1/ PE X4: 1U2/ 1V2/ 1W2/

L1 L2 L3 1T1 1T2 1T3
Figure 3.20
E1
Termal sensor ϑ M
on the heatsink 1~
R100 X47-1
K k K k X47-4
230V~
T1 T2 X47-3
R76
R78
R80
L l L l X47-2
Load 2
X30-1
X30-2
X29-1
X29-2
X29-3
X19-1
X19-2
R75
R77
R79
F3 F4
Load 1
T2A T2A X48-1

X239
K k K k X48-4
K101-2 T3 T4 X48-3
L l L l F1
X48-2 T2A
+ X9-1
A10-X109

(C98043-A1680) F2
X11-1 X24-1 T3,2A X9-2
K1 G1
-
X11-2 G2 K2 X24-2
K AK A A AK K X9-3
N.C.
V11+V14 V21+V24 X9-4
K1-2
X14-2 K2 G2 G1 K1 X21-2
C/L+ D/L- X13-1 X26-1

X13-2 K1 G1 G2 K2 X26-2

K AK A A AK K
F10
V13+V16 V23+V26
G2 G1 G2 G1 X13 G2 G1
X14 X11 X16 X12 X15 K2 G2 G1 K1
K2 A K1 K2 A K1 K2 A K1 X16-2 X23-2
X16-1 X23-1
K K K X15-1 X22-1
X15-2 K1 G1 G2 K2 X22-2
V11+ V14 V13+ V16 V15+ V12 V15+V12 V25+V22

X12-2 K2 G2 G1 K1 X25-2
T1 T2 X12-1 X25-1
R21
R24
R23
R26
R25
R22
R11+R14
R13+R16
R15+R12
G2 G1 G2 G1 G2 G1
X24 X21 X26 X23 X22 X25
K2 A K1 K2 A K1 K2 A K1
A23 A23
C98043-A1682 C98043-A1682
U1.1
U1.2
V1.1
V1.2
A601
W1.1
W1.2
1V2.1
1V2.2
1U2.1
1U2.2
1W2.1
1W2.2
K K K
C
C98043-A1683
D
AK AK AK
V21+ V24 V23+ V26 V25+ V22
F10
T3 T4
3-31
Connection
3-32
X1: U1/ V1/ W1/ PE X4: 1U2/ 1V2/ 1W2/
L1 L2 L3 1T1 1T2 1T3
Figure 3.21
Connection
E1
Termal sensor M
on the heatsink ϑ 1~
R100 X47-1
K k K k X47-4
230V~
T1 T2 X47-3
R76
R78
R80
L l L l X47-2
Load 2
X30-1
X30-2
X29-1
X29-2
X29-3
X19-1
X19-2
R75
R77
R79
F3 F4
Load 1
T2A T2A X48-1

X239 k X48-4
K k K
K101-2 T3 T4 X48-3
L l L l F1
X48-2 T2A X9-1
A10-X109
(C98043-A1680) F2
X11-1 X24-1 T3,2A X9-2
X11-2 K1 G1 G2 K2 X24-2
Arrangement of thyristor modules
K AK A A AK K X9-3
C/L+ D/L-
V11+V14 V21+V24 X9-4
K1-2
X14-2 K2 G2 G1 K1 X21-2
F10 X14-1 X21-1 X9-5
X14 X11 X16 X13 X12 X15 X13-1 X26-1

X13-2 K1 G1 G2 K2 X26-2
K2 G2 G1K1 K2 G2 G1 K1 K2 G2 G1 K1
A A A K AK A A AK K
V13+V16 V23+V26
K K K X16-2 K2 G2 G1 K1 X23-2
X16-1 X23-1
V11+V14 V13+V16 V15+V12
X15-1 X22-1
AK AK AK
X15-2 K1 G1 G2 K2 X22-2
K AK A A AK K
T1 T2 V15+V12 V25+V22
X12-2 K2 G2 G1 K1 X25-2
X12-1 X25-1
X24 X21 X26 X23 X22 X25
K2 G2 G1 K1 K2 G2 G1 K1 K2 G2 G1 K1
R21
R24
R23
R26
R25
R22
R11+R14
R13+R16
R15+R12
A A A
A23 A23
C98043-A1682 C98043-A1682
U1.1
U1.2
V1.1
V1.2
A601
W1.1
W1.2
1V2.1
1V2.2
1U2.1
1U2.2
1W2.1
1W2.2
K K K
Power section, 6SE7033-8EE85-1AA0 and 6SE7034-6EE85-1AA0 (380-460V / 375A and 463A)

C
C98043-A1683
V21+V24 V23+V26 V25+V22 D
AK AK AK
F10
T3 T4
U1/L1 1U2/1T1 V1/L2 1V2/1T2 W1/L3 1W2/1T3 X1: C/L+ X1:D/L-

12.95
X1: U1/ V1/ W1/ PE X4: 1U2/ 1V2/ 1W2/
12.95
L1 L2 L3 1T1 1T2 1T3
E1
Figure 3.22
Termal sensor M
ϑ 1~
on the heatsink X47-1
R100
K k K k X47-4
230V~ T1 T2 X47-3 R76
R78
R80
L l L l X47-2
Load 2
X30-1
X30-2
X29-1
X29-2
X29-3
X19-1
X19-2
R75
R77
R79
Load 1
F3 F4
T2A T2A X48-1
X239 K k K k X48-4
T3 T4 X48-3
K101-2 F1
L l L l X48-2 T2A X9-1
A10-X109
F2
(C98043-A1680) X11-1 X24-1 T3,2A X9-2
X11-2 K1 G1 G2 K2 X24-2
K AK A A AK K X9-3

V11+V14 V21+V24 X9-4
X14-2 K2 G2 G1 K1 X21-2
X14-1 X21-1 X9-5
C/L+ D/L-
X13-1 X26-1
X13-2 K1 G1 G2 K2 X26-2
F10 K AK A A AK K
X14 X11 X16 X13 X12 X15 V13+V16 V23+V26

K2 G2 G1K1 K2 G2 G1 K1 K2 G2 G1 K1 X16-2 K2 G2 G1 K1 X23-2
X16-1 X23-1

A A A
X15-1 X22-1
X15-2 K1 G1 G2 K2 X22-2
K K K
K AK A A AK K
V11+V14 V13+V16 V15+V12
AK AK AK V15+V12 V25+V22
X12-2 K2 G2 G1 K1 X25-2
X12-1 X25-1
T1 T2
R11
R14
R13
R16
R15
R12
R21
R24
R23
R26
R25
R22
A23 A23
X24 X21 X26 X23 X22 X25
C98043-A1682 C98043-A1682
K2 G2 G1 K1 K2 G2 G1 K1 K2 G2 G1 K1
A A A
K K K
V1.1
V1.2
V1.1
V1.2
U1.1
U1.2
U1.1
U1.2
W1.1
W1.2
W1.1
W1.2
1V2.1
1V2.2
1V2.1
1V2.2
1U2.1
1U2.2
1U2.1
1U2.2
1W2.1
1W2.2
1W2.1
1W2.2
V21+V24 V23+V26 V25+V22

AK AK AK
C A601 C98043-A1683 D C A602 C98043-A1683 D
T3 T4
F10
U1/L1 1U2/1T1 V1/L2 1V2/1T2 W1/L3 1W2/1T3
X1: C/L+ X1: D/L-
3-33
Connection
PE X1: U1/L1 V1/L2 W1/L3 C/L+ D/L-
3-34
E1 M
1~ X47-1
Connection
Figure 3.23
Termal sensor K k K k X47-4
on the heatsink T1 T2
R75
R77
R79
X47-3
Load 2
L l L l X47-2
ϑ ϑ R76
R78
R80
R101 R100 F14 F16 F12
X20-1
X20-2
Load 1
F11 F13 F15

XU11
K14
G11 X14-2
X31-1 X11-1 G14
K11 V14 X14-1
X31-2 X11-2 V11 K
K A A
X29-1
X29-2
X29-3
X32-1
Power section, Size H

X32-2 C11 R11 R14 C14
K24
X24-2 G21
K101-2 G24 X21-1
X239 X24-1 V24 K21
K
V21 X21-2
A A K
XU21
C24 R24 R21 C21
A10-X109
(C98043-A1680) XV13
G13 K16
X13-1 X16-2
G16
K13 V16 X16-1
X13-2 V13 K
K A A
X27
C13 R13 R16 C16
K26 G23
X26-2 X23-1
G26 K23
X26-1 V26 V23 X23-2
A K A K
F5
T2A XV23
C26 R26 R23 C23
F1
X9-1 T2A XW15
+ K12
G15 X12-2
24V-power F2 X15-1 G12
K15 V12 X12-1
supply unit T7A X15-2 V15
X9-2 K A K A
-
C15 R15 R12 C12

X9-3 N.C. K22
X22-2 G25
G22 X25-1
X9-4 X22-1 V22 K25
V25 X25-2
K1-2 A K A K
Main contactor X9-5
XW25
C22 R22 R25 C25
F4
T7A F24 F26 F22
X19-2 F21 F23 F25
F3
230V~ T7A X48-2
X19-1
L l L l X48-3
T3 T4 X48-4
A23 K k K k X48-1 A23
C98043-A1685 C98043-A1685
X4: 1U2/1T1 1V2/1T2 1W2/1T3

12.95
12.95 Connection
Arrangement of the thyristor blocks
V11 V13 V15
Level B (rear level)
V24 V26 V22
V14 V16 V12
Level A (front level)
V21 V23 V25
Figure 3.24 Arrangement of the thyristor blocks, Size H (see dimension drawing in Section 2.4)

PE X1: U1/L1 V1/L2 W1/L3 C/L+ D/L-
3-36
E2 M E1 M
1~ 1~ X47-1
Connection
Figure 3.25
Termal sensor K k K k X47-4
on the heatsink T1 T2
R75
R77
R79
X47-3
Load 2
L l L l X47-2
ϑ ϑ R76
R78
R80
R101 R100
X20-1
X20-2
Load 1
F112
F111
F141
F142
F132
F131
F161
F162
F152
F151
F121
F122
XU11
G11 K14
X11-1 X14-2
X31-1 K11 G14
X11-2 V11 V14 X14-1
X31-2 K A K A
X29-1
X29-2
X29-3
X32-1
Power section, Size K

X32-2 C11 R11 R14 C14
K24 G21
X24-2 X21-1
K101-2 G24
X239 X24-1 V24 K21
K
V21 X21-2
A A K
XU21
C24 R24 R21 C21
A10-X109
(C98043-A1680) XV13
G13 K16
X13-1 X16-2
G16
K13 V16 X16-1
X13-2 V13 K
K A A
X27
C13 R13 R16 C16
K26 G23
Connections for X26-2 X23-1
G26 K23
parallel unit X26-1 V26 V23 X23-2
A K A K
F5
T2A XV23
C26 R26 R23 C23
F1
X9-1 T2A XW15
+ K12
G15 X12-2
24V-power F2 X15-1 G12
K15 V12 X12-1
supply unit T7A X15-2 V15
X9-2 K A K A
-
C15 R15 R12 C12

X9-3 N.C. K22
X22-2 G25
G22 X25-1
X9-4 X22-1 V22 K25
A
V25 X25-2
K1-2 A K K
Main contactor X9-5
XW25
C22 R22 R25 C25
F4
T7A
X19-2
F242
F241
F211
F212
F262
F261
F231
F232
F222
F221
F251
F252
230V~ F3
T7A
X19-1
X48-2
L l L l X48-3
A23 T3 T4 X48-4 A23
C98043-A1685 K k K k X48-1 C98043-A1685
X4: 1U2/1T1 1V2/1T2 1W2/1T3

12.95
12.95 Connection
Level A Level B
V11 V14
V13 V16
V15 V12
V24 V21
V26 V23
V22 V25
Figure 3.26 Arrangement of the thyristor blocks, view from right-hand side of unit, Size K (see dimension drawing in Section 2.4)

3-38
X1: U1/ V1/ W1/ PE X4: 1U2/ 1V2/ 1W2/
L1 L2 L3 1T1 1T2 1T3
Figure 3.27
Connection
E1
Termal sensor M
ϑ
on the heatsink
R100 X47-1
K k K k X47-4
X20.1-1
X20.1-2
X20-1
X20-2
T1 T2 X47-3
R76
R78
L l L l X47-2
Load 2
X30-1
X30-2
- +
R75
R77
Load 1
X48-1
X239 k X48-4
K k K
T3 T4 X48-3
L l L l F1
X48-2 T2A
(500-575V / 27A, 41A, 72A and 94A)

+ X9-1
A10-X109
(C98043-A1680) F2
X24-1 T3,2A X9-2
-
X11-1 G1 G2 X24-2
X11-2
K X9-3
Arrangement of thyristor modules N.C.
K AK A A AK
V11+V14 V21+V24 X21-2 X9-4
X1: U1/L1 V1/L2 W1/L3 C/L+ D/L- K1-2
X14-2 G2 G1 X21-1 X9-5
X14-1
X26-1
T1 T2 X13-1 G1 G2 X26-2
X13-2
X24 X21 X26 X23 X22 X25 K
F10
K AK A A AK
G2 G1 G2 G1 G2 G1 V13+V16 V23+V26 X23-2
X16-2 G2 G1 X23-1
A A A X16-1
X22-1
K K K X15-1 G1 G2 X22-2
X15-2
K
AK AK AK
V21+24 V23+26 V25+22 K AK A A AK
V15+V12 V25+V22
X25-2
X12-2 G2 G1 X25-1
X12-1
V11+14 V13+16 V15+12
AK AK AK
V1
U1
K K K
W1
1U2
1V2
1W2
A23
C C98043-A1681 D
A A A
A23 A23
C98043-A1681 C98043-A1681
G1 G2 G1 G2 G1 G2
X11 X14 X13 X16 X15 X12
F10
T3 T4
X4:
1U2/1T1 1V2/1T2 1W2/1T3
X1: C/L+ X1: D/L-
Power section, 6SE7022-7FC85-1AA0, 6SE7024-1FC85-1AA0, 6SE7027-2FC85-1AA0 and 6SE7028-8FC85-1AA0

12.95
12.95
X1: U1/ V1/ W1/ PE X4: 1U2/ 1V2/ 1W2/

L1 L2 L3 1T1 1T2 1T3
Figure 3.28
E1
Termal sensor ϑ M
on the heatsink 1~
R100 X47-1
K k K k X47-4
230V~
T1 T2 X47-3
R76
R78
R80
L l L l X47-2
Load 2
X30-1
X30-2
X29-1
X29-2
X29-3
X19-1
X19-2
R75
R77
R79
F3 F4
Load 1
T2A T2A X48-1

X239 k
K k K X48-4
K101-2 T3 T4 X48-3
L l L l F1
X48-2 T2A
+ X9-1
A10-X109

(C98043-A1680) F2
X24-1 T3,2A X9-2
G2 K2 X24-2 -
X11-1 G1
X11-2
A AK K X9-3
N.C.
K AK A
Arrangement of thyristor modules V11+V14 V21+V24 X9-4
K1-2
X14-2 G2 G1 K1 X21-2
C/L+ D/L- X21-1 X9-5
X14-1
X26-1
X13-1 G1 G2 K2 X26-2
Power section, 6SE7031-5FE85-1AA0 (500-575V / 151A)

F10 X13-2
A AK K
X14 X11 X16 X13 X12 X15
K AK A
G2 G1 G2 G1 G2 G1 V13+V16 V23+V26
A A A G2
X16-2 G1 K1 X23-2
X16-1 X23-1
K K K X22-1
X15-1 G1
G2 K2 X22-2
X15-2
AK AK AK
A AK K
K AK A
V15+V12 V25+V22
V11+14 V13+16 V15+12 X12-2 G2
G1 K1 X25-2
X12-1 X25-1
T1 T2
R21
R24
R23
R26
R25
R22
G2 G1 G2 G1 X23 G2 G1
X24 X21 X26 X22 X25
R11+R14
R13+R16
R15+R12
K2 A K1 K2 A K1 K2 A K1
A23 A23
C98043-A1682 C98043-A1682
U1.1
U1.2
V1.1
V1.2
W1.1
W1.2
K K K A601
1V2.1
1V2.2
1U2.1
1U2.2
1W2.1
1W2.2
C
C98043-A1684
AK AK AK D
V21+ V24 V23+ V26 V25+ V22
F10
T3 T4
U1/L1 1U2/1T1 V1/L2 1V2/1T2 W1/L3 1W2/1T3

X1: C/L+ X1: D/L-
3-39
Connection
3-40
X1: U1/ V1/ W1/ PE X4: 1U2/ 1V2/ 1W2/
L1 L2 L3 1T1 1T2 1T3
Connection
Figure 3.29
E1
Termal sensor ϑ M
on the heatsink 1~
X47-1
R100
K k K k X47-4
230V~ T1 T2 X47-3
R76
R78
R80
L l L l X47-2
Load 2
X30-1
X30-2
X29-1
X29-2
X29-3
X19-1
X19-2
R75
R77
R79
Load 1
F3 F4
T2A X48-1
T2A
X239 K k K k X48-4
T3 T4 X48-3
K101-2 F1
L l L l X48-2 T2A X9-1
A10-X109
F2
(C98043-A1680) X11-1 X24-1 T3,2A X9-2
X11-2 K1 G1 G2 K2 X24-2
K AK A A AK K X9-3
V11+V14 V21+V24 X9-4

K1-2
X14-2 K2 G2 G1 K1 X21-2
X14-1 X21-1 X9-5
X13-1 X26-1
X13-2 K1 G1 G2 K2 X26-2
K AK A A AK K
C/L+ D/L-
V13+V16 V23+V26
X16-2 K2 G2 G1 K1 X23-2
F10 X16-1 X23-1

X14 G2 G1 X11 X16 G2 G1 X13 X12 G2 G1 X15
X15-1 X22-1
K2 A K1 K2 A K1 K2 A K1 X15-2 K1 G1 G2 K2 X22-2
K AK A A AK K
K K K
V15+V12 V25+V22
AK AK AK K2 G2
X12-2 G1 K1 X25-2
X12-1 X25-1
V11+ V14 V13+ V16 V15+ V12
T1 T2
R11
R14
R13
R16
R15
R12
R21
R24
R23
R26
R25
R22
A23 A23
C98043-A1682 C98043-A1682
G2 G1 G2 G1 G2 G1
X24 X21 X26 X23 X22 X25
K2 A K1 K2 A K1 K2 A K1
K K K
V1.1
V1.2
V1.1
V1.2
U1.1
U1.2
U1.1
U1.2
W1.1
W1.1
W1.2
W1.2
1V2.1
1V2.2
1V2.1
1V2.2
1U2.1
1U2.2
1U2.1
1U2.2
1W2.1
1W2.2
1W2.1
1W2.2
AK AK AK
V21+ V24 V23+ V26 V25+ V22
C A601 C98043-A1684 D C A602 C98043-A1684 D

T3 T4
U1/L1 1U2/1T1 V1/L2 1V2/1T2 W1/L3 1W2/1T3 F10
X1: C/L+ X1: D/L-

12.95
12.95
X1: U1/ V1/ W1/ PE X4: 1U2/ 1V2/ 1W2/

L1 L2 L3 1T1 1T2 1T3
Figure 3.30
E1
Termal sensor M
X47-1
R100
K k K k X47-4
230V~ T1 T2 X47-3
R76
R78
R80
L l L l X47-2
Load 2
X30-1
X30-2
X29-1
X29-2
X29-3
X19-1
X19-2
R75
R77
R79
Load 1
F3 F4
T2A T2A X48-1
X239 K k K k X48-4
T3 T4 X48-3
K101-2
L l L l F1
X48-2 T2A X9-1
A10-X109 F2
(C98043-A1680) X11-1 X24-1 T3,2A X9-2
X11-2 K1 G1 G2 K2 X24-2
(500-575V / 270A, 354A and 420A)

K AK A A AK K X9-3

V11+V14 V21+V24 X9-4
K1-2
Arrangement of thyristor modules X14-2 K2 G2 G1 K1 X21-2
X14-1 X21-1 X9-5
C/L+ D/L-
X13-1 X26-1
X13-2 K1 G1 G2 K2 X26-2
F10 K AK A A AK K
X14 X11 X16 X13 X12 X15 V13+V16 V23+V26

X16-2 K2 G2 G1 K1 X23-2
K2 G2 G1K1 K2 G2 G1 K1 K2 G2 G1 K1
X16-1 X23-1
A A A
X15-1 X22-1
X15-2 K1 G1 G2 K2 X22-2
K K K
K AK A A AK K
V11+V14 V13+V16 V15+V12

AK AK AK
V15+V12 V25+V22
X12-2 K2 G2 G1 K1 X25-2
X12-1 X25-1
T1 T2
R11
R14
R13
R16
R15
R12
R21
R24
R23
R26
R25
R22
A23 A23
X24 X21 X26 X23 X22 X25 C98043-A1682 C98043-A1682
K2 G2 G1 K1 K2 G2 G1 K1 K2 G2 G1 K1
A A A
Power section, 6SE7032-7FE85-1AA0, 6SE7033-5FE85-1AA0, and 6SE7034-2FE85-1AA0

K K K
V1.1
V1.2
V1.1
V1.2
U1.1
U1.2
U1.1
U1.2
W1.1
W1.2
W1.1
W1.2
1V2.1
1V2.1
1U2.1
1U2.2
1V2.2
1U2.1
1U2.2
1V2.2
1W2.1
1W2.2
1W2.1
1W2.2
V21+V24 V23+V26 V25+V22

AK AK AK
C A601 C98043-A1684 D C A602 C98043-A1684 D
T3 T4
F10
U1/L1 1U2/1T1 V1/L2 1V2/1T2 W1/L3 1W2/1T3
X1: C/L+ X1: D/L-
3-41
Connection
3-42
X1: U1/ V1/ W1/ PE X4: 1U2/ 1V2/ 1W2/
L1 L2 L3 1T1 1T2 1T3
Connection
Figure 3.31
E1
Termal sensor ϑ M
on the heatsink 1~
R100 X47-1
K k K k X47-4
230V~
T1 T2 X47-3
R76
R78
R80
L l L l X47-2
Load 2
X30-1
X30-2
X29-1
X29-2
X29-3
X19-1
X19-2
R75
R77
R79
F3 F4
Load 1
T2A T2A X48-1

X239 K K k X48-4
k
K101-2 T3 T4 X48-3
L l L l F1
X48-2 T2A X9-1
A10-X109
(C98043-A1680) F2
X11-1 X24-1 T3,2A X9-2
X11-2 K1 G1 G2 K2 X24-2
K AK A A AK K X9-3
C/L+ D/L-
V11+V14 V21+V24 X9-4
K1-2
X14-2 K2 G2 G1 K1 X21-2
X14-1 X21-1 X9-5
F10
X13-1 X26-1
X14 X11 X16 X13 X12 X15 K1 G1
X13-2 G2 K2 X26-2

K2 G2 G1K1 K2 G2 G1 K1 K2 G2 G1 K1
K AK A A AK K
A A A
V13+V16 V23+V26
X16-2 K2 G2 G1 K1 X23-2
K K K
X16-1 X23-1
V11+V14 V13+V16 V15+V12 X15-1 X22-1
AK AK AK X15-2 K1 G1 G2 K2 X22-2
K AK A A AK K
V15+V12 V25+V22
T1 T2
X12-2 K2 G2 G1 K1 X25-2
X12-1 X25-1
X24 X21 X26 X23 X22 X25
R11
R14
R13
R16
R15
R12
K2 G2 G1 K1 K2 G2 G1 K1 K2 G2 G1 K1
A A A
A23 A23
C21 R21 R24 C24
C98043-A1682 C98043-A1682
U1.1
U1.2
V1.1
V1.2
W1.1
W1.2
K K K
C C23 R23 R26 C26
V21+V24 V23+V26 V25+V22 D
AK AK AK
A601 C25 R25 R22 C22
C98043-A1686
F10
T3 T4

12.95
12.95
X1: U1/ V1/ W1/ PE X4: 1U2/ 1V2/ 1W2/

L1 L2 L3 1T1 1T2 1T3
Figure 3.32
E1
Termal sensor ϑ M
on the heatsink 1~
R100 X47-1
K k K k X47-4
230V~
T1 T2 X47-3
R76
R78
R80
L l L l X47-2
Load 2
X30-1
X30-2
X29-1
X29-2
X29-3
X19-1
X19-2
R75
R77
R79
F3 F4
Load 1
T2A T2A X48-1

X239 K k K k X48-4
K101-2 T3 T4 X48-3
L l L l F1
X48-2 T2A X9-1
A10-X109

(C98043-A1680) F2
X11-1 X24-1 T3,2A X9-2
X11-2 K1 G1 G2 K2 X24-2
K AK A A AK K X9-3
C/L+ D/L-
V11+V14 V21+V24 X9-4
K1-2
X14-2 K2 G2 G1 K1 X21-2
X14-1 X21-1 X9-5
F10
X13-1 X26-1
G2 G1 G2 G1 G2 G1 X13-2 K1 G1 G2 K2 X26-2
X14 X11 X16 X13 X12 X15
K2 A K1 K2 A K1 K2 A K1
Power section, 6SE7031-4HE85-1AA0 (660-690V / 140A)

K AK A A AK K
K K K
V13+V16 V23+V26
X16-2 K2 G2 G1 K1 X23-2
AK AK AK
X16-1 X23-1
V11+ V14 V13+ V16 V15+ V12

X15-1 X22-1
X15-2 K1 G1 G2 K2 X22-2
T1 T2 K AK A A AK K
V15+V12 V25+V22
X12-2 K2 G2 G1 K1 X25-2
X12-1 X25-1
X24 X21 X26 X23 X22 X25
K2 G2 G1 K1 K2 G2 G1 K1 K2 G2 G1 K1
A A A
R11+R14
R13+R16
R15+R12
R21+R24
R23+R26
R25+R22
A23 A23
C98043-A1682 C98043-A1682
U1.1
U1.2
V1.1
V1.2
W1.1
W1.2
K K K
1V2.1
1V2.2
A601
1U2.1
1U2.2
1W2.1
1W2.2
V21+V24 V23+V26 V25+V22 C C98043-A1684

AK AK AK D
F10
T3 T4
U1/L1 1U2/1T1 V1/L2 1V2/1T2 W1/L3 1W2/1T3

X1: C/L+ X1: D/L-
3-43
Connection
3-44
X1: U1/ V1/ W1/ PE X4: 1U2/ 1V2/ 1W2/
L1 L2 L3 1T1 1T2 1T3
Figure 3.33
Connection
E1
Termal sensor ϑ M
on the heatsink 1~
X47-1
R100
K k K k X47-4
230V~ T1 T2 X47-3
R76
R78
R80
L l L l X47-2
Load 2
X30-1
X30-2
X29-1
X29-2
X29-3
X19-1
X19-2
R75
R77
R79
Load 1
F3 F4
T2A T2A X48-1
X239 K k K k X48-4
T3 T4 X48-3
K101-2 F1
L l L l X48-2 T2A X9-1
A10-X109
F2
(C98043-A1680) X11-1 X24-1 T3,2A X9-2
X11-2 K1 G1 G2 K2 X24-2
K AK A A AK K X9-3
V11+V14 V21+V24 X9-4

K1-2
X14-2 K2 G2 G1 K1 X21-2
C/L+ D/L- X13-1 X26-1

X13-2 K1 G1 G2 K2 X26-2
K AK A A AK K
F10
V13+V16 V23+V26
G2 G1 G2 G1 G2 G1
X14 X11 X16 X13 X12 X15 X16-2 K2 G2 G1 K1 X23-2
K2 A K1 K2 A K1 K2 A K1
X16-1 X23-1

K K K
X15-1 X22-1
X15-2 K1 G1 G2 K2 X22-2
V11+ V14 V13+ V16 V15+ V12

V15+V12 V25+V22
X12-2 K2 G2 G1 K1 X25-2
X12-1 X25-1
T1 T2
R11
R14
R13
R16
R15
R12
R23
R25
R22
R21
R24
R26
A23 A23
X24 X21 X26 X23 X22 X25
C98043-A1682 C98043-A1682
K2 G2 G1 K1 K2 G2 G1 K1 K2 G2 G1 K1
A A A
K K K
V1.1
V1.1
U1.1
U1.2
V1.2
U1.1
U1.2
V1.2
W1.1
W1.2
W1.1
W1.2
1U2.1
1U2.2
1V2.1
1V2.2
1U2.1
1U2.2
1V2.1
1V2.2
1W2.1
1W2.2
1W2.1
1W2.2
V21+V24 V23+V26 V25+V22

AK AK AK
C A601 C98043-A1684 D C A602 C98043-A1684 D
T3 T4
F10
U1/L1 1U2/1T1 V1/L2 1V2/1T2 W1/L3 1W2/1T3
X1: C/L+ X1: D/L-

12.95
12.95
X1: U1/ V1/ W1/ PE X4: 1U2/ 1V2/ 1W2/

L1 L2 L3 1T1 1T2 1T3
Figure 3.34
E1
Termal sensor M
X47-1
R100
K k K k X47-4
230V~ T1 T2 X47-3
R76
R78
R80
L l L l X47-2
Load 2
X30-1
X30-2
X29-1
X29-2
X29-3
X19-1
X19-2
R75
R77
R79
Load 1
F3 F4
T2A T2A X48-1
X239 K k K k X48-4
T3 T4 X48-3
K101-2
L l L l F1
X48-2 T2A X9-1
A10-X109
F2
(C98043-A1680) X11-1 X24-1 T3,2A X9-2
X11-2 K1 G1 G2 K2 X24-2
K AK A A AK K X9-3

V11+V14 V21+V24 X9-4
X14-2 K2 G2 G1 K1 X21-2
X14-1 X21-1 X9-5
C/L+ D/L-
X13-1 X26-1
X13-2 K1 G1 G2 K2 X26-2
F10 K AK A A AK K
X14 X11 X16 X13 X12 X15 V13+V16 V23+V26

K2 G2 G1K1 K2 G2 G1 K1 K2 G2 G1 K1 X16-2 K2 G2 G1 K1 X23-2
A A A
X16-1 X23-1
X15-1 X22-1
X15-2 K1 G1 G2 K2 X22-2
K K K
K AK A A AK K
V11+V14 V13+V16 V15+V12
AK AK AK V15+V12 V25+V22
X12-2 K2 G2 G1 K1 X25-2
X12-1 X25-1
T1 T2
R11
R14
R13
R16
R15
R12
R21
R24
R23
R26
R25
R22
A23 A23
X24 X21 X26 X23 X22 X25
C98043-A1682 C98043-A1682
K2 G2 G1 K1 K2 G2 G1 K1 K2 G2 G1 K1
A A A
K K K
V1.1
V1.2
V1.1
V1.2
U1.1
U1.2
U1.1
U1.2
W1.1
W1.2
W1.1
W1.2
1V2.1
1V2.2
1V2.1
1V2.2
1U2.1
1U2.2
1U2.1
1U2.2
1W2.1
1W2.2
1W2.1
1W2.2
Power section, 6SE7032-7HE85-1AA0 and 6SE7034-2HE85-1AA0 (660-690V / 270A and 420A)

V21+V24 V23+V26 V25+V22
AK AK AK
C A601 C98043-A1684 D C A602 C98043-A1684 D
T3 T4
F10
U1/L1 1U2/1T1 V1/L2 1V2/1T2 W1/L3 1W2/1T3
X1: C/L+ X1: D/L-
3-45
Connection
3-46
X1: U1/ V1/ W1/ PE X4: 1U2/ 1V2/ 1W2/
L1 L2 L3 1T1 1T2 1T3
Figure 3.35
Connection
E1
Termal sensor ϑ M
on the heatsink 1~
R100 X47-1
K k K k X47-4
230V~
T1 T2 X47-3
R76
R78
R80
L l L l X47-2
Load 2
X30-1
X30-2
X29-1
X29-2
X29-3
X19-1
X19-2
R75
R77
R79
F3 F4
Load 1
T2A T2A X48-1

X239 K k K k X48-4
K101-2 T3 T4 X48-3
L l L l F1
X48-2 T2A X9-1
A10-X109
(C98043-A1680) F2
X11-1 X24-1 T3,2A X9-2
X11-2 K1 G1 G2 K2 X24-2
K AK A A AK K X9-3
C/L+ D/L-
V11+V14 V21+V24 X9-4
K1-2
X14-2 K2 G2 G1 K1 X21-2
X14-1 X21-1 X9-5
F10
X13-1 X26-1
X14 X11 X16 X13 X12 X15 K1 G1
X13-2 G2 K2 X26-2
K2 G2 G1K1 K2 G2 G1 K1 K2 G2 G1 K1
K AK A A AK K

A A A
V13+V16 V23+V26
X16-2 K2 G2 G1 K1 X23-2
K K K
X16-1 X23-1
V11+V14 V13+V16 V15+V12 X15-1 X22-1
AK AK AK X15-2 K1 G1 G2 K2 X22-2
K AK A A AK K
V15+V12 V25+V22
T1 T2
X12-2 K2 G2 G1 K1 X25-2
X12-1 X25-1
X24 X21 X26 X23 X22 X25
K2 G2 G1 K1 K2 G2 G1 K1 K2 G2 G1 K1
A A A
R11
R14
R13
R16
R15
R12
A23 A23
C21 R21 R24 C24
C98043-A1682 C98043-A1682
K K K
C23 R23 R26 C26
V21+V24 V23+V26 V25+V22
V1.1
V1.2
U1.1
U1.2
W1.1
W1.2
1V2.1
1V2.2
1U2.1
1U2.2
1W2.1
1W2.2
AK AK AK
C25 R25 R22 C22
C
D
T3 T4
A601 C98043-A1684
F10
U1/L1 1U2/1T1 V1/L2 1V2/1T2 W1/L3 1W2/1T3
X1: C/L+ X1: D/L-

12.95
12.95 Connection
3.7 Parallel connection of parallel unit(s), size K

The output current can be increased by connecting up to 2 "parallel" units of identical rated current in parallel
with the power section of a rectifier/regenerating unit of size K (basic unit).
The following table shows for each basic unit order number, the order number for the corresponding parallel unit
that can be connected in parallel.
Order No. for basic unit Order No. for parallel unit for
connecting in parallel
6SE7041-3EK85-1AA0 6SE7041-3EK85-1AD0
6SE7041-8EK85-1AA0 6SE7041-8EK85-1AD0
6SE7041-3FK85-1AA0 6SE7041-3FK85-1AD0
6SE7041-5FK85-1AA0 6SE7041-5FK85-1AD0
6SE7041-8FK85-1AA0 6SE7041-8FK85-1AD0
6SE7041-3HK85-1AA0 6SE7041-3HK85-1AD0
6SE7041-5HK85-1AA0 6SE7041-5HK85-1AD0
6SE7041-8HK85-1AA0 6SE7041-8HK85-1AD0
Table 3.11 Corresponding basic and parallel units
The parallel units have the same technical data as the corresponding basic units.
The parallel units do not include a CUR electronic module and are fitted with a C98043-A1695 (A23) Power
Interface module instead of a C98043-A1685 (A23) Power Interface module.
The parallel units do not require an external 24 V supply.
A 50-core ribbon cable is used to transfer firing pulse signals and monitoring signals. It also carries the power
supply for the parallel units.
Parallel connection to a basic unit:

The female terminal strip X27 on module A23 of the basic unit is connected to the male terminal strip X28 on
module A23 of the parallel unit via a 50-core ribbon cable.
Parallel connection of a second parallel unit:

The female terminal strip X27 on module A23 of the first parallel unit is connected to the male terminal strip X28
on module A23 of the second parallel unit via a 50-core ribbon cable.
The parallel unit(s) should be installed to the left of the basic unit (see Figure 3.36).
Parallel unit Parallel unit Basic unit
A23
A23 A23 C98043-A1685
C98043-A1695 C98043-A1695
X27 X27
X28 X28 X27
Figure 3.36 Connection of firing pulse signals and monitoring signals for the parallel units

Connection 12.95
NOTE
The permissible output current for a parallel arrangement is reduced (due to the current division between the
power sections) by 10% as compared with the sum of the rated currents of the separate power sections.
The following is required to ensure even current distribution between the basic unit and parallel unit(s).
Identical phases for the power section connections of the rectifier/regenerating units between the basic
units and parallel unit(s)
Use of identical power components (see above table for the corresponding parallel units and basic units)
Commutating reactors and autotransformers specific for each basic and parallel unit with identical technical
data. Each separate parallel path must have a minimum uk value of 2%.
In the case of extremely high uk values for the mains supply (low-power system), the primary side of the
autotransformer should be connected directly to the supply (before the commutating reactors), so that the
total uk value will not be too high in the regenerative direction.
With an extremely high total uk value in the regenerative direction, it may be necessary due to the increased
thyristor current commutating time, to reduce the inverter step limit (parameter P776). This may mean it is
necessary to reduce Ud.
.
Basic unit Basic unit
X27 X27
X28 X28
Parallel unit (1) Parallel unit (1)

DC link DC link
Mains Regeneration Mains Regeneration
X27 X27
X28 X28
Parallel unit 2 Parallel unit 2

Arrangement for high-power system Arrangement for low-power system
Identical fuses for basic unit and parallel unit(s)

Identical cable lengths leading to the power section connections of the basic and parallel units
Output reactors in the DC circuit are not permitted.
WARNING
Fault-free operation can only be guaranteed if the phases at the power section
terminals (U1/L1, V1/L2, W1/L3, 1U2/1T1, 1V2/1T2, 1W2/1T3, C/L+ and D/L-)
between the basic unit and parallel unit(s) are identical.
Non-compliance with this condition may result in destruction of the power
sections of the basic and parallel units.
The maximum permissible total cable length between the basic unit and parallel unit 1 or parallel unit 2 (if
present) is 15 m.
A 50-core ribbon cable, 2.6 m in length, is included in the scope of delivery of a parallel unit (spare parts order
No.: 6SY7010-8AA00).

12.95 Connection
Order No. for one cable "10 m round, screened": 6QX5368 (other lengths on request):
On connecting this round, 50-core cable with a diameter of 14 mm, its screen has to be laid bare by cutting away
the insulation and it must be connected to earth on both devices. To ensure the interference immunity of the
system, it is recommended that the cable is laid in an earthed metal pipe of at least 50 mm in diameter (to allow
the plug to be fed through).
The cable length within the unit from the connector on the A23 module (X27 or X28) to the top edge of the unit
on the rear panel (cabinet wall) is 1m to the left and 1.8 m to the right. This includes the spare length required for
removing the A23 module with its carrier board for service purposes.
WARNING
When the A23 module of a parallel unit is removed for servicing, the terminals of
the current transformers are open. The parallel unit must not be operated,
otherwise the current transformers of the parallel unit can be damaged by
currents from the snubber RC network.
Non-compliance may result in the destruction of the current transformer of a
parallel unit.
Parameterization:
Parameter P076 (configuration of the power section)
P076 = 1x...... 1 parallel unit is connected in parallel with the basic unit
P076 = 2x...... 2 parallel units are connected in parallel with the basic unit
NOTE
With the parameterization P076=0x, a connected parallel unit still receives firing pulses and carries current, it is
only the monitoring for current asymmetry (over-current or under-current in the parallel power section as
compared to the current in the basic unit, -F034) that is not active.
The results of the thyristor test (selected via P353) are only conditionally applicable when units are connected
in parallel.
Start-up:
The start-up procedure is exactly the same as in the case of a single basic unit. The final cabling (parallel
connection of the power sections and coupling via the 50-core ribbon cable) must however already exist
because the parallel units also carry current during circuit identification.
Note: In the case of 1 or 2 parallel units connected in parallel, the value of parameter P144 (DC link
capacitance) only represents a half or 1/3 of the actual DC link capacitance because parameter
P075 for the basic unit contains the rated current for a single power section.
LED display on the A23 power interface module (C98043-A1695) of a parallel unit:
Green LED (H11) lit: The power supply on this parallel unit is operating.
Yellow LED (H12) lit: On this parallel unit, the highest temperature of any power section connected in
parallel has been measured (this does not necessarily mean over-temperature). If the
yellow H12 LED is not lit on any of the parallel units, the highest temperature is
currently measured at the power section of the basic unit.
Red LED (H13) lit: A fuse has fused on this parallel unit.

3AC 50-60Hz, 400V
3AC 50-60Hz, 500V
3AC 50-60Hz, 690V
3-50
1AC 50-60Hz, 230V
Connection
Figure 3.37
Parallel unit Basic unit
24V power K1
Filter supply unit Filter
(optional) Connection for (optional)
parallel unit
X9-1 X9-2 X9-3 X9-4 X9-5
X9-1 X9-2 X9-3 X9-4 X9-5
K1-2
PE X1: U1 V1 W1 X4: 1U2 1V2 1W2 PE X1: U1 V1 W1 X4: 1U2 1V2 1W2
L1 L2 L3 1T1 1T2 1T3 L1 L2 L3 1T1 1T2 1T3
Load Load
X27 X28 X27
12 12
12 12
A23
C98043-A1685
ϑ ϑ ϑ ϑ
A23
C98043-A1695
Thermistor Thermistor
Power section, parallel unit

Power section, basic unit
Fan unit Fan unit
Single-line diagram with suggested circuit for parallel connection without autotransformer, size K
X239
X19-2 X19-1 X19-1 X19-2
X1: C/L+ X1: D/L- X1: C/L+ X1: D/L-
3.7.1 Single-line diagrams with suggested circuit arrangements for parallel connection
X19-2 X19-1 X19-1 X19-2

to electronics module
1AC 230V A10-X109 1AC 230V
DC 510V - 620V
DC 675V - 780V
DC 890V - 930V

12.95
3AC 50-60Hz, 400V
3AC 50-60Hz, 500V
3AC 50-60Hz, 690V
12.95
1AC 50-60Hz, 230V
Figure 3.38
Parallel unit Basic unit
A10-X101 24V power K1 A10-X101
Filter supply unit Filter
(optional) Connection for (optional)
parallel unit
X9-1 X9-2 X9-3 X9-4 X9-5
ϑ ϑ
1U1 2U1 1U1 2U1
1U1 1U1
1V1 2V1 X9-1 X9-2 X9-3 X9-4 X9-5 1V1 2V1
1V1 1V1
1W1 1W1
1W1 2W1 1W1 2W1
K1-2
PE X1: U1 V1 W1 X4: 1U2 1V2 1W2 PE X1: U1 V1 W1 X4: 1U2 1V2 1W2
L1 L2 L3 1T1 1T2 1T3 L1 L2 L3 1T1 1T2 1T3

Load Load
X27 X28 X27
12 12
12 12
A23
C98043-A1685
ϑ ϑ ϑ ϑ
A23
C98043-A1695
Thermistor Thermistor
Power section, parallel unit

Power section, basic unit
Single-line diagram with suggested circuit for parallel connection with autotransformer, size K
Fan unit Fan unit
X239
X19-2 X19-1 X19-1 X19-2
X1: C/L+ X1: D/L- X1: C/L+ X1: D/L-
X19-2 X19-1 X19-1 X19-2

to electronics module
1AC 230V A10-X109 1AC 230V
DC 510V - 620V
DC 675V - 780V
DC 890V - 930V
3-51
Connection
Connection 12.95
3.8 12-pulse mode (only possible with the optional RS485 interface)
3.8.1 General information on 12-pulse mode, application
12-pulse mode is implemented to reduce the harmonic loading on the mains supply.
Two 6SE70 units (rectifier/regenerating units) are connected in parallel on the output side and supplied on the
line side with two 3-phase AC supplies, galvanically isolated and with a phase offset of 30 degrees. One unit, the
"12-pulse master", controls the DC link voltage and provides the setpoint current for the other unit, the "12-pulse
slave".
Note: A unit described here as a "slave" is a completely normal rectifier/regenerating unit with a CUR electronic
module and is only transformed into a "12-pulse slave" by the appropriate parameterization. The term "12-pulse
slave" must not be confused with a "parallel unit" for the connection of power sections in parallel because the
latter does not contain a CUR electronic module and has a different order No. (see Section 3.7).
The two 3-phase galvanically isolated AC supplies with a phase offset of 30 degrees are usually generated using
a transformer with 2 different secondary systems (e.g. Y y6 d5, i.e. primary winding: star, secondary winding 1:
star, secondary winding 2: delta). A transformer of this type will be referred to below as a "12-pulse transformer".
To implement 12-pulse mode, the two rectifier/regenerating units must be coupled via a fast serial link. The
SST2 serial interface for the basic unit is used for this purpose which is however only available as an RS485
interface once the optional A2 submodule (C98043-A1690) has been plugged into the A10 CUR electronic
module (C98043-A1680). See Sections 9.6 and 3.8.7).
The transmission protocol used for SST2 is the "Peer-to-Peer" protocol.
3.8.2 Hardware requirements, configuration of the power sections
The sub-currents of the 3-phase AC supplies are decoupled on the line side (line side with respect to the unit
terminals) through inductances (due to the secondary leakage inductance of the 12-pulse transformer,
commutating reactors and in the regenerative direction also due to the leakage inductance of the
autotransformers, if present).
Note: A 12-pulse transformer alone is not always sufficient for decoupling because the two secondary windings
of the transformer are magnetically coupled. When the "12-pulse master" and the "12-pulse slave" are directly
supplied from a "high-power" 12-pulse transformer (i.e. without the intermediate connection of commutating
reactors), the DC link currents (in non-pulsating operation) each comprise 30 degree current blocks because at
intervals of 30 degrees, a commutating process takes place from secondary winding 1 to secondary winding 2 or
vice-versa. Additional commutating reactors can only be dispensed with when a 12-pulse transformer is used
that has a sufficiently large secondary leakage inductance (or sufficiently large uk value between secondary
winding 1 and secondary winding 2).
The following points must be complied with:

Supply of the power sections of the 12-pulse master and the 12-pulse slave from galvanically isolated 3-
phase AC systems
Decoupled supplies - i.e. commutating reactors after the 12-pulse transformer, or 12-pulse transformer with
sufficiently large secondary leakage inductances (or sufficiently large uk value between secondary winding 1
and secondary winding 2).
Identical inductances in the 12-pulse master and 12-pulse slave power section branches.
Identical voltage levels at the 12-pulse master and 12-pulse slave, otherwise with a control angle of 0
degrees, this will cause unequal current division (with a control angle of 0 degrees, closed-loop control is not
possible - the unit with the higher voltage level carries more current).
With Ud reduction, current asymmetry (as a result of a control angle of 0 degrees and differing voltage levels)
can be prevented or considerably reduced.
An output reactor must not be used in the DC link.

12.95 Connection
Recommended power section configurations:

Note: It is of no consequence whether the "12-pulse master" or "12-pulse slave" is supplied by the delta winding
of the 12-pulse transformer. It is only important that a phase offset of 30 degrees is present between the two
galvanically isolated supplies. In contrast to the following configuration examples, the "12-pulse master" and "12-
pulse slave" can also be exchanged with respect to their connection to the "12-pulse transformer".
a) Power section supply with autotransformers
With a small uk value for the 12-pulse transformer and/or the autotransformer ("high-power supply"), the
decoupling (commutating) reactors should be installed between the 12-pulse transformer outputs and the
autotransformer inputs. With a large u k value for the 12-pulse transformer ("low-power supply") they should be
installed directly in the path of the rectifier bridge to ensure that the total u k value in the regenerating direction
is not too large (see note in Section 3.1).
Arrangement for high-power system

12-pulse master
Rectification
"12-pulse transformer" Reactor
Regeneration
X117 DC link
Autotransformer
X117
Mains
12-pulse slave
Rectification
Reactor
Regeneration
Autotransformer
Arrangement for low-power system

Reactor
12-pulse master
Rectification
"12-pulse transformer" Regeneration
X117 DC link
Autotransformer
X117
Mains
Reactor
12-pulse slave
Rectification
Regeneration
Autotransformer
Figure 3.39 Power section supply with autotransformers
b) Power section supply without autotransformers, reduced DC link voltage

If an autotransformer for raising the regenerating voltage is not used, "Ud reduction" must be selected. By
selecting a transformation ratio of, for example, ü = 1.25 at the 12-pulse transformer and by using
rectifier/regenerating units of a higher voltage class (500 V unit instead of 400 V unit, 690 V unit instead of
500 V unit. Note: this is not possible for the 690 V unit) it is possible to obtain high DC link voltage with
respect to the primary supply voltage of the 12-pulse transformer despite Ud reduction.
Disadvantage: Worse mains power factor due to the phases.
12-pulse master
Rectification
Regeneration
Mains
X117 DC link
X117
Reactor
12-pulse slave
Rectification
Regeneration
Figure 3.40 Power section supply with autotransformers, reduced DC link voltage

Connection 12.95
c) Example of a configuration for 12-pulse mode and parallel connection of units of size K to obtain the
maximum output current
In the following example of a power section arrangement with autotransformers and a reactor arrangement
for a "high-power supply", 2 groups of size K units operate in 12-pulse mode to obtain the maximum possible
output current. The first group of units comprises a basic unit parameterized as a "12-pulse master" to which
2 parallel units (not containing a CUR electronic module, see Section 3.7) are connected in parallel. The
second group of units comprises a basic unit parameterized as a "12-pulse slave" to which 2 parallel units are
also connected in parallel.
Arrangement for high-power system

12-pulse master
Rectification
Reactor
Regeneration
Autotransformer X117 X27
X28
Reactor
Parallel unit
Rectification
Reactor
Regeneration
Autotransformer X27
X28
Parallel unit
Rectification
Regeneration
Autotransformer DC link
Mains
12-pulse slave
Rectification
Reactor
Regeneration
Autotransformer X117 X27
X28
Parallel unit
Rectification
Reactor
Regeneration
Autotransformer X27
X28
Parallel unit
Rectification
Reactor
Regeneration
Autotransformer
Figure 3.41 Example of a configuration for 12-pulse mode and parallel connection of units of size K to obtain the maximum output
current
3.8.3 Parameterization for 12-pulse mode
In this application, two 6SE70 units (rectifier/regenerating units) are coupled via the SST2 serial interface
(optional RS485 interface PTP1) using "Peer-to-Peer" protocol. One unit is parameterized as a 12-pulse master
and one is parameterized as a 12-pulse slave.
Selection of the basic or reserve setting (index i001 or i002) of the appropriate "Source selection parameter“
(P554, P555, ...) is described in Section 4.1.2.

12.95 Connection
"12-pulse master"-6SE70 unit "12 pulse slave"-6SE70 unit
Function: Controls the DC link voltage and provides Function: In current control mode, receives the
the setpoint current for the 12-pulse slave unit via the setpoint current and control commands via the SST2
SST2 interface and control commands (and receives interface from the 12-pulse master (and sends
control commands). control commands).
P051= 3 (Access level: Expert mode) P051= 3 (Access level: Expert mode)
SST2 interface definition: SST2 interface definition:
P688= 1 (protocol selection "Peer-to-Peer") P688= 1 (protocol selection "Peer-to-Peer")
P684.i003= 13 (baudrate 187500 Bd) P684.i003= 13 (baudrate 187500 Bd)
(factory setting) (factory setting)
P686.i003= 2 (2 process data words) P686.i003= 2 (2 process data words)
P687.i003= 1 ms (telegram failure time) P687.i003= 1 ms (telegram failure time)
(factory setting) (see Section 3.8.6) (factory setting) (see Section 3.8.6)
SST2 send channel: SST2 send channel:
P681.i001= 599 (1st process data item is P681.i001= 599 (1st process data item is
control/status word for 12-pulse mode) control/status word for 12-pulse mode)
P681.i002= 34 (2nd process data item is the setpoint
current)
(factory setting)
Use of SST2 receive data: Use of SST2 receive data:
P573.i001 (or i002) = 6001 (1st receive data is P554.i001 (or i002) = 6001 (ON/OFF1)
source for "No external fault 3")
P555.i001 (or i002) = 6001 (not OFF2)
(but should only be parameterized when the 12-
(with the "fault" state for the 12-pulse master or when
pulse master is required to go into the "fault" state in
"no 12-pulse mode" is selected on the 12-pulse
the event of a 12-pulse slave fault - see Section
master (see P583.i001 or i002), OFF2 is signaled)
3.8.6)
P561.i001 (or i002) = 6001 (Run enable)
(the 12-pulse slave only receives the run enable
when the 12-pulse master is in the "run" state)
P566.i001 (or i002) = 6001 (RESET)
(Source 2 for reset... this facilitates an external reset
from the master)
P572.i001 (or i002) = 6001 (REGEN. ENABLE)
(to facilitate, e.g. Ud reduction)
P486.i001 (or i002) = 6002 (2nd receive data item is
the setpoint current)
Definition of the unit as a 12-pulse unit: Definition of the unit as a 12-pulse unit:
P583.i001 (or i002) = 1 (12-pulse mode is selected) P583.i001 (or i002) = 1 (12-pulse mode is selected)
Definition of the unit as a master or slave: Definition of the unit as a master or slave:
P587.i001 (or i002) = 0 (master) P587.i001 (or i002) = 1 (slave)
(factory setting)
Special functions: Special functions:
P354 = 0 (Earth short-circuit test deactivated when P354 = 0 (Earth short-circuit test deactivated when
the unit is supplied by a non-earthed supply - e.g. the unit is supplied by a non-earthed supply - e.g.
from the delta winding of the 12-pulse transformer) from the delta winding of the 12-pulse transformer)
Table 12 Parameterization for 12-pulse mode

Connection 12.95
3.8.4 Control/status word for 12-pulse mode (r599) and control word 2, bit 23
The following table shows how the bits of the control/status word for 12-pulse mode (r599) are formed from the
bits of control words 1 and 2 (r550, r551), the bits of status word 1 (r552), the bits of the first SST2 receive data
(r599 sent from the Peer-to-Peer partner) and the internal unit status with Boolean arithmetic or how these bits
are connected together (negation is represented with a slash) :
Control/status word for 12-pulse mode (r599)

Bit Logical linking (or meaning in the high state):
r599.0 r550.0 (ON or not OFF1) AND /r552.3 (no fault) AND r551.23 (12-pulse mode is selected)
r599.1 r550.1 (run condition or not OFF2) AND /r552.3 (no fault) AND r551.23 (12-pulse mode is selected)
r599.2 r550.2
r599.3 r552.2 (Message for RUN state)
r599.4 r550.4
r599.5 r550.5
r599.6 Message: DC link forming or current identification is being carried out
r599.7 r550.7 (fault reset)
r599.8 r550.8 (typing 1 ON) AND /r552.3 (no fault) AND r551.23 (12-pulse mode is selected)
r599.9 r550.9 (typing 2 ON) AND /r552.3 (no fault) AND r551.23 (12-pulse mode is selected)
r599.10 r550.10 (PLC control)
r599.11 r550.11 (Ud-reduction requested)
r599.12 r552.10 (Message: "Regenerating ready") or
High when with 12-pulse mode selected (r551.23= 1), the unit is held in state r000 = "--" (because
"circuit identification" or "forming" is taking place on the partner unit, or because the unit is waiting
for the "run" state of the 12-pulse slave unit (while the slave unit is carrying out the earth short-
circuit test and the maximum waiting time of 5 s in state r000 = "--" has not yet elapsed))
r599.13 /r552.3 (Message: NO fault)
r599.14 r552.14 (Message: "Motoring" (Rectifier bridge is carrying current or is ready to carry current or
neither rectifier nor regenerating bridge are carrying current))
r599.15 r550.15 (No external fault 1)
Table 13 Control/status word for 12-pulse mode (r599)

12.95 Connection
Control word 2 (r551), bit 23: 12-pulse mode selection command
Associated source selection parameter: P583

Low state: "no 12-pulse mode", i.e. there is only one "normal unit"
High state: "12-pulse mode is selected"
The command is effective in the high state and effects the following changes with respect to the operational
behavior of a single unit (i.e. a "normal single unit" becomes a 12-pulse master or 12-pulse slave depending on
control word 2, bit 27, or the associated source selection parameter P587.i001 or i002):
The P-gain of the Ud controller is halved internally according to P313 and the DC link capacitance P144 of
the 12-pulse master is halved internally but only when the 12-pulse slave reports the "run" operating state to
the 12-pulse master via r599 (bit 3 of the first SST2 receive data).
During "forming" or "circuit identification", only one unit is permitted to carry current. This prevents firing of the
thyristors of the rectifier/regenerating bridge in the "run" operating state on the 12-pulse master or 12-pulse
slave by forcing the state r000 = "--", when the corresponding partner unit reports via r599 (bit 6 of the first
SST2 receive telegram) that "forming" or "circuit identification" is being carried out. Apart from which, on the
unit that is held in the state r000= "--", error message F061 (fault value 3, 4, 5) is suppressed.
On completion of "forming" or "circuit identification" of the partner unit (i.e. with the trailing edge of bit 6 of the
first SST2 receive data), the unit switches to the operating state SWITCH-ON INHIBITED (r000=°008).
On switch-on, on the 12-pulse master following the °012 operating state (test phase - earth short-circuit test),
firing of the thyristors of the rectifier/regenerating bridge by forcing the state r000 = "--" is prevented until the
12-pulse slave reports the "run" operating state via r599 (bit 3 of the first SST2 receive data) or until a
maximum waiting time of 5 s has elapsed. During this waiting time, the 12-pulse slave is given the opportunity
of carrying out the earth short-circuit test. In addition, ramping up of the pre-charging ramp (parameter P329)
is prevented.
Bits 0, 1, 8 and 9 of r599 (control/status word for 12-pulse mode) are linked with control word bit 23 such that
an ON command is only passed on via r599 when control word bit 23 is 1 ("12-pulse mode is selected").
Note: The prerequisite for 12-pulse mode is that the 12-pulse master and 12-pulse slave are coupled via the
SST2 serial interface using Peer-to-Peer protocol (P688=1) and that in each case, the "control/status word for
12-pulse mode" (r599) is transmitted in word 1 of the transmission protocol (P681.i001= 599).
3.8.5 Start-up with 12-pulse mode
Linking the units via SST2 RS485 interface

Mount the optional A2 submodule (C98043-A1690) on the A10 CUR electronic module (C98043-A1680) of
master and slave (see Section 9.6) and connecting an interface cable (RS485 4-core cable, see Section
3.8.7) on the 5-pole terminal block -X117 of A2.
Parameterizing a unit as a 12-pulse master (see Section 3.8.3)

Following "Generate factory setting" (see Section 4.3.9.1), only the following parameters have to be set:
P051= 3 (expert mode)
P688 = 1 (select Peer-to-Peer protocol)
P583.i001 (or i002) = 1 (12-pulse mode is selected)
P573.i001 (or i002) = 6001 (only set when the 12-pulse master is also required to go into the "fault" state
in the event of a 12-pulse slave fault - see Section 3.8.6)
Switch off earth short-circuit test (P354 = 0), when the unit is supplied by a non-earthed supply - e.g. from
the delta winding of the 12-pulse transformer
Note: The basic setting (index i001) of the unit is used in practice for the parameterization as 12-pulse master
(with the appropriate source wiring for the ON command (P554, P555) and other external control commands),
and the reserve setting (index i002) is used to operate the unit as a stand-alone unit with user control on-site
via the OP1 or PMU.

Connection 12.95
Parameterizing a unit as a 12-pulse slave (see Section 3.8.3)

Using P077 = 5 or 6, almost all settings required for the parameterization as a 12-pulse slave can be carried
out automatically (see Chapter 4.3.9.1).
Meaning of P077 = 5 or 6:
P077= 5: Basic setting (index i001): 12-pulse slave (all control is carried out via the master)
Reserve setting (index i002): stand-alone unit with operator control via PMU
P077= 6: Basic setting (index i001): 12-pulse slave (all control is carried out via the master)
Reserve setting (index i002): stand-alone unit with operator control via OP1
Note: When the reserve setting is selected, the unit operates as a stand-alone unit with on-site operator
control. Changeover between the basic and reserve settings takes place via binary input 5 (P590=1005), but
the reserve setting can be set permanently via P590= 1.
Procedure for carrying out the P077-dependent factory setting (see Section 4.3.9.1):
Set P051= 3 (expert mode)
Set P052= 2 (Select "Initialize" function (set MLFB), so that P077 can be modified)
Set P077= 5 or 6 (Select the required P077-dependent parameter setting)
Set P052= 0 and press the key (terminate the "initialize" function)
Set P052= 1 (select the function "Generate manufacturer setting"; when the key is pressed, all
parameters are reset to their factory setting or to the P077-dependent value)
If only those parameter values that are dependent on P077 are required to be changed and all other
parameters should remain unchanged, the following procedure is necessary:
Set P051= 3 (expert mode)
Set P052= 2 (select "Initialize" function (set MLFB))
Note P070 and set P070= 0
Set P077= 5 or 6 (select the required P077-dependent parameter setting)
Set P052= 0 and press the key (read in the parameter values dependent on P077)
Move the F060 error message into the "background" by pressing +<H>
Set P052= 2 (select "Initialize" function (set MLFB) again)
P070= noted value (restore MLFB)
P052= 0 and press the key (MLFB is read in and the dependent parameters P071, P075 and P076
are set)
Move the F060 error message into the "foreground" again by pressing +<T>, and reset by pressing
the key
Additional parameter settings for the 12-pulse slave:

P051= 3 (expert mode)
P688 = 1 (Peer-to-Peer protocol)
Switch off earth short-circuit test (P354 = 0), when the unit is supplied from an unearthed supply, e.g. from
the delta winding of the 12-pulse transformer
For factory settings in accordance with P077= 5 or 6, binary input 1 is a source for "No external fault 1"
and binary input 2 is a source for "No external warning 1". If this is not required, e.g. in the case of open
terminals, P575 = 1 and P588 = 1 must be set.

12.95 Connection
Circuit identification:
Circuit identification should be carried out successively on the 12-pulse master and on the 12-pulse slave.
P052= 21 must be set on each unit for this purpose, and the switch-on command for the 12-pulse slave
comes from the 12-pulse master (the control word wiring ensures that the partner unit, in each case, does not
carry current or is held in the operating state r000= "--".
Circuit identification procedure for 12-pulse master:
Set P052= 21 on the 12-pulse master unit, switch on circuit identification is carried out on the 12-pulse
master
Circuit identification procedure for 12-pulse slave:
Set P052= 21 on the 12-pulse slave unit, switch on the 12-pulse master unit circuit identification is
carried out on the 12-pulse slave
Note: If circuit identification is carried out with the basic settings selected (operation as a 12-pulse slave,
all control is from the 12-pulse master), the switch-on command must come from the 12-pulse master and
the power terminals of the 12-pulse master unit must be connected to the supply voltage.
Note: When the reserve setting is selected on the 12-pulse slave unit (with appropriate parameterization of
index i002 of the "Source selection parameters" P554, P555, ...) it is also possible to issue the switch-on
command for circuit identification on the slave unit on-site via the PMU or OP1.
Setting additional functions:

If required, activate the "auto restart" (via P366= 2) on the master and on the slave unit. This will be effective
in the event of failure of the electronics supply voltage provided that the Peer-to-Peer telegram failure
monitoring time has been switched off via P687.i003= 0.
3.8.6 Redundancy mode
If both rectifier/regenerating units are rated such that each separate unit is capable of carrying the full load
current, the following possibilities are available with respect to redundant operation:
Uninterrupted changeover of the 12-pulse master unit to stand-alone 6-pulse mode in the event of
failure of the 12-pulse slave unit during 12-pulse mode:
If the 12-pulse master is required to continue to run in "normal" stand-alone 6-pulse mode in the event of
failure of the 12-pulse slave unit without interruption, "External fault 3" must not be "wired" to the Peer-to-Peer
interface, but instead the parameterization P573.i001 (or i002) = 1 is required on the 12-pulse master. If the
master unit is also required to continue to run without an interruption in the event of failure of the Peer-to-Peer
interface cable, the Peer-to-Peer telegram failure monitoring time also has to be switched off via P687.i003=
0 on the master.
Reconnection of the 12-pulse slave unit during operation of the master:

If (12-pulse) operation of a 12-pulse slave unit is required to be reinstated following an interruption of the
Peer-to-Peer interface cable without error message and during (stand-alone 6-pulse) operation of the master
unit, the Peer-to-Peer telegram failure monitoring time also has to be switched off via P687.i003= 0 on the 12-
pulse slave unit.
Changeover of the 12-pulse slave unit to stand-alone 6-pulse mode in the event of failure of the 12-
pulse master unit:
In the event of failure of the master unit during 12-pulse mode, it is possible for the 12-pulse slave unit to
change over to stand-alone 6-pulse mode almost without interruption, because all external control commands
that are wired to the terminals of the master unit (e.g. ON command) are also carried to the terminals of the
12-pulse slave unit. Externally implemented logic must ensure that in the event of failure of the master unit,
the 12-pulse slave is switched from the basic to the reserve setting. The 12-pulse slave must be
parameterized appropriately in the reserve setting to facilitate stand-alone 6-pulse mode with external control.
The Peer-to-Peer telegram failure monitoring time also has to be switched off via P687.i003= 0 in this case.

Connection 12.95
Note:
With the parameterization P687.i003 = 0 AND P681.i001 = 599, in the event of telegram failure, bits 3 and 6
of the first SST2 Peer-to-Peer receive data (i.e. the control/status word for 12-pulse mode sent from the
partner unit) are set to 0.
3.8.7 RS485 interface cable for the Peer-to-Peer link on SST2
The RS485 interface cable required for the serial Peer-to-Peer link on SST2 is in the form of a four-wire
connection.
A screened 4-core cable must be connected at the screw terminals of the 5-pole plug of terminal block -X117 on
submodule A2 (C98043-A1690). Submodule A2 is fitted to the CUR A10 electronics module (see Section 9.6).
The 4-core cable is not included in the scope of delivery.
12-pulse master 12-pulse slave

A2 A2
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
M M
5 5
X117 X117
Figure 3.42 Connecting cable for "Peer-to-Peer" communication on SST2 (between the terminals of the A2 submodule (C98043-A1690))

12.95 Start-Up
4 Start-Up
4.1 Introduction and handling start-up
WARNING
Despite disconnecting the power terminals from the supply, voltage may still be
present on terminal X19 due to the external fan supply.
4.1.1 Handling the start-up instructions
NOTE
Section 4.2 First start-up:
First start-up of the rectifier/regenerating unit
Section 4.3 Start-up aids:

Index-type reference for start-up and use of the rectifier/regenerating unit, which only has to be used if
actually required!
Section 4.4 Function diagrams:

Graphical overview of the setpoint channel, open-loop/closed-loop control, analog inputs/outputs, and the
rectifier/regenerating unit data sets
4.1.2 General explanation of the terminology and functions of the rectifier/regenerating unit
Abbreviations:
Abbreviations used: Refer to Section 15 "Information, notes "
Mode and automatic control variants of the rectifier/regenerating unit:
"Function block diagrams: Open and closed-loop control": see Section 4.4
Application: Power supply of the variable-voltage DC link of SIMOVERT converters of the
6SEE70 series
Mode variants:
a) The line voltage in the regenerative branch is stepped up by an (auto) transformer to prevent
having to reduce the DC link voltage in regenerating mode
b) Permanent reduction of the DC link voltage by phase angle control in rectifier mode in order
to always be able to feed power back into the system
P318 Reduced DC link voltage setpoint (e.g. = 80 %)
P571 = 0001 Permanent selection of reduced voltage
c) Reduction of the link voltage for regenerative mode only by means of open-loop control to be
able to exploit the line voltage fully in rectifier mode and not have to use an autotransformer
for feeding power back into the system. This type of power feedback is not intended for
dynamic operation, but only for setpoint-controlled operation in conjunction with external
open-loop control.

P571 = 1004 Selection of reduction via terminal X101-12
P613 = 1001 Output "DC Link voltage reduced" message to signaling relay X104-17/18
P319 Hysteresis "Link voltage reduced" message

Start-Up 12.95
Closed-loop control variant:

a) Parallel connection (see Section 3.7)
The output current can be increased by connecting up to 2 "parallel units of identical rated
current in parallel with the power section of a rectifier/regenerating unit of size K ("basic
unit"). The "basic unit" controls the DC-link voltage. The firing pulses of the basis unit are
transmitted to the parallel unit(s) via ribbon cable. A parallel unit does not contain a CUR
electronic module.
When connected in parallel, the load current must be reduced by 10 % with respect to the
total rated current.
Due to the use of identical power sections, commutating reactors, autotransformers as well
as identical cable lengths for connection to the mains supply, an almost symmetrical division
of current between the "basic unit" and the "parallel unit(s)" can be ensured.
b) 12-pulse mode (see Section 3.8)
Two rectifier/regenerating units are connected in parallel on the output side and fed on the
line side with galvanically isolated AC supplies, each displaced by 30 degrees. A
rectifier/regenerating unit controls the DC-link voltage and supplies a second
rectifier/regenerating unit with the current setpoint. The second rectifier/regenerating unit that
is linked to the first via the SST2 serial interface (RS485 interface option) with peer-to-peer
protocol only becomes a "12-pulse slave" after parameterization.
12-pulse mode is used to reduce the harmonic loading on the system and to increase the
performance for high-power rectifier/regenerating units.
"Process data":
"Process data" are commands and setpoints from "outside" fed into the rectifier/regenerating
unit, as well as signals and actual values which are output from the rectifier/regenerating unit
Process data
Sources Destinations
- Binary inputs BE - Binary outputs BA
(terminals) (terminals)
- Parameterizing unit (PMU) Commands Messages - Parameterizing unit (PMU)
- Operator control panel (OP) "Control Word" "status word" - Operator control panel (OP)
- Serial interfaces - Serial interfaces
(SST1, SST2, SCB, CB, TB) e.g.: "ON command" Setpoint e.g.: "fault (SST1, SST2, SCB, CB, TB)
chanal
Op./cl-loop
control - Analog outputs AA
(terminals)
- Serial interfaces - Parameterizing unit (PMU)
Setpoints Actual values
(SST1, SST2, SCB, CB, TB) - Operator control panel (OP)
- Serial interfaces
Only: Id setpoint in e.g. output current
(SST1, SST2, SCB, CB, TB)
12-pulse operation
Rectifier/regenerating unit

12.95 Start-Up
"Indexed" parameters:
Several parameter values are assigned to one parameter number, which can be accessed via
the separate indices (in brief: i001, i002, etc.).
The meaning of the indices of the respective parameter (parameter number) is explained in the
parameter list in Chapter 5.
Index1
Example:
P683 i001 = 0 Bus address for serial interface SST1 (CUR)
Index2
i002 = 2 Bus address for serial interface on the SCB module
"Data sets":
"Indexed" parameters can be sub-divided according to data sets.

A data set comprises a group of several parameter values with the same index. Depending on
the status of certain control word bits, a specific data record is accessed
(see the function diagram for "selecting the data sets " in Section 4.4).
There are two types of data set:
Data sets for basic/reserve setting (B/R) can be selected via control word 2/bit 30
Associated source selection parameter: P590
Affected parameters: P486, P554 to P557, P561, P565 to P569, P571 to P575,
P578, P579, P583 and P586 to P589
e.g. for changing over between manual and automatic operation
4 changeover reserve data sets (RDS) 1, 2, 3 or 4, selectable via the bit combination
in control word 2/bits 18 and 19.
Associated source selection parameters: P578, P579
Affected parameters: P140 to P144, P160, P161, P310 to P320, P329, P408,
P517, P518, P773 to P777
Used, e.g. for alternating operation of different inverter types on one
rectifier/regenerating unit

Start-Up 12.95
4.2 Initial start-up

4.2.1 Preparatory measures
- Transporting, unpacking, assembling: refer to Section 2

- Connecting-up: Refer to Section 3
- Read "Introduction and handling the start-up instructions": Section 4.1
- Forming: If the inverter(s) connected have been switched off continuously or not connected for more than
a year, is/their link capacitors must be formed (see Section 4.3.9.6).
- Connect-up the supply and electronics power supply of the converter with the front panel closed.
The rectifier/regenerating unit is supplied with the "factory setting" (refer to Section 5 "Parameter list",
column 4) and access stage 2 (standard mode). That means:
- The settings of the rectifier/regenerating unit data correspond to the unit type according to the MLFB
(i.e. converter already initialized).
When supplied, the converter is controlled and parameterized by the parameterizing unit (PMU) located on the
front side of the converter.
Displays:
Statuses
faults, alarms,
parameter numbers,
index numbers,
parameter values
Raise/lower
Switch-on to select:
Switch-off Parameters
Indices
Fault acknowledgement and P Parameter values
changeover between:
Parameter number
Parameter index
Parameter value
A detailed description of the displays as well as the parameterizing and operator control possibilities of the
rectifier/regenerating unit via the PMU, is provided in Section 6 "operator control".
Parameterization is realized according to Sections 4.2.2 and 4.2.3
NOTE
It is possible to jump into the appropriate sequence step (in the following flow diagrams) if incorrect entries
have been made, taking into account the access stage (P051) and a function selection (P052) which may be
required. It is recommended that the following parameters and function steps after the jump-in position are re-
checked and executed due to the background calculations !
NOTE
To avoid oscillating of the link voltage in regenerative mode, it is advisable to set parameter P302 of the
SIMOVERT Master Drives FC, VC, SC (time constant for filtering the link voltage) to the value 3.

12.95 Start-Up
4.2.2 Parameterization "Standard application"
Language (only important when an OP1 is in use; see Section 9.4):

P050 = 0: German, 1: English, 2: Spanish, 3: French, 4: Italian
P051 = 2 Access stage "Standard mode“
P053 = Parameterization enable

e.g. with P053=6, the parameters from the parameterization unit (PMU)
and from serial interface 1 of the basic unit (SST1- and therefore also
from the optional user-friendly operator panel OP1) can be modified.
Commands yes
via OP1? Operator control
no
If the unit is to be switched on and off via the optional user-friendly
P554 = 2001 operator panel OP1:
P554=2001 Source for control command "ON/OFF1"
P555=2001 Source for control command "OFF2"
P555 = 2001
Drive setting
P052 = 5
Supply voltage [V]
P071 = Value of the rated voltage at the input bridge
Regen. no
Mode variants:
transformer?
a) The system voltage in the regenerative branch is stepped up by an
yes (auto) transformer in order not to have to reduce the link voltage in
regenerative mode
Permanent
reduction b) Permanent reduction of the link voltage by phase angle control in
rectifier mode to always be able to feed power back into the system
yes In accordance with the manufacturer setting P318=80%, it is reduced
to a setpoint of 80% of 1.35 x system voltage at the rectifier bridge 1)
P571 = 0001 P571 = 0001 permanent selection of reduced voltage
1) P318 is not displayed in "standard mode"

Start-Up 12.95
Idle time yes Forming the DC link (if necessary, see Section 4.3.9.6)
of converter - The rectifier/regenerating unit must be in status o009
>1year
less (give SWITCH ON command)
no - Set P408 (forming time: 1.0 to 600.0 minute)
- Select function (P052 = 20)
P408 =
- Press P key on the PMU
- Press the I key on the PMU
P052 = 20 - The DC link is formed.
- When forming is completed, the operating status
P key
display appears.
Switch-on
Forming
r000 ≤ o009
(see r006)
Wait to
Ud<50V Circuit identification
(see Section 4.3.9.7)
- The rectifier/regenerating unit must be in operating state
o009 or less (give SWITCH OFF command!).
- Select circuit identification (P052 = 21).
P052 = 21 r949.i009 = ? - Press the P key on the PMU
P key - Switch on: Press the I key on the PMU
- Circuit identification takes place (takes about 10 s)
Switch-on r000 ≤ o009 - Following circuit identification, the operating display is
activated.
Identification Acknowledge - If an error occurs during circuit identification, the
identification process must be repeated (error value r949
assigned to error memory r947 can provide more
information on the cause of error (if the error in index i009
yes Eliminate
Fault message has been reset) see Sections 5.16 and 7.1)
cause of fault
no
r000 ≤ o009 Documenting the settings

- Select the "Display modified parameters“ function (P052 =
P052 = 22 22).
(see Section 4.3.9.8 "Display modified parameters“)
Logbook Note: Function can only be used with operator control via
the PMU
- Enter the values of the modified (i.e. system-specific)
P52 = 0 parameters in the logbook (Chapter 12)
- Select the "Return" function (P052 = 0).
Ready
DC link voltage smoothing

- By parameterizing P302=3 (time constant for smoothing
the DC link voltage) on the connected SIMOVERT Master
Drive FC the dynamic behavior of the closed-loop control
of the DC link voltage can be improved.

12.95 Start-Up
4.2.3 Parameterization for "Expert application"

Parameterization can be simplified by selecting an appropriate factory setting via parameter P077 using special
functions such as 12-pulse mode with two rectifier/regenerating units coupled via a peer-to-peer link. In this
case, this is carried out by selecting the function "Generate factory setting" as described in Section 4.3.9.1 with
P0770. Then the parameterization shown in the following diagram can be carried out.
In all other cases, the following parameterization is started immediately.
Language (only important when an OP1 is in use; see Section 9.4):

P050 =
0: German, 1: English, 2: Spanish, 3: French, 4: Italian
P051 = 3 Access stage "Standard mode“
P053 =
Parameterization enable
e.g. with P053=6, the parameters from the parameterization unit (PMU)
yes
and from serial interface 1 of the basic unit (SST1- and therefore also from
Commands
via OP1? the optional user-friendly operator panel OP1) can be modified.
no Operator control
P554 = 2001
If the unit is to be switched on and off via the optional user-friendly operator
panel OP1:
P555 = 2001 P554=2001 Source for control command "ON/OFF1"
P555=2001 Source for control command "OFF2"
P052 = 5
Drive setting
P071 =
Supply voltage [V]
P076 = Value of the rated voltage at the rectifier bridge
P160 = Configuration of the power section

P076 = 0x No power section connected in parallel
P161 = 1x 1 parallel unit connected in parallel with the basic unit
2x 2 parallel units connected in parallel with the basic unit
(also see Section 3.7)
Current limits:
P160 = Max. supply current (in % P075 rated current of
rectifier/regenerating unit (factory setting: +150% only briefly
available)
P161 = Max. regenerative current (in % of P075 rated current of
rectifier/regenerating unit (factory setting: -150% only briefly
available)

Start-Up 12.95
Mode variants:
Regen. no
a) The system voltage in the regenerative branch is
transformer?
stepped up by an (auto) transformer in order not to
yes
have to reduce the link voltage in regenerative mode
Permanent no b) Permanent reduction of the link voltage by phase angle
reduction control in rectifier mode to always be able to feed power
back into the system
yes
P318 = P318 = P571 = 0001 Permanent selection of reduced voltage
c) Reduction of the DC link voltage in regenerative mode
only by external open-loop control in order to be able to
P571 = 0001 P319 = exploit the line voltage fully in rectifier mode and not
have to use an autotransformer for feeding power back
into the system
P571 = 1004
P318 reduced DC link voltage setpoint (e.g. = 80 %)
P571 = 1004 Reduction selected via terminal X101-12
P613 = 1001 P613 = 1001 Output "Link voltage reduced" message to
signaling relay X104-17/18 (ready for
regenerating)
P319 Hysteresis for the "DC link voltage reduced"
Idle time
message (ready for regenerating)
yes
of converter
>1year
no
P408 =
Forming the DC link (if necessary; see Section 4.3.9.6)
- The rectifier/regenerating unit must be in status o009 or
P052 = 20 less (give SWITCH OFF command!).
- Set P408 (forming time: 1.0 to 600.0 minutes).
P key
- Select function (P052 = 20)
Switch-on - Press the P key on the PMU
- Switch on: Press the I key on the PMU
- Forming of the DC link takes place
Forming - Following the forming process, the status display is
activated.
r000 ≤ o009
Wait to
(see r006)
Ud<50V

12.95 Start-Up
Circuit identification
(see Section 4.3.9.7)
P052 = 21 r949.i009 = ? - The rectifier/regenerating unit must be in operating state o009 or
P key less (give SWITCH OFF command!).
- Select circuit identification (P052 = 21).
Switch-on r000 ≤ o009 - Press the P key on the PMU
- Switch on: Press the I key on the PMU
Identification Acknowledge - Circuit identification takes place (takes about 10 s)
- Following circuit identification, the operating display is activated.
- If an error occurs during circuit identification, the identification
process must be repeated (error value r949 assigned to error
yes Eliminate
Fault message memory r947 can provide more information on the cause of error
cause of fault (if the error in index i009 has been reset) see Sections 5.16 and
7.1)
no
Change factory setting for: Command and setpoint sources,

r000 ≤ o009 Destinations for signals and actual
values
Process data: refer to Section 4.3.1
Change - Control word (commands) / status word (messages)
yes
process data - Setpoint/actual values
connection?
Possible process data sources/destinations:
no Connect (refer to Sections 4.3.2 to 4.3.6)
process data - Binary inputs, binary outputs
- Analog inputs
- Serial interface in the basic unit (SST1)
- Option boards (SCB, CB, TB)
Simple applications: refer to Section 4.2.5
Functions yes Possible functions:
required? WEA
software
Parametrize Parameterize functions:
no
functions Refer to Section 4.3.10 "Functions" and Section 5 "Parameter list"
P052 = 22 Documenting the settings

- Select the "Display modified parameters“ function (P052 = 22).
Logbook Note: Function can only be used with operator control via the
PMU
- Enter the values of the modified (i.e. system-specific) parameters
P52 = 0 in the logbook (Chapter 12)
- Select the "Return" function (P052 = 0).
Ready
DC link voltage smoothing

- By parameterizing P302=3 (time constant for smoothing the DC
link voltage) on the connected SIMOVERT Master Drive FC the
dynamic behavior of the closed-loop control of the DC link
voltage can be improved.

Start-Up 12.95
4.2.5 Simple application examples for connecting process data with connection assignment
Connecting-up: Refer to Section 3.3 "Control terminal strip"
Factory setting:
Switch-on/off via the PMU, messages and actual values via the terminal strip.
Terminal strip only operational if binary input 5 (BE5) is energized (high signal level corresponds to "reserve").
CUR PMU
-X104/19 BA2 Floating contact P603.1 = 1002 ON/OFF1 P554.1 = 1010

-X104/20 BA2 Fault
-X101/6 P24
-X101/9 BE1 ON/OFF1 P554.2 = 1001
-X101/10 BE2 OFF2(pulse inhibit) P555.2 = 1002
-X101/11 BE3 Acknowledge P565.2 = 1003
-X101/12 BE4
-X101/13 BE5 Basic/reserve P590 = 1005
(activates above commands)
-X102/15 AAM
-X102/14 AA Actual Ud value P655.1 = 37
Manual/automatic operation:
Automatic operation (BE5 high signal level): Command input from the automation unit via serial interface
(SST1), the monitoring of external faults via a terminal strip also
possible.
Manual operation (BE5 low signal level): Command input via the terminal strip.
CUR SST1 SST Automation unit
ON/OFF1 P554.2 = 2001

Acknowledge P565.2 = 2001
-X104/19 BA2 Floating contact P602.1 = 1002

-X104/20 BA2 Operation
-X101/6 P24
-X101/9 BE1 ON/OFF1 P554.1 = 1001
-X101/10 BE2
-X101/11 BE3 Acknowledge P565.1 = 1003
-X101/12 BE4 Fault external 1 P575.1 = 1004 P575.2 = 1004 (always activ)
-X101/13 BE5 Basic/reserve P590 = 1005
-X102/15 AAM
-X102/14 AA Actual Ud value P655 = 37

12.95 Start-Up
4.3 Start-up aids

4.3.1 Process data
Process data are commands and setpoints which are entered into the rectifier/regenerating unit from "outside"
as well as signals and actual values which the rectifier/regenerating unit outputs.
4.3.1.1 Control word (control word 1 and control word 2)

Control/status word for 12-pulse mode, see Section 3.8
4.3.1.1.1 Introduction and application example
The two control words 1 (bits 0 to 15) and 2 (bits 16 to 31) output commands and external signals (messages) to
the rectifier/regenerating unit.
Their status can be read-out via parameter r550 or r967 (control 1) and r551 (control word 2).
An overview is provided in Section 4.3.1.1.2 "Overview of the control word".
The significance of the possible commands and signals, entered externally, is described in Section 4.3.1.1.7
"Significance of the control word commands".
Every control word bit is assigned a selection parameter, which defines from which source(s) this bit can be
changed (refer to Section 4.3.1.1.2, right-hand column).
The selection parameters for the sources are, with the exception of P590 (source selection for control word bit
30 "basic/reserve setting") and P591 (source selection for control word bit 31 "Main contactor checkback signal")
are indexed 2x as follows:
Index i001 Basic setting
i002 Reserve setting
An overview of possible sources, which are assigned fixed values (0-6005, non-consecutively), are provided in
Section 4.3.1.1.3 to 4.3.1.1.6 "Selecting the source for the control word".
In this overview, values 0 and 1 are an exception; sources are not selected with these values, but the bits are set
permanently to 0 (LOW) or 1 (HIGH) (also refer to select parameters P554 to P591 in Section 5 "parameter list").
NOTE
The control word commands "OFF2" (bit1), "OFF3" (bit2) and "Acknowledge" (bit7) are always simultaneously
effective from 3 sources (can be parameterized) !
"Acknowledge" (bit7) is also always effective from the PMU !
NOTE
If the "On" command (bit 0) is connected to a serial interface (SST1, CB/TB, SCB-SST), then the following
must be observed for safety-related reasons:
Additionally, an "OFF2" or "OFF3" command must be parameterized at the terminal strip/PMU, as otherwise
the converter cannot be shutdown with a defined command, when communications fail!
WARNING
When making any modifications to control or other wiring, make absolutely sure that no
dangerous situations can arise!
Example
If a terminal at logic H potential is programmed as the source for the ON/OFF1 command,
the rectifier/regenerating unit will enter the "Run" ("R") state when the P key is pressed
(activates the value set!).
Conversely, a rectifier/regenerating unit that is in the "R" state will enter the "Ready" ("B")
state if the terminal is at logic L potential.

Start-Up 12.95
Typical application:
Control word bit 0 1 2 3 ... ... 31
0: no main con. chckbk.

1: Main con. chckbk.
1: Op. enable
0: Op. inhibit
1: Op. cond.
Meaning 0: OFF1
0: OFF2
1: ON
P554 P555 P561 P... P... P591

Select. P556
parameter P557
Basic set. i001= i001= i001= i001= i001=
Reserve set. i002= i002= i002= i002= i002=
Changeover using
control word bit 30
P590
Value 0000 0001 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1010 2001 2004 3001 to 4504 6001 to 6005
CUR, BE1
CUR, BE2
CUR, BE3
CUR, BE4
CUR, BE5
Constant-
Constant-
word 1 to
value = 1
value = 0
(Peer-to-
-X101:10
-X101:11
-X101:12
-X101:13
(Word1)
(Word4)
-X101:9
word 5
Source Options
SST1
SST1
SST1
Peer)
PMU
ON/OFF1: Basic set.: via PMU (keys I/0) Reserve set.: via bin. input 1 of CUR
Op. cond/OFF2: Basic set.: Constant value= 1= always op. cond. Reserve set.: Constant value = 1 = always op. cond.
NOTE
For OFF2 and OFF3, 3 selection parameters can be assigned differently in the same index!
Op. enable/inhibit: Basic set.: Constant value = 1 = always op. enable. Reserve set.: Constant value = 1 = via serial
interface SST1 of the CUR

12.95 Start-Up
4.3.1.1.2 Overview of the control word (control word 1 and control word 2)
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
PMU Display
"Control word 1" (visualization parameter r550 or r967)
Bit High Low Comments Source
selection
0 ON OFF1 (stop) (Priority OFF 2/1) P554
1 Operating condition OFF2 (electrical) 3 sources simultaneously effective; P555
(Priority OFF 2/1) P556
P557
2 always HIGH
3 Operating condition Inhibit operation Firing pulse enable P561
4 always High
5 always High
6 always High
7 Acknowledge Simultaneously effective from 3 P565
sources and PMU; P566
Positive edge evaluation P567
8 Inching 1 ON Inching 1 OFF Same effect as ON/OFF1 P568 1)
9 Inching 2 ON Inching 2 OFF Same effect as ON/OFF1 P569 1)
10 Control from the PLC No control Only effective via
CB,TB,SST1,SST/SCB
11 Ud reduction requested Ud reduction inactive P571 1)
12 Regenerating enabled Regenerating inhibited P572 1)
13 No fault, external 3 Fault, external 3 P573 1)
14 Motoring Generating Specification of the direction of supply P574 1)
15 No fault, external 1 Fault, external 1 P575
31 29 27 25
30 28 26 24
23 21 19 17
22 20 18 16
PMU Display
"Control word 2" (visualization parameter r551)
Bit High Low Comments Source
selection
16
17
18 RDS (reserve data set) bit 0 (LSB) Logic operation with bit 19 P578 1)
19 RDS (reserve data set) bit 1 (MSB) Logic operation with bit 18 P579 1)
20
21
22
23 12-pulse mode selected No 12-pulse mode P583 1)
24
25
26 No fault, external 2 Fault, external 2 P586
27 Slave S/F unit Master S/F unit Changeover Ud/Id control P587
28 No alarm, external 1 Alarm, external 1 P588
29 No alarm, external 2 Alarm, external 2 P589
30 Reserve setting for Basic setting for setpoints P590
setpoints and control word and control word
31 HS checkback signal No HS checkback signal
Can only connected at the converter P591
term. strip or SCB
1) This bit has a different meaning for the rectifier/regenerating unit as for the converter

Start-Up 12.95
4.3.1.1.3 Selecting the source for control word 1 (bit 0-7)
Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Selection P. basic setting 554.1 555 to 557.1 561.1 565 to 567.1
Selection P. reserve setting 554.2 555 to 557.2 561.2 565 to 567.2
Value Source
0000 Constant value = 0 x x xG/R

0001 Constant value = 1 xG/R xG/
R
1001 CUR, BE1, -X101:9 xR x x x
1002 CUR, BE2, -X101:10 x xR for 555 x x
1003 CUR, BE3, -X101:11 x x x xR for 565
1004 CUR, BE4, -X101:12 x x x x
1005 CUR, BE5, -X101:13 x x x x
1010 PMU xG 2) 1)
2001 SST1 (PMU -X300 or -X100:1...5) x x x xG/R for 567
Word1
2004 SST1 (PMU -X300 or -X100:1...5)
Word4
OPTIONS
3001 CB/TB (Word1) x x x x
3004 CB/TB (Word4)
4101 SCI 1 and 2, Slave 1,BE1 x x x x
4102 BE2 x x x x
... Consecutively to x x x x
4110 BE10 x x x x
4111 only SCI 2, Slave 1,BE11 x x x x
4112 BE12 x x x x
4116 BE16 x x x x
4201 SCI 1 and 2, Slave 2,BE1 x x x x
4202 BE2 x x x x
4210 BE10 x x x x
4211 only SCI 2, Slave 2,BE11 x x x x
4212 BE12 x x x x
4216 BE16 x x x x
4501 SCB-SST (USS /Peer-t-Peer) Word1 x x x x
4504 SCB-SST (USS /Peer-t-Peer) Word4
6001 SST2 (PTP1, A2-X117:1..5) Word 1 x x x x
6005 SST2 (PTP1, A2-X117:1..5) Word 5 x x x x
x: Value can be assigned for the selection parameters (BE can only be assigned once in the same index of all
selection parameters!)
1) Value 1010 cannot be set, but reset is always possible from PMU.
2) xG for P555, value 1010 is only possible for P555 to P557 when P554=1010.
Factory setting: xG: for basic setting with P077=0

xR: for reserve setting with P077=0

12.95 Start-Up
4.3.1.1. Selecting the source for control word 1 (bit 8-15)
Bit 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Selection P. basic setting 568.1 569.1 571.1 572.1 573.1 574.1 575.1
Selection P. reserve setting 568.2 569.2 571.2 572.2 573.2 574.2 575.2
Value Source
0000 Constant value = 0 xG/R xG/R xG/R x xG/R

0001 Constant value = 1 x xG/R xG/R xG/R
1001 CUR, BE1, -X101:9 x x x x x x x
1002 CUR, BE2, -X101:10 x x x x x x x
1003 CUR, BE3, -X101:11 x x x x x x x
1004 CUR, BE4, -X101:12 x x x x x x x
1005 CUR, BE5, -X101:23 x x x x x x x
1010 PMU
2001 SST1 (PMU -X300 or -X100:1...5) x x x x x x x
Word1
2004 SST1 (PMU -X300 or -X100:1...5)
Word4
OPTIONS
3001 CB/TB (Word1) x x x x x x x
3004 CB/TB (Word4)
4101 SCI 1 and 2, Slave 1,BE1 x x x x x x x
4102 BE2 x x x x x x x
... Consecutively to x x x x x x x
4110 BE10 x x x x x x x
4111 only SCI 2, Slave 1,BE11 x x x x x x x
4112 BE12 x x x x x x x
4116 BE16 x x x x x x x
4201 SCI 1 and 2, Slave 2,BE1 x x x x x x x
4202 BE2 x x x x x x x
4210 BE10 x x x x x x x
4211 only SCI 2, Slave 2,BE11 x x x x x x x
4212 BE12 x x x x x x x
4216 BE16 x x x x x x x
4501 SCB-SST (USS /Peer-t-Peer) Word1 x x x x x x x
6001 SST2 (PTP1, A2-X117:1..5) Word 1 x x x x x x x
6005 SST2 (PTP1, A2-X117:1..5) Word 5 x x x x x x x
x: Value can be assigned for the selection parameters


Start-Up 12.95
Bit 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Selection P. basic setting 578.1 579.1 583.1
Selection P. reserve setting 578.2 579.2 583.2
Value Source
0000 Constant value = 0 xG/R xG/R xG/R

0001 Constant value = 1 x x x
1001 CUR, BE1, -X101:9 x x x
1002 CUR, BE2, -X101:10 x x x
1003 CUR, BE3, -X101:11 x x x
1004 CUR, BE4, -X101:12 x x x
1005 CUR, BE5, -X101:13 x x x
1010 PMU
2001 SST1 (PMU -X300 or -X100:1...5)
Word1
2004 SST1 (PMU -X300 or -X100:1...5) x x x
Word4
OPTIONS
3001 CB/TB (Word1)
3004 CB/TB (Word4) x x x
4101 SCI 1 and 2, Slave 1, BE1 x x x
4102 BE2 x x x
... Consecutively to x x x
4110 BE10 x x x
4111 only SCI 2, Slave 1, BE11 x x x
4112 BE12 x x x
4116 BE16 x x x
4201 SCI 1 and 2, Slave 2, BE1 x x x
4202 BE2 x x x
4210 BE10 x x x
4211 only SCI 2, Slave 2, BE11 x x x
4212 BE12 x x x
4216 BE16 x x x
4504 SCB-SST (USS /Peer-t-Peer) Word4 x x x
6001 SST2 (PTP1, A2-X117:1..5) Word 1 x x x
6005 SST2 (PTP1, A2-X117:1..5) Word 5 x x x


12.95 Start-Up
Bit 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Selection P. basic setting 586.1 587.1 588.1 589.1 590 591
Selection P. reserve setting 586.2 587.2 588.2 589.2 590 591
Value Source
0000 Constant value = 0 xG/R x

0001 Constant value = 1 xG/R x xG/R xG/R x X
1001 CUR, BE1, -X101:9 x x x x x x
1002 CUR, BE2, -X101:10 x x x x x x
1003 CUR, BE3, -X101:11 x x x x x x
1004 CUR, BE4, -X101:12 x x x x x x
1005 CUR, BE5, -X101:13 x x x x X x
1010 PMU
2001 SST1 (PMU -X300 or -X100:1...5)
Word1
2004 SST1 (PMU -X300 or -X100:1...5) x x x x x
Word4
OPTIONS
3001 CB/TB, Word1
3004 CB/TB, Word4 x x x x x
4101 SCI 1 and 2, Slave 1,BE1 x x x x x x
4102 BE2 x x x x x x
... Consecutively to x x x x x x
4110 BE10 x x x x x x
4111 only SCI 2, Slave 1,BE11 x x x x x x
4112 BE12 x x x x x x
4116 BE16 x x x x x x
4201 SCI 1 and 2,Slave 2,BE1 x x x x x x
4202 BE2 x x x x x x
4210 BE10 x x x x x x
4211 only SCI 2, Slave 2,BE11 x x x x x x
4212 BE12 x x x x x x
4216 BE16 x x x x x x
4504 SCB-SST (USS /Peer-t-Peer) Word4 x x x x x
6001 SST2 (PTP1, A2-X117:1..5) Word 1 x x x x x
... Consecutively to x x x x x
6005 SST2 (PTP1, A2-X117:1..5) Word 5 x x x x x
Factory setting: X: for P590 / P591

xG: for basic setting with P077=0

Start-Up 12.95
4.3.1.1.7 Significance of control word (1 and 2) commands
The status of the rectifier/regenerating unit can be read in the operating display r000: e.g. READY-TO-SWITCH-
ON r000=009
The function sequences are described in the sequence in which they are realized.
Bit 0: ON command ( "ON")
The command is executed with a positive edge change from L to H (L H) only in the READY-TO-SWITCH-ON
(009).
After the command has been accepted:
Changeover to the status WAIT FOR LINE VOLTAGE (010)
The main contactor is closed.
Changeover to the status READY STATUS(011)
Changeover to the status TEST PHASE (012)
Takes place only if thyristor or ground-fault test (P353,P354) selected.
Changeover to the RUN status(014)
Pre-charging is carried out, followed by normal operation.
Bit 0: OFF1 command (L "OFF1")

The OFF1 command (stop) is executed with an L signal.
The rectifier/regenerating unit discharges the DC link with the fixed discharge ramp of 2 s to about 20% of U d.
The firing pulses are then inhibited and the main contactor (if installed) drops out.
If the OFF1 command is removed again (ON command) during the discharge process, the latter is interrupted
and changeover is made again to the RUN (014) status.
If the rectifier/regenerating unit is in the READY status, the firing pulses are disabled and the main contact, if
installed, drops out.
If there is no OFF2 command:
Changeover to the READY TO SWITCH ON status (009)
Bit 1: OFF2 command (L "OFF2")

The OFF2 command (electrical) is realized with an L signal.
The firing pulses are inhibited and the main contact drops out.
Changeover into the SWITCH-ON INHIBIT status(008)
NOTE
The OFF2 command is simultaneously effective from three sources (P555, P556 and P557)!!
NOTE
Priority of the OFF commands OFF2 > OFF1

12.95 Start-Up
Bit 3: Run enable command (H "Run enable")

The RUN ENABLE command (firing pulse enable) is implemented with an H signal.
If the READY status (011) still applies.
Changeover to the RUN status (014); the firing pulses are enabled and the voltage setpoint is approached
over the pre-charging ramp.
Bit 3: Run inhibit command (L "Run inhibit")

The RUN INHIBIT command (firing pulses disabled) is implemented with an L signal.
If the RUN status (014) applies:
Changeover to the READY status (01); the firing pulses are inhibited.
Bit 4 to 6: reserved
Bit 7: Acknowledge command ( "Acknowledge")

The command is executed with a positive edge change from L to H (L H) only in the FAULT status (007).
All actual faults are deleted after having been previously transferred into the diagnostics memory
If no faults are present:
The drive changes into the status SWITCH-ON INHIBIT (008)
If actual faults are present:
The drive remains in the FAULT status (007).
NOTE
The acknowledge command is simultaneously effective from three sources (P565, P566 and P567) and always
from the PMU!
Bit 8: Inching 1 ON command ( "Inching 1 ON")

status (009).
After the command has been accepted
an ON command is automatically executed (description, refer to control word bit 0).
Bit 8: Inching 1 OFF command (L "Inching 1 OFF")

The command is executed with an L signal.
An OFF 1 command is automatically executed (description, refer to control word bit 0).
Bit 9: Inching 2 ON command ( "Inching 2 ON")

status (009).
an ON command is automatically executed (description, refer to control word bit 0).

Start-Up 12.95
Bit 9: Inching 2 OFF command (L "Inching 2 OFF")

An OFF 1 command is automatically executed (description, refer to control word bit 0).
Bit 10: Control from the PLC command (H "Control from the PLC")
The command is executed with an H signal
Process data PZD (control word, setpoints) originating from a PLC which were sent via the SST1 interface of
CU1, the CB/TB interface (option) and the SST/SCB interface (option), are only evaluated if the command was
accepted.
If several interfaces are operational, only the process data of the interfaces are evaluated, which transmit the
H signal.
For an L signal, the last values are retained in the appropriate dual port RAM of the interface.
An H signal appears in the visualization parameter r550 "control word 1", if one of the interfaces transmits an H
signal!
Bit 11: Ud reduction command (H "Ud reduction requested")

The command is executed with an H signal.
The DC link voltage setpoint drops to the value set with P318:
P318
Setpo int = 135
. USupply,rectifier
* * 100.00%
At the same time, the intermediate DC link voltage threshold for enabling the regenerating bridge is reduced
U Supply, regenerating
to the following value if an autotransformer is not present (i.e. when < 117
. ):
U Supply, rectifier
P318
135
. * U Supply, regenerating *
100.00%
This causes the signal "Regenerating ready" (status word 1, bit 10) to switch to low.
The DC link should now discharge.
When the DC link voltage drops below the following threshold value
P318 2%
135
. * U Supply, rectifier * + 135
. P071
100.00% 100% * *
the message "Ud reduced" (status word 1, bit 13) is issued, and a converter connected to the DC link can
regenerate. At the same time as the message "Ud reduced" is issued, for which the hysteresis of P319
applies, the regenerating bridge is enabled such that the DC link voltage threshold for the message
"Regenerating ready" is set to a higher value.
The appearance of a trailing edge of the Ud reduction command causes the output of the ramp-up/return
element (precharging time P329) to be set to the current value of DC link voltage so that the DC link voltage
setpoint can ramp up again from this value.
The L signal of the Ud reduction command causes the "Ud reduced" message (status word 1, bit 13) to be
held low (regardless of the DC link voltage level)

12.95 Start-Up
Bit 12: Regenerating enable command (H "Regenerating enable")

The REGENERATING ENABLE command is executed with an H signal.
The regenerating bridge of the rectifier/regenerating unit is enabled (firing pulse enable).
Bit 12: Regenerating inhibit command (L "Regenerating inhibit")

The REGENERATING INHIBIT command is executed with an L signal.
The regenerative branch of the rectifier/regenerating unit is inhibited (firing pulse inhibit).
Bit 13: Fault, external 3 command (L "Fault, external 3")

Changeover to the FAULT status (007) (fault F038)
The firing pulses are inhibited and the main contactor, if installed, drops out (see also Chapter 7 ""Faults and
Warnings").
Bit 14: Power direction command (H " Motoring "; L " Generating ")
The command is used to specify the power direction.
With an H signal only the rectifier bridge can carry current, and with an L signal only the regenerating bridge.

The firing pulses are inhibited and the main contactor, if installed, drops out.(see also Chapter 7 ""Faults and
Warnings")
Bit 16 and 17: reserved
Bit 18: Reserve data set RDS bit 0 (LSB) command

In conjunction with bit 19 "RDS bit 1", this command permits changeover between four possible data sets (see
"Data sets" in Section 4.1.2 and "Selecting the data sets" in Section 4.4).
NOTE
The values in the data sets must be meaningful. This is the case, for example, when current identification (see
Section 4.3.9.7) has been carried out for the currently selected reserve data set or when a valid data set has
been copied using copy parameters (see P055 in Section 5.3). Otherwise errors will be reported.

The parameter settings of the corresponding data set in the closed/open-loop control are activated.
Bit 19: Reserve data set RDS bit 1 (MSB) command

In conjunction with bit 18 "RDS bit 0", this command permits switches over between four possible data sets (see
bit 18).

Start-Up 12.95
Bits 20 to 22: reserved
Bit 23: 12-pulse mode selection command (H "12-pulse mode is selected")

The command is executed with an H signal and causes a change in operational behavior from that of a single
unit (i.e. a "normal" single unit becomes a 12-pulse master or a 12-pulse slave depending on parameter P587 or
control word bit 27). See Section 3.8.4 for further details.
Bits 24 and 25: reserved

The command is recognized with an L signal and does not become active until the pre-charging time (P329) and
an additional time delay of 300 ms has elapsed when the operating mode RUN is active. During formation
(P052=20) or circuit identification (P052=21), the command is ineffective.
The firing pulses are inhibited and the main contactor, if installed, drops out (see also Chapter 7 "Faults and
Warnings").
Bit 27: Master/slave changeover (H "Slave S/F unit"/L "Master S/F unit")
The command switches between slave and master mode.
Slave S/F unit: The closed-loop control operates with an external DC link current setpoint
Even when a thyristor test is selected (P353=1, 2 or 3) if Ud > 5% it does not wait in
state o012 and the thyristor test is not carried out.
Master S/F unit: The closed-loop control operates with an external DC link current setpoint
Bit 28: Alarm, external 1 command (L "Alarm, external 1")

The operating status is retained. An alarm message (A015) is output (also refer to Section 7 "Fault and Alarm
Messages")
Bit 29: Alarm, external 2 command (L "Alarm, external 2")

The operating status is retained. An alarm message (A015) is output (also refer to Section 7 " Fault and
Alarm Messages ")
Bit 30: Selection, basic/reserve setting command (L "Basic setting / H "Reserve setting")
The command activates the BASIC SETTING with an L signal and the RESERVE SETTING with an H signal
The parameter settings of the basic or reserve setting for the control word itself, the setpoint channel, and the
closed-loop control are activated (see "Data sets" in Section 4.1.2 and "Selecting the data sets" in Section
4.4).
Bit 31: Main contactor checkback signal command (H "Main contactor checkback signal")
This command permits you to include an auxiliary contact of the main contactor in the unit control circuit (an H
signal implies that the main contactor has picked up).
An operating status > o010 is permitted

12.95 Start-Up
4.3.1.2 Status word (status word 1 and status word 2)
4.3.1.2.1 Introduction and application example
Status words 1 (bits 0 to 15) and 2 (bits 16 to 31) issue messages and commands from the rectifier/regenerating
unit to external destinations.
Their particular status can be read-out via parameters r552 or r968 (status word 1) and r553 (status word 2).
An overview is provided in Section 4.3.1.2.2 "Overview of the status word".
The significance of the possible messages and commands to the outside is described in Section 4.3.1.2.4
"Significance of the status word messages".
Each status word bit is assigned a selection parameter, which defines, to which destination this bit is sent (refer
to Section 4.3.1.2.2, right-hand column).
The selection parameters for the destinations are indexed twice as follows:
Index: i001 Selecting a terminal on the CU / PEU board (basic converter)
i002 Selecting a terminal on the SCI 1/2 board (option)
An overview of the possible destinations, which are assigned fixed values, is provided in Section 4.3.1.2.3
"Selecting the destinations for the status word".
NOTE
For the output of faults, alarms and switch-on inhibit of the status word (HIGH active) via the terminal strip,
then these are LOW active at the terminals (binary outputs) (i.e.: the relay drops out)!
This is also true for possible option boards!
Also refer to Section 4.3.3 "Binary outputs"
Example:
Status word bit 0 1 2 3 ... ... 31

0: n.ready to switch-on
1: Ready to switch-on
0: Prech. not active

0: Pulse. inhibit
1: Prech. active
Meaning
0: n. ready
0: no fault
1: Ready
1: Fault
1: Run
Select
P600 P601 P602 P603 P... P... P631
parameter
Term. on CUR i001= i001= i001= i001= i001= i001= i001=
Term on SCI 1/2 i002= i002= i002= i002= i002= i002= i002=
Value 0000 1001 1002 0000 4101 ... 4112 4201 ... 4205 ... 4212
-X104:17/18
-X104:19/20
SCI,Slave2
SCI,Slave1
SCI,Slave1
SCI,Slave2
SCI,Slave2
CUR, BA1
CUR, BA2
no dest.
no dest.
Dest.
BA12
BA12
BA1
BA1
BA5
Index 1 Index 2
Terminal on CUR Terminal on SCI 1/2
(Option)
"Run" signal: - at terminal -X104:19/20 of the CUR

- at terminal of the binary output 5 of the SCI (option),which is coded as slave 2

Start-Up 12.95
4.3.1.2.2 Overview of the status word (status word 1 and status word 2)
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
PMU Display
"Status word 1" (visualization parameter r552 or r968)
Bit High Low Comments Dest.
selection
0 Ready-to-switch-on Not ready to switch on P600
1 Ready Not ready P601
2 Run Firing pulses inhibited P602
3 Fault No fault Inverted for terminal strips! P603
4 No OFF 2 OFF2 P604
5 always High
6 Switch-on inhibit No switch-on inhibit Inverted for terminal strips! P606
7 Alarm No alarm Inverted for terminal strips! P607
8 No setpt. act. val. deviation Setpt. act. value deviation Can be parameterized P608
9 PZD control requested always "High"
(for CB,TB,SST1,SST/SCB)
10 Regenerating ready Regenerating not ready P610 1)
11 Fault, undervoltage No undervoltage fault Inverted for terminal strips! P611
12 Main contactor energized Main contactor not Can only be connector for P612
energized terminals CUR or SCI!
13 Ud reduced Ud not reduced P613 1)
14 Motoring Generating P614 1)
15
31 29 27 25
30 28 26 24
23 21 19 17
22 20 18 16
PMU Display
"Status word 2" (visualization parameter r553)
Bit High Low Comments Dest.
selection
16
17
18 Current active Current limit not active Inverted for terminal strips! P618 1)
19 Fault, external 1 No fault, external 1 Inverted for terminal strips! P619
20 Fault, external 2 No fault, external 2 Inverted for terminal strips! P620
21 Alarm, external No alarm, external Inverted for terminal strips! P621
22 Alarm i2t power sections No alarm, i2t power section Inverted for terminal strips! P622
23 Fault, overtemp., p.s. No fault, overtemp. p.s. Inverted for terminal strips! P623
24 Alarm, overtemp., p.s. No alarm, overtemp., p.s. Inverted for terminal strips! P624
25
26
27
28
29
30
31 Pre-charging active Pre-charging not active P631
1) The meaning of this bit is different for the rectifier/regenerating unit than for the converter

12.95 Start-Up
4.3.1.2.3 Selecting the destinations for the status word (bits 0 - 31)
For the selection parameters P600 to P631, in which the destination of the appropriate bit can be specified, then
the indices are uniformly assigned as follows:
Index i001 Selecting a terminal on the CUR board (basic converter)

i002 Selecting a terminal on the SCI 1/2 board (option)
Index i001 Selecting a terminal on the CUR board (basic converter)

Value Destination
0000 No destination Factory setting, except P603
1001 CUR, BA1, -X104:17/18,
1002 CUR, BA2, -X104:19/20, Factory setting, for P603
Index i002 Selecting a terminal on the SCI 1/2 board (option)

Value Destination
0000 No destination Factory setting
4101 SCI 1 and 2,Slave 1, BA1
4102 BA2
4103 BA3
4104 BA4
4105 BA5
4106 BA6
4107 BA7
4108 BA8
4109 only SCI 2,Slave 1, BA9
4110 BA10
4111 BA11
4112 BA12
4201 SCI 1 and 2,Slave 2, BA1
4202 BA2
4203 BA3
4204 BA4
4205 BA5
4206 BA6
4207 BA7
4208 BA8
4209 only SCI 2,Slave 2, BA9
4210 BA10
4211 BA11
4212 BA12

Start-Up 12.95
4.3.1.2.4 Significance of the status word messages
NOTE
When faults, alarms and switch-on inhibit of the status word are output (HIGH active) via the terminal strip,
then these are LOW active at the terminal strips (binary outputs) (i.e.: relay drops out)!
This is also valid for possible option boards!
Also refer to Section 4.3.3 "Binary outputs"
Bit 0: Signal, "Ready to switch-on" (H)

An H signal indicates that the operating status SWITCH-ON INHIBIT (008) or READY-TO-SWITCH-ON (009) is
available. The firing pulses are inhibited.
Bit 1: Signal, "Ready" (H)
H An H signal, indicates that the operating status READY (011) or PRE-CHARGING (010) is available. The firing
pulses are still inhibited.
Bit 2: Signal, "Run" (H)
An H signal indicates that the operating status RUN (014) is available. The firing pulses are enabled and the
output terminals are live.
Bit 3: Signal, "Fault" (H)
An H signal indicates that the operating status FAULT (007) is available. If the fault is output at a terminal strip
(CUR, SCI1/2) an L signal appears there for this fault message.
Bit 4: Signal, "OFF2" (L)
An L signal indicates that an OFF2 command is present via the control word (bit 1).
Bit 5: reserved
Bit 6: Signal, "Switch-on inhibit" (H)

An H signal indicates that the operating status SWITCH-ON INHIBIT (008) is present. The message remains as
long an OFF2 command is applied over the control word (bit 1) and/or an ON command is still applied the control
word (bit 0) (edge evaluation).
If the message is output at a terminal strip (CUR, SCB1) an L signal appears there for this message.
Bit 7: Signal, "Alarm" (H)
An H signal indicates that an alarm (Axxx) is present. If the alarm is output at the terminal strip (CUR, SCB1), an
L signal appears there for this alarm.
Bit 8: Signal, "Setpoint/actual-value deviation" (L)
The L signal indicates that the absolute value of the difference between the Ud setpoint and the Ud actual value
is greater than or equal to a programmable deviation (P517 "Setpoint/actual-value deviation Ud" for longer than
the "Setpoint/actual-value deviation time" (P518). The bit is again set high as soon as the absolute value of the
difference between the Ud setpoint and the Ud actual value is less than the deviation (P517).
Bit 9: Signal, "PZD control requested" (H)
An H signal is always present.
Bit 10: Message, "Regenerating ready" (H)
An H signal indicates that the rectifier/regenerating unit us ready to feed power back into the system (see control
word/bit 11 in Section 4.3.1.1.7).
Bit 11: Message, "Fault" (reserved, L)
An L signal is always present. If the fault signal is output to a terminal block (CUR, SCI 1/2), an L signal appears
there for this fault.
Bit 12: Signal, "Main contactor energized" (H)
This message is identical to the status of the relay contact at terminals 9-4/5 with which a main contactor can be
driven.

12.95 Start-Up
Bit 13: Message, "Ud reduced" (H)

An H signal indicates that the DC link voltage has been reduced below the following value:
P318 2%
135
. * U Supply, rectifier * + 135
. P071
100% 100% * *
The signal changes from H to L when the DC link voltage exceeds the following threshold:
P318  2% + P319 
135
. * U Supply, rectifier * +  135
. P071
100%  100%  * *
The L signal is also output provided that in control word 1, bit 11=0 ("Ud reduction not requested").
Bit 14: Message, " Motoring mode" (H)

An H signal indicates that the rectifier bridge is carrying current or is ready to carry current or that neither the
rectifier nor the regenerating bridge is carrying current.
Message, " Generating mode" (L)
An L signal indicates that the regenerative bridge is carrying current or is ready to carry current or that neither
the rectifier nor the regenerating bridge is carrying current.
Bit 18: Message, "Current limit active" (L)

An L signal indicates that the rectifier/regenerating unit is operating at the current limit. If the message is output
at a terminal (CUR, SCB1), an L signal appears there for this message
Bit 19: Signal, "Fault, external 1" (H)
An H signal indicates that a "Fault, external 1" is present in control word bit 15. If this fault is output at a terminal
strip (CUR, SCB1), an L signal appears there for this fault signal.
Bit 20: Signal, "Fault, external 2" (H)
An H signal indicates that a "Fault, external 2" is present in control word bit 26. If this fault is output at a terminal
strip (CUR, SCB1), an L signal appears there for this fault signal.
Bit 21: Signal, "External alarm" (H)
An H signal indicates that an "Alarm, external 1" is present in control word bit 28, or an "alarm, external 2" in
control word, bit 29.
If this fault is output at a terminal strip (CUR, SCB1), an L signal appears there for this fault signal.
Bit 22: Signal, "Alarm I2t power section" (H)
H signal indicates that the "I2t alarm power section" (A025) is present. Also refer to Section 7 "Fault and Alarm
Messages".
If this alarm is output at a terminal strip (CUR, SCB1), an L signal appears there for this fault signal.
Bit 23: Signal "Overtemperature fault signal power section (H)
An H signal indicates that an "Power section temperature too high" fault (F023) is present. Also refer to Section 7
"Fault and Alarm Messages".
If this fault is output at a terminal strip (CUR, SCB1), an L signal appears there for this fault signal.
Bit 24: Signal "Overtemperature alarm power section" (H)
An H signal indicates that the "Power section temperature too high" alarm (A022) is present. Also refer to
Section 7 "Fault and Alarm Messages". If this fault is output at a terminal strip (CUR, SCB1), an L signal appears
there for this fault signal.
Bit 31: Signal, "Pre-charging active" (H)

An H signal indicates that the DC link has been charged following a successful ON command.

Start-Up 12.95
4.3.1.3 Setpoints
The only possible setpoint selection that can be programmed on a rectifier/regenerating unit is the selection of
the Id setpoint for a rectifier/regenerating unit in slave mode (e.g. the slave rectifier/regenerating unit in 12-pulse
operation) using parameter
(See also Chapter 5 "Parameter list")
The control word command can be used for effecting the changeover:
"Basic and reserve settings"
See Section 4.4 "Function diagrams"
The source for the setpoint is defined using values:
Value entry in Index1 i001 active when "basic setting" selected" (control word)
Index2 i002 active when "reserve setting" selected (control word)
Value assignment for P486 "Source Id-setpoint":

Value Source
0000 Constant setpoint = 0 Factory setting: P486 i001, i002

2002 SST1 (PMU -X300 or -X100:1...5) Word2
2003 Word3
2004 Word4 only if word 4 is not assigned for "control
word 2 with 2004 (Section 4.3.1.1)
... consecutively to
2016 Word16
OPTIONS
3002 CB/TB Word2
3003 Word3
3004 Word4 only if word 4 is not assigned for "control
3016 Word16)
4101 SCB1 with SCI 1,Slave1, analog input AE1
4102 AE2
4103 AE3
4201 SCB1 with SCI 1,Slave2, analog input AE1
4202 AE2
4203 AE3
4501 SCB-SST (only Peer to Peer, Word1) only if word 1 is not assigned for "control
4502 USS /Peer to Peer, Word2
4504 USS /Peer to Peer, Word4 only if word 4 is not assigned for "control
4506 only USS, Word6
4516 only USS, Word6
6002 SST2 (PTP1, A2-X117:1..5) Peer-to-Peer, Word2

12.95 Start-Up
4.3.1.4 Actual values
All available parameter numbers (0 to 999) can be entered into the actual value parameters, sorted according to
destinations (refer to the following).
The parameter value of the entered parameter number is output at the selected destination.
Note: - When specifying parameter numbers, which are indexed, the value of the first index (.i001) is always
output!
- When specifying "0", no output is made to the appropriate destination!
Destinations:
P655 "CUR-AA actual values"
Output via the CUR control terminal strip (Section 3.3)
Analog output 1 (-X102:14 / reference potential -X102:15)
(refer to Section 4.3.5 "analog output")
P680 "SST1 actual values"
Output via the basic converter interface SST1
Indices: i001 Word 01 of the telegram (PZD)

i016 Word 16 of the telegram (PZD)
(refer to Section 4.3.6.1 "basic converter interface SST1")
Destination, options:
P664 "SCI-AA actual values"
Output via the SCB1 interface with SCI1
(also refer to the Instruction Manual for the option boards)
Indexes i001 Destination: Analog output 1 from slave 1
i002 Destination: Analog output 2 from slave 1
P690 "SCB actual values"
Output via the SCB1 interface with peer-to-peer protocol or SCB2
(also refer to the Instruction Manual for the option boards)
Indexes: i001 Destination: Word 01 of the telegram (PZD)

i016 Destination: Word 16 of the telegram (PZD)
P694 "CB/TB actual values"
Output via the CB or TB interface
(also refer to the Instruction Manual for the option boards and Sections 4.3.6.2 "DPR")
Indices: i001 Destination: Word 01 of the telegram (PZD)

i016 Destination: Word 16 of the telegram (PZD)
NOTE
For telegram data transfer (P680,P690,P694), it is generally necessary/practical to assign "Word 01 of the
telegram (PZD)" with status word 1 (r968 or r552)!

Start-Up 12.95
4.3.2 Binary inputs
5 binary inputs (24V) which can be parameterized at the control terminal strip (board CUR, -X101) to enter
commands, external faults/alarms as well as a checkback signal to the rectifier/ regenerating unit control word.
Connecting-up:
Refer to Section 3.3 "Control terminal strip"
Parameterization:
Refer to Section 4.3.1.1 "Control word"
Function of the binary inputs for factory setting with P077 = 0 (see Section 4.3.9.1):
Binary input 1 ON/OFF 1 command (control word bit 0)

for RESERVE SETTING (binary input 5 = high state)
Binary input 2 OFF2 command "pulse inhibit" (control word bit 1)
Binary input 3 Acknowledge (control word bit 7)
Binary input 4 No function
Binary input 5 RESERVE/BASIC SETTING (control word bit 30)
4.3.3 Binary outputs
2 binary outputs, which can be parameterized, for the output of signals and external commands of the
rectifier/regenerating unit status word.
Connecting-up:
Binary output 1 on the CUR control terminal strip (connector X104 / NO contact):
Refer to Section 3.3 "Control terminal strip "
Binary output 2 on the CUR control terminal strip (connector X104 / NO contact):
Refer to Section 3.3 "Control terminal strip"
Parameterization:
Refer to Section 4.3.1.2 "Status word "
Factory setting:
Binary output 1 No function (relay always de-energized)
X104 on the CUR
Binary output 2 Fault (status word bit 3)
X104 on the CUR
NOTE
When faults, alarms and switch-on inhibit of the status word (HIGH active) are output via the terminal strip,
these are LOW active at the terminal strip (binary outputs) (i.e. relay drops out)!
Also refer to Section 4.3.1.2 "Status word".

12.95 Start-Up
4.3.5 Analog output
1 analog output, which can be parameterized, at the control terminal strip (board CUR, -X102 / Section 3.3) to
output actual values and other internal rectifier/regenerating unit quantities.
Analog output: - Voltage range: 10V
- Resolution: 39mV (8 bits + sign)
- Accuracy: 5%
- Smoothing: 20ms
- Output current: max. 5mA
- Short-circuit proof and non-floating
Connecting-up:
Refer to "Control terminal strip", Section 3.3
Parameterization:
Also observe "Function diagram, analog output CUR", Section 4.4!
Enter the parameter number (0 to 999) whose value is to output, in P655 "CUR-AA actual values".
Set the analog output gain factor in P656 "CUR-AA gain".

(setting range: -320.00V to +320.00V / pre-setting: +10.00V gain of 1)
Set the offset in P657 "CUR-AA offset".

(setting range: -100.00V to +100.00V / pre-setting: +0.00V no offset)
The following is obtained for the calculation from the "Function diagram, analog output CUR":
 Parameter value in [% ] 
Uoff =  × Gain in [V ] + Offset in [V ]
 100 [% ] 
Pre-assignment (gain of 1 and no offset): 100% = 10V
The parameter value in [%] for the appropriate parameter number can be taken from the parameter list,
Chapter 5!

Start-Up 12.95

Configuring examples:
Example 1: Available: P071 (line voltage) = 400 V
Required: Map the actual DC link voltage r037 between 400 and 600 V to 0.00V to
+10.00 V at the analog output
Connect-up parameter R037 at the analog output:

P655 "CUR-AA actual values" = 037
Converter the required output range in [%]:

r037 should be taken from the parameter list, Section 5:
Analog output: 100% = 1.35 x P071 (in this case: 1.35 x 400 V = 540 V)
Thus, the following is obtained for the range to be represented:

400 V 74.05% (Parameter value PWE1) to be represented as Uoff1 = 0.00 V
600 V 111.07% (Parameter value PWE2) to be represented as Uoff2 = +10.00 V
Define gain factor P656 and offset P657:
The following is obtained from the formula shown above:



Uoff1 V  − Uoff2  V  × 100 % (0.00 V − 10.00 V) × 100 %
Gain factor [ V ] = =
PWE1 [%] − PWE2 [%] 74.05 % − 111.07 %
− 10,00 V × 100
= = 27.03 V
−37 %
 Gain factor [ V ] × PWE1 [%]   27.03 V × 74.05 % 

Offset [ V ] = Uoff1 [V] −   = 0V − 
 100 %  100 % 
27.03 V × 74.05 % 
= 0 V −   = −19.98 V
 100 % 
To be adjusted: gain: P656 = +27,03V

offset: P657 = 19,98V

12.95 Start-Up
Example 2: Available: P075 (rated DC current) = 420 A
Required: Map the output current r035 between -630 and +630 A to -10.00 V to
+10.00 A at the analog output
Connect-up parameter r035 at the analog output:

P655 "CUR-AA actual values“ = 035
Convert the required output range in [%]:

r035 should be taken from the parameter list, Section 5:
Analog output: 100% = P075
Thus, the following is obtained for the range to be represented:

-630 A -150% (Parameter value PWE1) represented as Voff1 = -10.00 V
+630 A 150% (Parameter value PWE2) represented as Voff2 = +10.00 V
Define gain factor P656 and offset P657:
The following is obtained from the formula shown above:
 
 Uoff1 V  − Uoff2 V  × 100 % (−10.00 V − 10.00 V) × 100 %
Gain factor [V ] =

=
PWE1 [ %] − PWE2 [ % ] -150 % − 150 %
− 20.00 V × 100 %
= = 6.67 V
−300 %
 Gain factor [V ] × PWE1 [ %]   6.67 V × (-150.00 % ) 

Offset [V ] = Uoff1 [V] −   = −10V −  
 100 %   100 % 
= −10 V + 10.00 V = 0.00 V
To be adjusted: Gain P656 = +6,67 V

offset P657 = 0,00 V

Start-Up 12.95
4.3.6 Serial interfaces
4.3.6.1.1 Basic converter interface SST1
The USS protocol (universal serial interface) is implemented at the basic converter interface SST1.
The following documentation is available depending on the particular application of the SST1 basic converter
interface:
Connection of higher-level programmable controllers with USS protocol:

SIMOVERT Master Drives
Use of the serial interface with USS protocol
Order No.: 6SE7087-6CX87-4KB0
Additional general comments regarding connecting-up and parameterization:
Connecting-up: Also refer to "Control terminal strip" Section 3.3
NOTE
Communications can either be realized via the terminal strip of CUR -X100 (RS485 standard) or the interface
connector on PMU -X300 (9-pin SUB D connector / RS485)
Only one of the two possible connections (-X100 or -X300) may be used!
NOTE
The bus terminating resistors (total 150 ) must be switched-in at the last bus node (slave).
To realize this, jumpers of DIP-FIX switches S1 and S2 must be closed on board CUR!!
Parameterization:
Defining the interface: P683 to P687
Define the process data (control word, status word, setpoints, actual values) for the interface:
Refer to "Process data" Section 4.3.1
Enabling parameterization: P053 or P927
NOTE
The factory setting (refer to "Parameter list" Chapter 5) can be used if the SST1 basic converter interface is not
used!
4.3.6.1.2 Basic converter interface SST2 (A2-X117), see Section 9.6, Options
4.3.6.2 Dual-port RAM (DPR for SCB, CB, TB)
The dual-port RAM is the internal interface on the CUR (-X107) to connect possible option boards via the
backplane bus of the electronics box (LDA bus adapter required).
Possible option boards: TB (Technology board);

SCB (serial communications board); CB (Communications board).
To connect possible option boards and parameterize the interface, also refer to the Section 3.5 "Recommended
circuits" as well as in the appropriate Instruction Manuals to the various option boards.
Additional information can be taken from Sections 4.3.1.1 to 4.3.1.4 "Control word, status word, setpoints, actual
values".

12.95 Start-Up
4.3.9 Function selection (P052)
Function selection is activated via parameter P052 and permits various special functions during the start-up
phase.
Access stage 2 (P051 = 2) must be enabled and the rectifier/regenerating unit may only be in the "Run" (R)
status. Apart from this, P053 must be set for parameter enable (e.g. P053=6).
The following functions are available:
- Return from function selection (P052 = 0)

- Generate factory setting (P052 = 1)
- Initialization (MLFB setting) (P052 = 2)
- Download (P052 = 3)
- Hardware configuration (P052 = 4)
- Drive setting (P052 = 5)
- Forming (P052 = 20)
- Circuit identification (P052 = 21)
- Display modified parameters (P052 = 22)
The "Generate factory setting", "Forming", and "Circuit identification" functions are automatically reset on
completion, i.e. P052 = 0 ("Return").
The other functions must be manually reset!
4.3.9.1 Generate factory setting (P052 = 1)
This function is used to reset the parameter values, in accordance with a) the parameter list (dispatch status for
the unit; see Section 5, column 4) and b) parameter P077 (see below). Only the settings of parameters P070
(MLFB) and P077 (type of factory setting) remain unchanged.
The MLFB-dependent parameters P071, P075 and P076 are set in accordance with the type of the
rectifier/regenerating unit (see Section 4.3.9.2 "Initialization").
The parameters dependent on P077 are set in accordance with the table shown below.
In the normal case (P070=0), the values listed in the parameter list in Section 5 are used as factory settings, so
the table shown below does not have to be considered.
For fast parameterization of special functions, using P077=1 to 6, an appropriate set of factory settings can be
selected for certain parameters in accordance with the table shown below. In this manner, for example, certain
terminals of the basic unit can be parameterized fast as sources for certain control word functions.
The following table shows the factory settings for the parameters that are dependent on P077:
Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard

Para- Normal factory cubicle with cubicle with cubicle with cubicle with
cubicle with
meters Designation of setting terminals PMU PMU as OP1 as
OP1
depend. the parameter 12-pulse slave 12-pulse slave
on on OP1 P077= 0 P077= 1 P077= 2 P077= 4 P077= 5 P077= 6
P077 Basic Res. Basic Res. Basic Res. Basic Res. Basic Res. Basic Res.
(i001) (i002) (i001) (i002) (i001) (i002) (i001) (i002) (i001) (i002) (i001) (i002)
P486 Src Current Setp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6002 0 6002 0
P554 Src ON/OFF1 1010 1001 2001 1001 1003 1010 1003 2001 6001 1010 6001 2001
P555 Src1 OFF2(electr.) 1010 1002 2001 1002 1003 1010 1003 2001 6001 1010 6001 2001
P561 Src InvRelease 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 6001 1 6001 1
P565 Src1 fault reset 0 1003 0 1003 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
P566 Src2 fault reset 0 0 0 0 1004 0 1004 0 6001 0 6001 0
P567 Src3 fault reset 2001 2001 2001 2001 0 0 2001 2001 2001 0 2001 2001
P572 Src RegenRelease 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 6001 1 6001 1
P575 Src No ExtFault1 1 1 1 1 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001
P583 Src 12-pulse mode 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
P587 Src Master/Slave 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
P588 Src No Ext Warn1 1 1 1 1 1002 1002 1002 1002 1002 1002 1002 1002
P607 Trg Bit Warning 0 0 1001 1001 1001 1001
The factory setting for P607.002 (responsible for the optional SCI1/2 module) is not affected by P077.

Start-Up 12.95
In column 1, the parameters are listed for which the factory setting depends on P077. The right-hand columns
contain the factory settings for index 1 and 2 of these parameters depending on the value of parameter P077.
The values in the column "Normal factory setting" (P077=0) are the same as those listed in the parameter list in
Chapter 5 and are in accordance with the standard factory setting.
When P077 is set and the function "Generate factory setting" is selected, all parameters are set to their factory
settings, whereby the P077-dependent factory settings are taken into account.
"Generate factory setting" can be selected in the following statuses: "Switch-on inhibit" (008), "Ready-to-switch-
on" (009) or "Fault" (007).
Procedure:
If a special factory setting dependent on P077 is not required, i.e. P077=0, part a) of the following procedure is
not required and you start with part b).
a) Start of the procedure when a special factory setting is required, otherwise start at b) :
P051 = 3 Access stage "Expert mode" to permit access to P077
P052 = 2 Select "Initialize" function to modify P077
P key The operating display appears (000)
P077 Select the required P077-dependent parameter set in accordance with the
above table
P052 = 0 Terminate the function "Initialize"
P key The operating display appears. Then continue with b) .
b) Start of the procedure when a normal factory setting is required:
P052 = 1 Function selection, "Generate factory setting"
P key The operating display appears (001),

and the following parameters can be re-assigned:
- Factory setting for all parameters according to the parameter list in Chapter 5
(also the board configuration P090/P091) taking P077 into account
- Data of the rectifier/regenerating unit (from the MLFB / P070)

P071 Rated voltage at the input of the rectifier bridge
P075 Rated DC current
P076 Configuration of the power section
The operating display "Switch-on inhibit" (008) or "Ready-to-switch-on" (009) appears after the
factory setting has been completed.

12.95 Start-Up
4.3.9.2 Initialization (MLFB setting) (P052 = 2)
This function is used to change the rectifier/regenerating unit MLFB (type setting).
The parameters P071, P075 and P076 are only set dependent on the new MLFB when changing the MLFB .
"Initialization" can be selected in the following statuses: "Switch-on inhibit" (008), "Ready-to-switch-on" (009) or
"Fault" (007).
Procedure:
P051 = 3 Access stage "Expert mode" to permit access to P070
P052 = 2 Function selection "Initialization"
P070 Specification of the number of the MLFB of the rectifier/regenerating unit

(rating plate data on the unit) according to the table at the end of this Section.
P052 = 0 Terminate the function "Initialize"
P key The operating display appears and once the MLFB has been modified, the
following parameters are reassigned in accordance with the MLFB:
P071 Rated voltage at the input to the rectifier bridge
P075 Rated DC current
P076 Only the ones position is modified
Ones position = 2, when rectifier and regenerating mode is
possible
Ones position = 1, when only rectifier mode is possible
(only set when P070 101)
The operating display "Switch-on inhibit" (008) or "Ready-to-switch-on" (009) appears after
"Initialization" has been completed
MLFB table (see next page):
Brief description of the table columns:
PWE Parameter value (to be entered at initialization / PMU / P070)

MLFB Machine-readable product designation (see rating plate)
I(n) Rated DC current in A (P075)
U-Kl. Voltage class, voltage range
BF Type of construction

Start-Up 12.95
MLFB table:
PWE MLFB I(n) U-Kl. BF
0 none 0.0 0 0
14 6SE7022-1EC85-1AA0 21.0 3AC 380-460V C
15 6SE7022-7FC85-1AA0 27.0 3AC 500-575V C
20 6SE7024-1EC85-1AA0 41.0 3AC 380-460V C
21 6SE7024-1FC85-1AA0 41.0 3AC 500-575V C
28 6SE7027-2FC85-1AA0 72.0 3AC 500-575V C
31 6SE7028-6EC85-1AA0 86.0 3AC 380-460V C
32 6SE7028-8FC85-1AA0 94.0 3AC 500-575V C
36 6SE7031-4HE85-1AA0 140.0 3AC 660-690V E
38 6SE7031-5FE85-1AA0 151.0 3AC 500-575V E
39 6SE7031-7EE85-1AA0 173.0 3AC 380-460V E
42 6SE7032-2EE85-1AA0 222.0 3AC 380-460V E
43 6SE7032-2HE85-1AA0 222.0 3AC 660-690V E
44 6SE7032-4FE85-1AA0 235.0 3AC 500-575V E
46 6SE7032-7FE85-1AA0 270.0 3AC 500-575V E
47 6SE7032-7HE85-1AA0 270.0 3AC 660-690V E
48 6SE7033-1EE85-1AA0 310.0 3AC 380-460V E
49 6SE7033-5FE85-1AA0 354.0 3AC 500-575V E
51 6SE7033-8EE85-1AA0 375.0 3AC 380-460V E
52 6SE7034-2FE85-1AA0 420.0 3AC 500-575V E
53 6SE7034-2HE85-1AA0 420.0 3AC 660-690V E
54 6SE7034-6EE85-1AA0 463.0 3AC 380-460V E
55 6SE7035-4FE85-1AA0 536.0 3AC 500-575V E
56 6SE7035-3HE85-1AA0 536.0 3AC 660-690V E
57 6SE7036-1EE85-1AA0 605.0 3AC 380-460V E
61 6SE7037-7FH85-1AA0 774.0 3AC 500-575V H
62 6SE7037-7HH85-1AA0 774.0 3AC 660-690V H
63 6SE7038-2EH85-1AA0 821.0 3AC 380-460V H
66 6SE7041-0EH85-1AA0 1023.0 3AC 380-460V H
67 6SE7041-0FH85-1AA0 1023.0 3AC 500-575V H
68 6SE7041-0HH85-1AA0 1023.0 3AC 660-690V H
71 6SE7041-3FK85-1AA0 1285.0 3AC 500-575V K
72 6SE7041-3HK85-1AA0 1285.0 3AC 660-690V K
73 6SE7041-3EK85-1AA0 1333.0 3AC 380-460V K
74 6SE7041-5FK85-1AA0 1464.0 3AC 500-575V K
75 6SE7041-5HK85-1AA0 1464.0 3AC 660-690V K
79 6SE7041-8EK85-1AA0 1780.0 3AC 380-460V K
80 6SE7041-8FK85-1AA0 1880.0 3AC 500-575V K
81 6SE7041-8HK85-1AA0 1880.0 3AC 660-690V K

12.95 Start-Up
4.3.9.3 Download or upread (P052 = 3)
P052 has to be set to 3 when a "download" (write) or "upload" (read) has to be carried out for the parameters of
the rectifier/regenerating unit at the basic unit interface (SST1) using USS protocol (e.g. using SIMOVIS).
Download" can be selected in the following statuses: "Switch-on inhibit" (008), "Ready-to-switch-on" (009) or
"Fault" (007).
Procedure:
P052 = 3 Function selection Download
P key The operating display appears(021)
- Using a PC at the basic converter interface (SST1) and an appropriate application

program (e.g.: SIMOVIS), all parameters can be now read and changed independently
of the operating status. The dependence on the access stage (P051) still applies, i.e. the
access stage has to be set in accordance with Chapter 5 in order to access a parameter.
P052 = 0 Function selection Return
P key
After return, the operating display appears, "Switch-on inhibit" (008) or "Ready-to-switch-on"
(009)

Start-Up 12.95
4.3.9.4 Hardware configuration (P052 = 4)
This function is used to select option boards (SCB, CB, TB) in the rectifier/regenerating unit electronics box.
In order to install these modules, an LBA bus coupling (Local Bus Adapter) is required for the electronics box
(see Section 9.1)!
All parameters, which can be written into the "Hardware configuration" status ("H", refer to the right-hand column
in the parameter list in Chapter 5), can be changed.
The "hardware configuration" selection can be realized in the "Switch-on inhibit", "Ready-to-switch" or "Fault"
status
Procedure:
P052 = 4 Function selection Hardware configuration
P051 = 3 Access stage Expert mode ( to change the following parameters)
P090 = Board, slot 2 (To the RIGHT in the electronics box!)

P091 = Board, slot 3 (In the CENTER in the electronics box!)
Parameter values for P090/P091:
0: No option board
1: CB Communications board
2: TB Technology board (only P090)
3: SCB Serial Communication Board
Slot in the Boards

electronics box
+1.B1 (LEFT) Standard board CUR
+1.B3 (CENTER) CB / SCB1 / SCB2
Option boards
+1.B2 (RIGHT) CB / SCB1 / SCB2 / TB
NOTE
Each of the option boards may only be used once in the electronics box!
When using the TB option board (e.g.: T300), this must always be inserted in slot 2 (at the RIGHT in the
electronics box!)
If only one option board is used, this must always be inserted at slot 2 (to the RIGHT in the electronics box)!
Additional parameters, depending on the option boards (refer to the associated Instruction
Manuals or Section 5)
P052 = 0 Function selection return
P key The operating display appears (r000) while parameters and interval variables
are being re-assigned
- The hardware is initialized
If error/fault message F050, F070 or F080 appears: see Chapter 7
After the selected function selection has been completed, the "Switch-on inhibit" (008) or
"Ready-to-switch-on" (009) operating display appears.

12.95 Start-Up
4.3.9.5 Drive setting (P052 = 5)
This function is used to change the drive setting(rectifier/regenerating data, system data).
This includes all parameters that can be written in the "Drive setting" status ("A" ,see right-hand column of the
parameter list in Chapter 5).
Once you have completed the drive setting procedure, you can decide whether to implement the function
selection "Forming" (P052=20) or "Circuit identification" (P052 = 21) or whether just to reset the status (P052 =
0).
"Drive setting" can be selected in the following statuses: "Switch-on inhibit", "Ready-to-switch-on" or "Fault".
Procedure:
P052 = 5 Function selection Drive setting
P051 = 3 Access stage Expert mode - (if all parameters, which can be accessed in the
"drive setting" status (A) are required)
All parameters, which can be written into the "drive setting" (A) status (see
right-hand column of the parameter list in Chapter 5), can be changed.
if necessary P052 = 20 Function selection " Forming "

(refer to Section 4.3.9.6)
P052 = 21 Function selection " Circuit identification "
(refer to Section 4.3.9.7)
P052 = 0 Return
The display appears (r000) while parameters and internal variables are being
de-assigned, depending on the function selected.
The "Switch-on inhibit" (008) or "Ready-to-switch-on" (009) operating display appears after the
selected function or selection has been completed

Start-Up 12.95
4.3.9.6 Form DC link (P052 = 20)
DANGER
The "Form DC link" function may only be implemented if the
rectifier/regenerating unit and the converter(s) connected have the
same voltage class (9th digit position of the MLFB).
If the converters have been left to stand idle for more than a year, the DC link capacitors must be re-formed. If
the converters are taken into service within a year of being delivered (factory number, rating plate); it is not
necessary to re-form the DC link capacitors. For more details on this subject, please refer to Section 4.3.12 of
the converter's operating instructions
The DC link capacitors are formed as described below.
The "Form DC link" function can be selected in the "Ready to switch on" status (009).
Procedure:
P408 Set the forming time (1.0 to 600.0 minutes; see Section 4.3.12 of the
converter's operating instructions
P052 = 20 Select the "Form DC link" function"
P key The operating display appears:

The rectifier/regenerating unit must be switched on within 20 s, otherwise
message F091 (fault value 4) appears.
Switch on the rectifier/regenerating unit
NOTE
The firing pulses are enabled, the rectifier/regenerating unit carries current and the DC link is charged!
During the forming procedure, the connected SIMOVERT Master Drives FC, VC, SC must not be switched on.
Forming of the DC link takes place (duration as set with P406):

While the forming time P408 is running, the control angle is reduced linearly from 120 degrees to
30 degrees and the DC link capacitor is charged up to the peak value of rectifier supply voltage.
If DC link voltage reduction is selected (control word 1 bit 11, P571), the forming procedure will
be completed on reaching a DC link voltage of P318 * rectifier network peak value.
During the forming procedure, the current limit set at P160 is not effective.
When this function has been completed, the "Ready to switch on" display (009) appears.

12.95 Start-Up
4.3.9.7 Circuit identification (P052 = 21)
This function identifies the DC link and the supply and re-assigns certain control parameters.
Specific closed-loop control parameters are re-assigned in connection with this function..
Only the parameters of the reserve data sets currently selected are modified (see "Data sets" in Section 4.1.2
and "Selecting the data sets" in Section 4.4).
NOTE
Circuit identification (i.e. automatic setting of the appropriate parameters) must be carried out, otherwise error
message F061 will be generated when the unit is switched on.
While circuit identification is being carried out, the constellation of supply, and reactor and autotransformer
arrangement as well as the capacitive load connected to the DC link terminals of the rectifier/regenerating unit
must be identical to the constellation for normal operation later. The main reason being that the Ud controller
gain that is set depends on the measured intermediate circuit capacitance.
If more than one inverter of the series SIMOVERT Master Drives 6SE70 are to be operated with the
rectifier/regenerating unit, whereby the number of inverters connected to the DC link at any one time varies, it
is recommended that reserve data set selection is implemented. Up to 4 different configurations can be formed
for this purpose that are each assigned to a reserve data set. Circuit identification has to be carried out
separately for each of these reserve data sets. During circuit identification, the appropriate configuration must
exist for the selected data set.
Circuit identification must be carried out whenever the supply network changes and/or whenever the number of
connected inverters changes.
The "Circuit identification" function can be aborted at any time with an OFF command. This triggers fault
message F091 "Circuit identification aborted by external cause".
During circuit identification, which is carried out in a series of separate stages, code numbers appear on the
PMU that indicate the current working stage.
If an error occurs during a stage, the circuit identification function is aborted. The exact cause of the abort is
indicated in the fault value r949 assigned to the fault number memory r947 (for a non-reset fault in index i001
and if reset in index i009).
You will find a detailed description of the fault messages, associated fault values and a description on the
warning messages in Chapter 7 "Faults and Warnings".

Start-Up 12.95
You can select the "Circuit identification" function in the "Ready to switch on" status (009).
Procedure:
P052 = 21 Select the "Circuit identification" function
P key The display appears:

The rectifier/regenerating unit must be switched on within 20 s, otherwise fault
message F091 (fault value 4) appears.
Switch on the rectifier/regenerating unit.
NOTE
The firing pulses are enabled, the rectifier/regenerating unit carries current and the DC link is charged up to a
certain limit! During circuit identification, the control angle is reduced until the generated separate current
crests reach an average value (with reference to an averaging time of 1/6 of the supply cycle time) of 25% of
P075 (with P160 = 150.0 %). By reducing P160 to 60.0 %, the required current crest size of up to 10 % of P075
can be reduced (with values P160 < 60.0 %, the threshold remains at 10 % of P075). Reduction of the size of
the generated current crests may be necessary when the sum of the rated currents of the inverters connected
to the rectifier/regenerating unit significantly drops below the rated current of the rectifier/regenerating unit.
The operating display appears. Circuit identification takes about 10 s with a discharged DC link
capacitor. The following parameters are set automatically:
P140 Circuit resistance of the rectifier bridge

P142 Circuit resistance of the regenerating bridge
P143 Circuit inductance of the regenerating bridge
P144 Capacitance of the DC link
P310 Proportional gain of current controller
P311 Integral-action time of current controller
P313 Proportional gain of DC link voltage controller
P772 Correction of measured values for thyristor voltage acquisition
(parameters for special access)
On completion of the function, "Ready to switch on" (009) appears in the display.
NOTE
If a fault message occurs during circuit identification, the cause of the fault must be eliminated and the function
repeated (see Section 7.1).
Circuit identification for 12-pulse mode must be carried out in succession on the 12-pulse master and on the 12-
pulse slave units (see Section 3.8.5).

12.95 Start-Up
4.3.9.8 Display modified parameters (P052 = 22)
This function is used to display all parameters (regardless of the access stage) that differ from the factory setting
(i.e. plant-specific parameters). This function only works with operator control via the PMU but not with the OP1.
Adjustable parameters that have no factory setting (P070) or whose value depends on other parameters
(P071,...) are regarded as "modified".
Those parameters that are dependent on P077 (see Section 4.3.9.1 "Factory setting") whose values differ from
the setting for P077=0 are also regarded as modified.
"Modified" parameters for "special access" are also displayed that are only accessible to specially trained
personnel using P799.
The "Display modified parameters" function can be selected in all operating statuses.
Procedure:
P052 = 22 Select the "Display modified parameters" function
P key Only parameters that differ from the factory setting appear on the PMU (i.e.
plant-specific parameters), irrespective of the access stage (P051). It is not
possible to modify the parameter value here.
P052 = 0 Select the Return function
P key
NOTE
Parameters r990 and r991 provide a list of modified parameters for the PMU and also for the OP1.
4.3.10 Functions
4.3.10.1 WEA (automatic restart)
The Automatic Restart function can be used for the automatic acknowledgment of faults and automatic restart of
the unit following a power failure (F003, F004, F005, F007, F009 or F010) without the operator having to
intervene.
If there is no voltage on one of the terminals 1U/L1, 1V/L2, 1W/L3, 1U2/1T1, 1V2/1T2, 1W2/1T3, X9.1, X9.2, or if
their values are not within the tolerance range and the DC link voltage has dropped below the threshold P074 *
1.35 * P071, the rectifier/regenerating unit responds as follows:
P366 = 0: WEA (automatic restart) is inhibited
No automatic restart; the relevant fault message (F003, F004, F005, F007, F009 or F010) is initiated.
P366 = 1: Acknowledgment of power failure after system recovery
The rectifier/regenerating unit enters the operating status o008 (Switch-on inhibit) or o009 (when
switching on/off with the I/O keys of the PMU). On power recovery, a new ON command must be
given to enable the DC link to re-charge. The converter is not automatically restarted by the WEA
function.

Start-Up 12.95
P366 = 2 Restart after system recovery and pre-charging of the DC link after system recovery
While the system is down, the automatic controllers and firing pulses of the rectifier and regenerating
bridges are inhibited. The rectifier/regenerating unit enters the status o010. On power recovery, the
unit is automatically switched on again by the WEA. The DC link is re-charged.
The unit is only switched back on again if there is still an ON command (control word bit 0) active
following system recovery. The WEA function is therefore not possible with an ON command (control
word bit 0) programmed from the PMU or operator panel OP1 provided the external 24 V supply does
not fail.
IMPORTANT: External measures must be taken to guarantee safety on an automatic restart!
Warning A065 (Automatic restart active):

This warning bit is set following a system failure if the automatic restart function is active, and reset following a
restart by the WEA and completion of the pre-charging process.
The unit can also be switched off by a manual OFF command during this restart phase. Please also refer to
Chapter 7 "Faults and Warnings"
WARNING
In the event of system failures when the WEA function has been activated (P366 = 2), the
unit may restart on system recovery and re-charge the DC link.
If the WEA function (P366 = 2 or P366 = 3) of the converter has been activated, the
converter may also be switched back on. The drive may then stop for some considerable
time and may be erroneously assumed to be switched off.
Fatal injuries, severe bodily harm or damage to property and machinery may result if the
area surrounding the drive is entered while the drive is in this state.
NOTE
If the kinetic buffering function (KIP) is activated on a connected converter from the series SIMOVERT Master
Drives 6SE70, on the rectifier/regenerating unit, P366=2 must be parameterized.
If two rectifier/regenerating units for 12-pulse mode are coupled via peer-to-peer protocol via the basic unit
interface SST2, the peer-to-peer telegram failure time monitoring must be switched off via P687.i003=0 on the
"12-pulse master" unit, otherwise the automatic switch-on with the parameterization P366=2 (on both units) will
not work correctly if the electronics supply voltage fails.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4.4
12.95
P773
Rect.
P773
P774 0.05%
Regen.
Ud set
reduction
P318
Shift αW
P774
I comp. = 0
Select
Kp TN Current limit in KP TN Stop I comp.
Function diagrams
Ud set Deadband
Pre-charging time P313 P314 rect. direction P310 P311
reduction pos. threshold αG MI 1

(P571) P329 P316 P160 P775 MI 2
Trigger unit
MI 3
r036 r038 Ud controller r034 r033 MI 4
Id -Regler
MI 5
MI 6
+ + + +
Uline
- + - + MII 1
1.35 MII 2
MII 3
MII 4
MII 5
P317 P161 P776
MII 6
Deadband Current limit in αW
neg. threshold regen. direction
C
P144 Ud Uline
Filter time
P320
r006 r037
Load current Feedforward control

Ud feedforward injection
Ud
Id - C
t
r035
P140 P141
Id RON LON
P142 P143
Rregen Lregen
Figure 4.4.1 Controller structure

Start-Up
4-47
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4-48
Start-Up
Analog output of the CUR module
P655
CU-AA actual values P656 P657
CU-AA gain CU-AA offset
DAC Hardware filtering

... ... to terminal block
... 3 # +10 V
... 2 U
Contents of parameter 001 1
0 -10 V
0 20 ms
Figure 4.4.2 Analog output of the CUR module

12.95
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12.95
All grey-hatched background fields can be changed via the control word.
This is described in Figure 4.4.3.
P590
.i002 Q. base/reserve
.i001
Base/reserve setting (Bas/Res) Control word bit 30
RESV
Parameters involved GRND 1
P486, P554 to P557, P561, P565 to P569 0

P571 to P575, P578, P579, P586 to P589
.i004 P578 P579

Reserve data set selection (RDS) .i003 Q. RDS bit 0 Q. RDS bit 1
.i002 Control word bit 18 Control word bit 19
Parameters involved: .i001
RDS 4
P140 to P144, RDS 3
RDS 2 3
P160, P161, P310 to P320, P329, RDS 1 2
P408, P517, P518, 1
P773 to P777 0
P579 P578 Index

0 0 .i001
0 1 .i002
1 0 .i003
1 1 .i004
Figure 4.4.3 Selecting the data sets

Start-Up
4-49
Start-Up 12.95

12.95 Parameter List
5 Parameter List
Parameter list - Overview

Range of Parameter Function
Numbers
000 Operation Display
001 - 049 General Observation Parameters
050 - 069 General Parameters
070 - 089 Drive Data
090 - 099 Hardware Configuration

100 - 149 DC Link Data
150 - 329 Control

330 - 409 Convenience functions
410 - 549 Setpoint Channel
550 - 649 Control and Status Word

650 - 679 Analog Input/Output
680 - 719 Communications
720 - 759 Diagnostics
760 - 779 Modulator
780 - 799 Factory Parameters
900 - 999 Profile Parameters (Profibus)

Parameter List 12.95
Parameter list; Summary of the abbreviations
Example:
PNU OP1 - Parameter name Value range Display See
[phys. unit] Indices Modify
* : Conf. Description Selection text Factory (access/
setting status)
Par.
P329 Pre-charging time 0 to 9999 4 35)/ BR6)
1) [ms] 5009) 3/ BR7)
Pre-charging time of the DC link
8)
RDS parameter2)
14)
PNU=149Hex; Type=O2;3) Scaling: 1Hex
1) An
* under the parameter number means that this is a confirmation parameter, i.e. the modified value does
not become active until the P key is pressed.
2) Abbreviations for indexed parameters
RDS Reserve data set parameter with 4 indices; changeover with control word 2, bits 18 and 19
G/R Parameter with changeover feature for basic and reserve setting in control word 2, bit 30
3) Specification of parameter type

O2 16-bit value without sign
I2 16-bit value with sign
V2 Bit-coded quantity
L2 Nibble-coded quantity
4) Scaling for access via the PKW mechanism

If necessary: Specification of scaling group for process data (PZD)
PZD group PZD scaling

0 or no specification As for PKW scaling
1 4000Hex = 100%
5) Access stage (P051), starting at which a parameter can be modified or displayed
1 Operator input
2 Standard mode
3 Expert mode
4 Factory-set parameters
6) Specification of the operating states in which the parameter can be displayed
7) Specification of the operating states in which the parameter can be displayed
6) 7) Operating states:
U MLFB input o000
H Hardware o002, o004
configuration
A Drive setting o005
B Ready (incl.: fault ) o007, o008, o009,
o010, o011, o012, o021
R (R) Run o014, o015, o018
8) An
** under the parameter number means that this parameter does not exist with a 6SE70 rectifier unit
(P070 (MLFB) 101).
9) A factory setting value in brackets means that the specified value only applies for P077=0. See Section
4.3.9.1 "Generate factory setting" for more details.

PNU OP1 parameter name Value range Display See

* : Conf. Description Selection text Factory- (access /
setting status)
Par.
5.1 Operation display

r000 Operation Display 0 to 21 - 1/UHABR
-
Status display, faults and warnings of the S/F unit
For description, see Chapter 6 Operator control
o014 Run
-- No thyristor bridge in circuit
I Rectifier bridge in circuit
II Regenerative bridge in circuit
o012 Test phase

Wait until the thyristor test and/or earth-fault test has been
completed (Selection function: P3530 and/or P3540).
Note: The thyristor test can only be conducted if the DC link
voltage is less than 5% of 1.35*P071. Following an ON
command, therefore, wait in operating status o012 until this
condition is satisfied!
o011 Wait for Run enable

Wait for Run enable
o010 Wait for system voltage

Wait until the system voltage has been checked.
or Wait for voltage at power terminals X1-U1, X1-V1, X1-W1
(rectifier bridge)
or Wait for voltage at power terminals X4-1U2, X4-1V2, X4-1W2
(regenerative bridge)
or Wait for checkback signal "System contactor energized"
or Waiting state before energizing the system contactor (Waiting
time P409)
o009 Wait for Ready to Switch On

Wait for Ready to Switch On (OFF1 active)
or Wait until internal OFF state is canceled by an external OFF
command.
o008 Switch-on inhibit; isolation (OFF2)

Wait for acknowledgment of switch-on inhibit by activating the
SWITCH-OFF command
or Isolation implemented (OFF2)
or Wait until a valid USS telegram to SST1 has been received
(only if P687 is set to 0)
or Wait until a valid peer-to-peer telegram to SST2 has been
received (only for P688=1, when P687.i003 is set to 0)
o007 Fault
A fault message has been received.
o021 Download
A parameter download over SST1 can be executed
o005 Drive settings
o004 Hardware settings
o002 Electronics initialization

The option module electronics are initialized
or The basic unit electronics are initialized
o001 Establish factory setting
o000 Set MLFB
PNU=00Hex; 1
Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex


setting status)
Par.
5.2 General observation parameters

r001 Status 0 to 21 - 2/UHABR
Observation parameters for the current status of the S/F unit
0 = Enter MLFB (P070) (U) MLFB-Input

1 = Establish factory setting Init. RFE
2 = Hardware initialization (H) InitHW Conf
4 = Hardware settings (H) HW Config.
5 = Drive system settings (A) System Set.
7 = Fault (B) Fault
8 = Restart inhibit (B) ON Locked
9 = Ready for turn-ON (B) Ready for ON
10 = Wait for system voltage (B) Line Voltage
11 = Ready for operation (B) Ready Oper
12 = Ground fault test (B) GrndFltTest
14 = R/R unit is in operation (R) Operation
15 = Ramp generator decelerating (OFF1) (R) OFF 1
18 = Circuit identification or forming (R) Circuit ID
21 = Download of parameter settings (B) Download
PNU=1Hex; 1
r006 DC Bus Volts 0 to 1000 - 2/ BR
[V] -
Actual DC link voltage
PNU=6Hex; 1V
Type=I2; Scaling: 1Hex
0 to 16384V
0 - 100%
r012 Base/Reserve 0 to 1 - 2/ BR
-
Base / reserve settings of the process data wiring for control word bits
0: Base setting
1: Reserve setting
1
PNU=0CHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex
r013 Operat. Hours 3 2/ BR
-
Display of operating hours with firing pulses enabled (Run status).
All times > about 0.1s are taken into account.
i001 = days (0..9999)

i002 = hours (0..24) d
i003 = seconds (0..3600) h
s
The operating hours counter r013 is set to 0 when the factory setting is
established (P052=1).
1
PNU=0DHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex
r030 Rectifier Volts 0.0 to 1000.0 - 2/ BR
[V] -
Display of the system voltage at the rectifier bridge (phase W-U)
0.1 V
PNU=1EHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex
0 to 1638.4V
0 - 100%
r031 Inverter Volts 0.0 to 1000.0 - 2/ BR
[V] -
Display of the system voltage at the regenerative bridge (average value of
the three phases)
PNU=1FHex; 0.1 V
0 to 1638.4V
0 - 100%


setting status)
Par.
r032 Line Frequency 0.01 to 65.00 - 2/ BR
[Hz] -
Display of the line frequency
PNU=20Hex; 0.01 Hz,

0 to 50 Hz
0 - 100% PZD gr.: 1
r033 Firing Angle 0.0 to 165.0 - 2/ BR
[el] -
Display of the firing angle
PNU=21Hex; 0.1 el,

0el -180el
0 - 100% PZD gr.: 1
r034 DC Amps (set) -150 to 150 - 3/ BR
[%] -
Display of DC link current setpoint
PNU=22Hex; 0.1 %, 100%

Type=I2; Scaling: 1Hex P075
PZD gr.: 1
r035 DC Amps (act) -199 to 199 - 2/ BR
[%] -
Display of actual DC link current
PNU=23Hex; 1 %, 100%
Type=I2; Scaling: 1Hex P075
PZD gr.: 1
r036 DC Volts (set) 0 to 199 - 3/ BR
[%] -
Display of DC link voltage setpoint
The setpoint 1.35*r030, limited to values of P074 up to 106.8%.
PNU=24Hex; 1 %, 100%
Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex 1.35 P071
*
PZD gr.: 1
r037 DC Volts (act) 0 to 199 - 2/ BR
[%] -
Display of actual DC link voltage
PNU=25Hex; 1 %, 100%
Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex 1.35 P071
*
PZD gr.: 1
r038 DC Volts Deviat. -199.9 to 199.9 - 3/ BR
[%] -
Display of setpoint/actual-value deviation of DC link voltage controller
PNU=26Hex; 1 %, 100%
Type=I2; Scaling: 1Hex 1.35 P071
*
PZD gr.: 1
r039 AnalogOut Displ. -112.1 to 112.1 - 2/ BR
[%] -
Display of terminal X102-14 (analog output)
PNU=27Hex; Type=O2; 0.1, 100%

Scaling: 1Hex
10V at terminal X102-14
PZD gr.: 1


setting status)
Par.
5.3 General parameters

P050 Language 0 to 4 - 2/UHABR
0 2/ HABR
* Display language on the optional operation panel OP
0: German 3: Français German

1: English 4: Italiano English
2: Espanol Espanol
Français
Italiano
1
PNU=32Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex
P051 Access Level 1 to 3 - 1/UHABR
2 1/ HABR
* Setting of access levels; with higher access levels more parameters can be
read and/or written.
1: Operating via PMU or OP Operation

2: Standard mode Standard
3: Expert mode Expert
1
P052 Function Select 0 to 22 - 2/UHABR
0 2/UHAB
* Selection of several commissioning steps and special functions.
(See Section 4.3.9 for details)
0 = Return from on of the functions described below to the previous Return
status of the R/R unit
1 = Parameter-Reset: all parameters are reset to their original Param.Reset
settings (factory settings).
According to the Profibus profile for variable speed drives this
function is also accessible via parameter P970. After finishing
this function the parameter is automatically reset to 0.
2 = Release for MLFB setting (changing into the status 'MLFB Input MLFB
input'). To exit this function the parameter must be reset to 0.
3 = Download (Changing into the status 'Download'). To exit this Download
function the parameter must be reset to 0.
4 = Hardware configuration (Changing into the status 'Hardware HW Config.
settings'). To exit this function the parameter must be reset to 0.
5 = Drive setting (change to the status "Drive setting" for assigning
the plant data parameters. To exit this function the parameter System Set.
must be reset to 0.
20 = Forming of the DC link
21 = Circuit identification: Assigning the controller parameters of the FormingCaps
R/R unit Circuit ID
22 = Display only parameters with modified values
Important: This function can only be used in conjunction with Changed Par
operator control from the PMU. To exit this function the
parameter must be reset to 0 (Return).
PNU=34Hex; 1


setting status)
Par.
P053 Parameter Access 0 to 31 - 1/UHABR
6 1/ HABR
* Release of interfaces for parameterization.
This parameter is also available as P927 in keeping with Profibus Profile
DVA.
0: none
1: COM BOARD (CB)
2: BASE KEYPAD (PMU)
4: BASE SERIAL (SST1) (SST1 and OP)
8: Serial I/O (SCB with USS)) (SCB)
16: TECH BOARD (TB)
Description for Setting:

Every interface is coded by a number.
Input of the number or the total of several numbers which are related to
interfaces, gives parameterization access to these interfaces.
Example:
The factory setting '6' (=4+2) means, that BASE KEYPAD (PMU) and
BASE SERIAL (SST1) have parameterization access.
1
P054 Display Light 0 to 1 - 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
Backlight for the optional operation panel OP
0 = Backlight always ON always ON
1 = Backlight only ON during operation dur. operat.
1
P055 Copy Parameters 011 to 144 - 3/ B
012 3/ B
* This parameter permits the copying of data sets 1, 2, 3 or 4 to data sets 1,
2, 3 or 4.
Only those parameters specified in Section 4.4 "Selecting the data sets"
are affected by the copying process whereby each of these parameters has
4 indices that are assigned to the 4 data sets.
Data set 1 can be set with the parameters Pxxx i001
0xy Do nothing; automatic reset value at the end of a copy

operation
1xy The contents of data set x (x = 1, 2, 3 or 4) are copied to data

set y (y = 1, 2, 3 or 4) (data set x remains unchanged; the
original contents of data set y are overwritten).
x and y are the respective data set numbers (1, 2, 3 or 4) of the
source and destination data set.
Each copy operation is started by changing P055 to parameter mode if

P055 = xy and the unit is not in the "RUN" status. P555 is reset to P055 =
0xy at the end of the copy operation.
Important: Once a copy operation has been started, the electronic

power supply must not be switched off for at least 3 minutes to
enable the copied parameters to be passed to the EEPROM.
P055 is not stored in the EEPROM, and has the value "012" when the
electronic power supply is switched on.
PNU=37Hex; 1
Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex


[phys. unit] Indies Modify
setting status
Par.
5.4 Drive data

P070 MLFB(6SE70 ... ) 0 to 120 - 3/U BR
Depends on 3/U
* MLFB (order number) of the rectifier/regenerating unit
unit
On POWER ON, the "Bootstrap" function is automatically selected as
long as P070 has not been set!
Enter the code of the corresponding MLFB here (see Section 4.3.9.2)
PNU=46Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex 1
P071 Line Volts 100 to 1000 - 2/UABR
[V] acc. to P070 2/ A
* Line voltage of the rectifier bridge
RMS value of the rated voltage at which the power section is actually
operated
1
P074 Limit LowVoltage 10 to 100 - 2/ BR
[% of P071] 61 2/ BR
Response threshold for undervoltage disconnection and phase failure
or
monitoring and threshold for DC link voltage (ssee Section 4.3.10.1).
[% of 1.35*P071]
1
PNU=4AHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex
P075 Rtd Amps 0.0 to 3276.7 - 2/U BR
[A] acc. to P070 2/U
* Rated DC voltage of the R/R unit
Output DC current (average value) at the power terminals X1-C and X1-D.
0.1
PNU=4BHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex
P076 Config. PCircuit 01 to 22 - 3/ ABR
02 3/ A
* Configuration of the power section
x1 Motoring only
x2 Motoring and generating possible
0x No parallel power section connected
1x to 2x
Number of power sections connected in parallel
1
PNU=4CHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex


[phys. unit] Indies Modify
setting status
Par.
P077 Factory set. type 0 to 6 - 3/U BR
0 3/U
Selective factory setting (see Section 4.3.9.1)
The parameter can be modified in the state "MLFB input" (P052=2). There
are two methods for setting the parameters dependent on P077: RRU
1: If a MLFB is not entered (P070=0), once P077 has been entered and
"MLFB input" has been terminated (P052=0), the selected parameter
becomes valid immediately
2: Via the selection "Par.reset" (P052=1 or P970=0), "generate factory
setting" is carried out and the setting of P077 is taken into account. The
values of P070 and P077 will not be changed, but all other parameters
are reset to their factory setting
Parameter values:
0: Factory setting, acc. to "Parameter list", Chapter 5
1: With this setting, the following parameters are initialized differently as
compared to "0"
P554, P555
compared to "0"
P554, P555, P565, P566, P567, P575, P588, P607
compared to "0"
P554, P555, P565, P566, P575, P588, P607
compared to "0"
P486, P554, P555, P561, P565, P566, P567, P572, P575, P583, P587,
P588, 607
compared to "0"
P486, P554, P555, P561, P565, P566, P572, P575, P583, P587, P588,
P607
1
PNU=4DHex; Type=02; Scaling: 1Hex
r089 Module slot1 4 - 3/ B
-
Module in slot 1 (left) in the electronics box.
4 = Module CUR RRU

(Designation: RRU=Rectifying Regenerative Unit)
PNU=59Hex; 1
Type=02; Scaling: 1Hex


setting status)
Par.
5.5 Hardware configuration

P090 Board Position 2 0 to 3 - 3/ HBR
0 3/ H
* PCB in position 2 (right) of the electronic box
0 = No optional PCBs none

1 = CB Communication Board CB
2 = TB Technology Board TB
3 = SCB Serial Communication Board SCB
Description for Setting:

Only the following combinations of PCBs and positions are admitted:
Position 3(P091) Position 2(P090)

- CB
- TB
- SCB
SCB CB
CB TB
SCB TB
CB SCB
1
P091 Board Position 3 0 to 3 - 3/ HBR
0 3/ H
* PCB in position 3 (center) of the electronic box
Text as for P090
Description see P090(PCB position 2)
1
PNU=5BHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex


setting status)
Par.
5.6 Data of the DC link

P140 Rectifier Resist 0.000 to 32.767 4 3/ BR
[ ] 0.000 3/ BR
Circuit resistance in the rectifier bridge
This parameter is automatically set when circuit identification takes place
(P052=21)
RDS parameter
0.001
P141 Rectifier Induct 0.00 to 327.67 4 3/ BR
[mH] 0.00 3/ BR
Circuit inductance of the rectifier bridge
(P052=21)
RDS parameter
0.01
PNU=6FHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex
P142 Inverter Resist. 0.000 to 32.767 4 3/ BR
[ ] 0.000 3/ BR
** Circuit resistance of the regenerative bridge
(P052=21)
RDS- parameter
0.001
P143 Inverter Induct. 0.00 to 327.67 4 3/ BR
[mH] 0.00 3/ BR
** Circuit inductance of the regenerative bridge
(P052=21)
RDS parameter
0.01
P144 DC Bus Capacit. 0.00 to 327.67 4 3/ BR
[mF] 0.00 3/ BR
Capacitance of the DC link
(P052=21)
RDS parameter
PNU=72Hex; 0.01


setting status)
Par.
5.7 Control
r150 Control Status 0 to 1818Hex - 3/ BR
Status word of the control
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
Meaning of the individual segments
3 Rectifier current limit reached

4 Rectifier stability limit reached
11 Regerating current limit reached
12 Inverter stability limit reached
Segment bright: corresponding limit reached

Segment dark: corresponding limit not reached
1
PNU=96Hex; Type=V2;Scaling: 1Hex
P160 Motor Curr Limit 0.0 to 150.0% of 4 3/ ABR
P075 150.0% 3/ A
Motoring current limit
[%]
The rectifier current is limited to the value set here
RDS parameter
0.1
PNU=0A0Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex
P161 Regen Curr Limit -150.0 to 0.0% of 4 3/ ABR
P075 -150.0% 3/ A
** Generating current limit
[%]
The regenerating current is limited to the value set here.
RDS parameter
0.1
PNU=0A1Hex; Type=I2; Scaling: 1Hex
P310 DC Curr Reg Gain 0.01 to 1.00 4 3/ BR
0.15 3/ BR
Proportional gain of the DC link current controller
(P052=21)
RDS parameter
0.01
P311 DC Curr Reg Time 0.001 to 1.000 4 3/ BR
[s] 0.015 3/ BR
Integral-action (reset) time of the DC link current controller
(P052=21)
RDS parameter
0.001
P313 DC Volts RegGain 0.10 to 200.00 4 3/ BR
3.00 3/ BR
Proportional gain of the DC link voltage controller
(P052=21)
RDS parameter
0.01


setting status)
Par.
P314 DC Volts RegTime 0.10 to 100.00 4 3/ BR
[s] 3.00 3/ BR
Integral-action (reset) time of the DC link voltage controller
(P052=21)
RDS parameter
0.01
P316 DC V-Reg +Limit 0.00 to 100.00 4 3/ BR
[%] of 1.35*P071 0.01 3/ BR
Positive threshold for the dead band of the setpoint/actual-value difference
of the Ud controller
A setpoint/actual-value deviation signal for the DC link voltage is not
applied to the Ud controller until the deviation of the DC link voltage
exceeds the value set here.
RDS parameter
0.01
PNU=13CHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex
P317 DC V-Reg -Limit -100.00 to 0.00 4 3/ BR
[%] of 1.35*P071 -1.00% 3/ BR
Negative threshold for the dead band of the setpoint/actual-value difference
of the Ud controller
A setpoint/actual-value deviation signal for the DC link voltage is not
applied to the Ud controller until the deviation of the DC link voltage drops
below the value set
RDS parameter
0.01
PNU=13DHex; Type=I2; Scaling: 1Hex
P318 DC V(set,red) 0.00 to 100.00 4 3/ ABR
[%] of 1.35* Supply 80.00 3/ A
DC link voltage setpoint when selecting the DC link voltage reduction
voltage at the
function
rectifier bridge
RDS parameter
0.01
P319 DC V(set,red)Hys 0.00 to 100.00 4 3/ ABR
[%] of 1.35xP071 6.00% 3/ ABR
Hysteresis for Ud < Ud(set,red)
(message "Ud reduced")
RDS parameter
0.01
P320 Smooth Load Amps 0 to 9999 4 3/ BR
[ms] 5 3/ BR
Smoothing time for feedforward load current injection
RDS parameter
1
P329 PreCharge Time 0 to 9999 4 3/ BR
[ms] 500 3/ BR
DC link pre-charging time
RDS parameter
1


setting status)
Par.
5.8 Convenience functions

P353 Thyristor Test 0 to 3 - 3/ BR
0 3/ B
* Function test of the S/F unit thyristors
0 Thyristor test inactive

not active
1 Thyristors are tested when the first ON command is given after
first ON
switching on the electronics power supply
2 Thyristors are tested at each ON command
every ON
3 Thyristors tested at the next ON command. If no fault occurs,
next ON
parameter P353 is reset to 0.
Important: When units are connected in parallel (see Section 3.7), the
thyristor test results are only conditionally useful.
Note: The thyristor test can only be carried out if the

DC link voltage is less than 5% of 1.35*P071. Following an ON
command, therefore, the unit waits in operating status o012
until this condition is fulfilled!
Exception: In slave mode (control word bit 27=1), the thyristor
test is only carried out when Ud 5%. When Ud 5%, a
selected thyristor test (P353>0) is ignored (with P353=3, P353
remains at 3).
The thyristors of the regenerating bridge are also fired for the
purposes of the thyristor test in the case of "regenerating
inhibited" (control word 1, bit 12, corresponding source P572
selected).
1
P354 Ground Fault Test 0 to 3 - 3/ BR
2 3/ B
* Checking the S/F unit for ground faults
This is not a protective function as defined by the VDE guidelines!
0 Ground fault test inactive inactive

1 Ground fault test when the first ON command is given after First ON
switching on the electronics power supply
2 Ground fault test at each ON command Any ON
3 Ground fault test at the next ON command. If no fault occurs, Next ON
parameter P353 is reset to 0
Note: The ground fault test is only carried out if the DC link voltage is
less than 50% of 1.35*P071; otherwise it is automatically
skipped!
1


setting status)
Par.
P366 Auto Restart 0 to 2 - 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
* Auto restart after power outage
If the power fails at one of the terminals U1/L1, V1/L2, W1/L3, 1U2/1T1,
1V2/1T2 1W2/1T3, X9.1 and X9.2, or if the voltage is not within the
permissible tolerance range and the DC link voltage has dropped beneath
the P074 * 1.35 * P071 threshold, the S/F unit responds as follows::
0 Auto restart inhibited

No automatic restart; the corresponding fault message (F003, OFF
F004, F005, F007, F009 or F010) is triggered.
1 Acknowledgment following power outage

The rectifier/regenerating unit enters status o008 (switch-on
inhibit) or o009 (switch on/off from the I/O keys of the PMU). On ON Reset
power recovery, a new ON command must be given to enable
the DC link to re-charge. The inverter is not automatically
restarted by the WEA (auto restart) function.
2 Restart following power recovery and pre-charging of the DC

link
During the power outage, the controllers and firing pulses of the
PZD R/R are inhibited. The rectifier/regenerating unit enters ON Always
status o010. On recovery of the voltage, the DC link is charged
again as quickly as possible (see Section 4.3.10.1).
Important: The necessary external measures must be taken to guarantee

safety on an automatic restart!
1
P408 Caps FormingTime 1.0 to 600.0 4 2/ ABR
[min] 10.0 2/ AB
Forming time of the DC link
This parameter is used when forming the DC link (P052=20).
RDS parameter
0.1
P409 Contactor Delay 0.0 to +120.0 - 3/ BR
[s] 0.0 3/ B
Closing delay of the line contactor
Closing of the line contactor is delayed by the time set here with respect to
the "Switch on" command.
This parameter can be used to implement time grading when energizing the
line contactors of several drive units in order to prevent the inrush currents
of the autotransformers for regenerative mode overloading a supply
transformer.
0.1


setting status)
Par.
5.9 Setpoint channel

P486 Src Current Setp 0 to 6005 2 3/ BR
(0) 3/ BR
* Setpoint source
Parameter values:
As per PZD wiring of the setpoint channel (see Section 4.3.1.3)
Only effective if slave drive (control word 2, bit 27 =1)
G/R parameter
1
PNU=1E6Hex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex
P517 DC Volts Dev Lim 0.00 to 100.00 4 3/ BR
[%] of 1.35*P071 2.00 3/ B
Setpoint/actual-value deviation of Ud:
If the deviation between the Ud setpoint and the actual Ud is considerable,
the "Setpoint/actual-value deviation" message is generated (status word 1
Bit 8 (r552))
Compare P518 (min. duration of deviation)
RDS- parameter
0.01
P518 Deviation Time 0.00 to 10.00 4 3/ BR
[s] 0.10 3/ B
Min. deviation time:
If there is a deviation (P517), the "Setpoint/actual-value deviation" message
(status word 1 bit 8 (r552)) is generated after this minimum time has
elapsed
RDS parameter
0.01


setting status)
Par.
5.10 Control and status word

r550 Control Word 1 - 2/ BR
Display of the control word 1 bits 0 to 15, see Section 4.3.1.1.2
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
1
Display of the control word 2 bits 16 to 31, see Section 4.3.1.1.2
31 29 27 25
30 28 26 24
23 21 19 17
22 20 18 16
1
r552 Status Word 1 - 2/ BR
Display of the status word 1 bits 0 to 15, see Section 4.3.1.2.2
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
1
Display of the status word 2 bits 16 to 31, see Section 4.3.1.2.2
31 29 27 25
30 28 26 24
23 21 19 17
22 20 18 16
1
P554 Src ON/OFF1 0 to 6005 2 2/ BR
(i001=1010) 2/ BR
* Source of the 'ON/OFF1' command (control word 1, bit 0)
(i002=1001)
0: OFF1
1: Not allowed
1001: CUR, binary input 1
1010: PMU ON/OFF keys
Other values: see allowed settings in Section 4.3.1.1 (process data
wiring of the control word)
B/R Parameter
1
PNU=22AHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex
P555 Src1 OFF2 1 to 6005 2 2/ BR
(i001=1010) 2/ BR
* Source 1 of the 'OFF2' command (control word 1, bit 1)
(i002=1002)
0: Not allowed
1: Condition for operation
1002: binary input 2 of the CUR board
B/R Parameter
1
PNU=22BHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex


setting status)
Par.
P556 Src2 OFF2 1 to 6005 2 2/ BR
1 2/ BR
Description see P555
B/R Parameter
1
P557 Src3 OFF2 1 to 6005 2 2/ BR
1 2/ BR
B/R Parameter
1
PNU=22DHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex
P561 Src InvRelease 1 to 6005 2 2/ BR
(1) 2/ BR
* Source for the "Run enable" command (control word 1, bit 3)
0: Pulse inhibit
1: Automatic "Run enable" at end of waiting times
B/R Parameter
1
PNU=231Hex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex
P565 Src1 Fault Reset 0 to 6005 2 2/ BR
(i001=0) 2/ BR
* Source 1 of the 'Reset' command (control word 1, bit 7)
(i002=1003)
0: No source selected
1: Not allowed
1003: Binary input 3 of the CUR board
wiring of the control word) whereby "Reset" from the
PMU is always possible
Note: The "Acknowledge" control command is edge-triggered

B/R parameter
1
(0) 2/ BR
B/R parameter
1
(2001) 2/ BR
B/R parameter
1


setting status)
Par.
P568 Src Jog1 ON 0 to 6005 2 2/ BR
0 2/ BR
* Source of the 'Jog 1' command (control word 1, bit 8)
0: No Jog operation
1: Not allowed
B/R-Parameter
1
P569 Src Jog2 ON 0 to 6005 2 2/ BR
0 2/ BR
* Source of the 'Jog 2' command (control word 1, bit 9)
B/R parameter
1
P571 Src Reduce DC V 0 to 6005 2 2/ ABR
0 2/ ABR
* Source for the "Reduce Ud" control command (control word 1, bit 11)
Wait for Ud reduction

0: Ud reduction inactive
1: Ud reduction requested (permanent Ud reduction)
other values: see allowed settings in Section 4.3.1.1 (process data
B/R parameter
1
P572 Src RegenRelease 0 to 6005 2 2/ BR
(1) 2/ BR
* Source for the "Regenerating enable" control command (control word 1, bit
12)
**
0: Regenerating inhibited
1: Regenerating enabled
B/R parameter
1
P573 Src No ExtFault3 1 to 6005 2 2/ BR
1 2/ BR
* Source for the "External fault 3" control command (control word 1, bit 13)
L signal causes disconnection of the faulted drive.
0: Not allowed
1: No external fault 3
B/R parameter
1


setting status)
Par.
P574 Src Motor/Regen 0 to 6005 2 2/ BR
0 2/ BR
* Source for the "Generating/motoring" control command (control word 1, bit
14)
**
0: Control command ineffective (motoring and generating mode
permitted
1: Not allowed
Other values:
see allowed settings in Section 4.3.1.1 (process data
B/R parameter
1
PNU=23EHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex
(1) 2/ BR
* Source for the "External fault 1" control command (control word 1, bit 15)
L signal causes disconnection of the faulted drive.
0: Not allowed
1: No external fault 1
Other values:
B/R parameter
1
PNU=23FHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex
P578 Src RDataSetBit0 0 to 6005 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
* Source for bit 0 (control word 2, bit 18) for selecting the reserve data set
(RDS)
0: RDS bit 0 has the value 0

Other values:
B/R parameter
1
P579 Src RDataSetBit1 0 to 6005 2 2/ BR
0 2/ BR
* Source for bit 1 (control word 2, bit 19) for selecting the reserve data set
(RDS)

Other values:
see allowed settings in section 4.3.1.1 (process data
B/R parameter
1


setting status)
Par.
P583 Src 12-Pulse Mode 1 to 6005 2 3/ BR
(0) 3/ BR
* Source for control command "12-pulse mode is selected" (control word 2,
bit 23)
0: No 12-pulse mode
1: 12-pulse mode is selected
Other values: see allowed settings in section 4.3.1.1 (process data
B/R parameter
1
1 2/ BR
* Source of the 'External fault 2' message (control word 2, bit 26)
L signal causes disconnection of the faulted unit after a pre-charging time
of + 200ms if the rectifier/regenerating unit is in the "RUN" status.
0: Not allowed
1: No external fault
B/R parameter
1
P587 Src Master/Slave 0 to 6005 2 2/ BR
(0) 2/ BR
* Source for the master/slave drive changeover (control word 2, bit 27)
0: Master drive: The control works with an internal current setpoint

1: Slave drive: The control works with an external current setpoint
B/R parameter
1
P588 Src No Ext Warn1 1 to 6005 2 3/ BR
(1) 3/ BR
* Source of the 'External warning 1' message (control word 2, bit 28)
0: Not allowed
1: No external warning
Other values:
see allowed settings in Section 4.3.1.1 (process data wiring of
the control word)
B/R- parameter
1
P589 Src No Ext Warn2 1 to 6005 2 3/ BR
1 3/ BR
* Source of the 'external warning 2' message (control word 2, bit 29))
0: Not allowed
1: No external warning
B/R parameter
1


setting status)
Par.
P590 Src Base/Reserve 0 to 6005 - 3/ BR
1005 3/ BR
* Source of the 'Base / reserve settings' switching command (control word 2,
bit 30)
0: Base setting
1: Reserve setting
No base/reserve changeover possible
1
P591 Src ContactorMsg 1 to 4216 - 3/ BR
1 3/ BR
* Source of the 'Main contactor energized' message(control word 2, bit 31)
0: Not allowed
1: No main contactor checkback signal
1001 to 1005: CUR terminals
4101 to 4116: SCB-SCI1- terminals (serial I/O)
4201 to 4216: SCB-SCI2- terminals (serial I/O)
For details see Section 4.3.1.1
Notes:
If the function is active, pulses are released as soon as the message is
available.
No base / reserve settings possible
1
r599 CW/SW 12-Pulse - 2/ BR
Display of control/status word for 12-pulse mode, bit 0 to 15, see Section
3.8.4.
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
1
P600 Trg Bit Ready On 0 to 4212 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
* Destination of the status bit 'ready for turn ON' (status word 1, bit 0)
Power is ON, the drive may be turned on.
Depending on the selected index all settings according to Section 4.3.1.2

(process data wiring of the status word) may be selected.
i01: GG: selection of a base drive terminal

i02: SCI : selection of a SCI1/2 terminal
1
P601 Trg Bit Rdy Oper 0 to 4212 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
* Destination of the status bit 'Ready for operation' (status word 1, bit 1)
All the settings specified in Section 4.3.1.2 (process data wiring of the
status word) are permissible, depending on the index selected
Parameter values, indices: as P600
1


setting status)
Par.
P602 Trg Bit Operat 0 to 4212 2 2/ BR
0 2/ BR
* Destination of the status bit 'Run' (status word 1, bit 2)
The unit is in operation.
1
P603 Trg Bit Fault 0 to 4212 2 2/ BR
i001=1002 2/ BR
* Destination of the status bit 'Fault' (status word 1, bit 3)
i002=0
Note:
For issuing the fault message via a terminal the active status (bit has H-
level) is inverted (broken wire proof).
1
P604 Trg Bit No OFF2 0 to 4212 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
* Destination of the status bit 'No OFF2 command' (status word 1, bit 4)
1
P606 Trg BitONblocked 0 to 4212 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
* Destination of the status bit 'Turn-ON locked' (status word 1, bit 6)
Note:
For issuing the message via a terminal the active status (bit has H-level) is
inverted (broken wire proof).
1
P607 Trg Bit Warning 0 to 4212 2 2/ BR
(0) 2/ BR
* Destination of the status bit 'Warning' (status word 1, bit 7)
Note:
1
P608 Trg Bit Deviat. 0 to 4212 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
* Destination wiring of the status bit "Ud set = Ud act“ (status word 1, bit 8) -
cf. P517
1
P610 Trg Regen Ready 0 to 4212 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
* Destination wiring of the status bit "Regenerating ready" (status word 1,
Bit 10)
1


setting status)
Par.
P611 Trg Low Voltage 0 to 4212 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
* Destination of the status bit 'Undervoltage' (status word 1, bit 11)
Note:
1
P612 Trg Bit Contact 0 to 4212 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
* Destination of the status bit 'Energize main contactor' (status word 1, bit 12)
H level: energize contactor!
Important: Relay X9-4/5, whose function cannot be programmed, is

provided for controlling the main contactor.
1
P613 Trg DC V reduced 0 to 4212 2 3/ ABR
0 3/ ABR
* Destination wiring for the status bit "Ud reduced“
(status word 1, bit 13)
1
P614 Trg Motor/Regen 0 to 4212 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
* Destination wiring for the status bit "Regenerative/motoring mode" (status
word 1, bit 14)
**
Parameter values, Indices: as P600
1
P618 Trg Current Lim. 0 to 4212 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
* Destination wiring of the status bit "Current limit active"
Note:
inverted (broken-wire proof).
1
P619 Trg Bit Ext Flt1 0 to 4212 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
* Destination of the status bit 'External fault 1' (status word 2, bit 19)
Note:
1


setting status)
Par.
P620 Trg Bit Ext Flt2 0 to 4212 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
* Destination of the status bit 'External fault 2'
Note:
If an ON command is active, L-level causes fault trip after 200 msec.
1
P621 Trg Bit ExtWarn 0 to 4212 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
* Destination of the status bit 'External warning'
Note:
1
P622 Trg Bit i2t Inv 0 to 4212 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
* Destination of the status bit 'Warning unit overload'
(status word 2, bit 22);
Note:
1
P623 Trg BitFltTmpInv 0 to 4212 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
* Destination of the status bit 'Fault unit overtemperature'
(status word 2, bit 23
Note:
Parameter values, Indices: as for P600
1
P624 Trg BitWarTmpInv 0 to 4212 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
* Destination of the status bit 'Warning unit overtemperature'
(status word 2, bit 24
Note:
1


setting status)
Par.
P631 Trg Bit Charging 0 to 4212 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
* Destination of the status bit 'Charging active' (status word 2, bit 31)
Note:
1


setting status)
Par.
5.11 Analog input/output

P655 CUR AnaOutActVal 0 to 999 - 2/ BR
37 2/ BR
Number of the parameters whose value is to be output at the analog output
of the CUR, (terminal X102-14).
1
P656 CUR AnaOut Gain 320,00 - 2/ BR
[V] 10.00 2/ BR
Gain for the analog output of the CUR (terminal X102-14)
P656 = desired analog output voltage at PWE=100%, if offset=0
The output voltage is calculated with the following formula:

U(out)= [(PWE/100%) * P656] + P657
0.01 V
PNU=290Hex; Type=I2; Scaling: 1Hex
P657 CUR AnaOutOffset -100.00 to 100.00 - 2/ BR
[V] 0.00 2/ BR
Offset for the analog output on the CUR (terminal X102-14)
The analog output can represent voltages of -10V to +10V.
0.01 V
P658 AnaOut Conf Curr 0 to 3 - 2/ BR
0 2/ BR
* Configuration of terminal X102-16 (actual current display)
0 Output with correct sign signed
(positive voltage: motoring current)
(negative voltage: regenerative current)
1 Output absolute value (positive voltage only) absoluteVal
inverted
2 Signed output, inverted
(positive voltage: motoring current)
(negative voltage: regenerative current)
inv. absVal
3 Output of absolute value, inverted (negative voltage only)
1


setting status)
Par.
P660 SCI AnalogInConf 0 to 2 6 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
Configuration of the SCI analog inputs; defines the kind of the input signals
Parameter values Terminals Terminals

X428/3, 6, 9 X428/5, 8, 11
0: -10 V ... + 10 V - 20 mA ... + 20 mA
1: 0 V ... + 10 V 0 mA ... + 20 mA
2: 4 mA ... + 20 mA
Notes:
Only one signal can be wired per input; alternatively voltage or current
signals can be evaluated.
Voltage and current signals must be connected to different terminals.
Settings 1 and 2 only allow unipolar signals, i. e. the internal process data
are also unipolar.
At setting 2 an input current < 2 mA causes a fault trip (broken wire proof)
The offset scaling of the analog inputs is done via P662.
i001: Sl11 Slave 1, analog input 1

Condition:
The related SCB board must be reported via P090 and P091, respectively
1
P661 SCI AnaInSmooth 0 to 15 6 3/ BR
2 3/ BR
Filter time constant of the SCI analog inputs

1
P662 SCI AnalogInOffs -320.00 to 320.00 6 3/ BR
[V] 0.00 3/ BR
Offset scaling of the SCI analog inputs
Description for setting see SCI manual

0.01 V


setting status)
Par.
P664 SCI AnaOutActVal 0 to 999 6 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
Actual value output via SCI analog outputs
Description for setting:

Enter the parameter number of the quantities, which are to be issued; for
details see SCI manual.
i001: Sl11 Slave 1, analog output 1

Condition:
The related SCB board must be reported via P090 and P091, respectively
1
P665 SCI AnaOut Gain -320.00 to 320.00 6 3/ BR
[V] 10.00 3/ BR
Proportional gain of the SCI analog outputs
Description for setting: see SCI manual

0.01 V
P666 SCI AnaOut Offs -320.00 to 320.00 6 3/ BR
[V] 0.00 3/ BR
Offset of the SCI analog outputs

0.01 V
PNU=29AHex; Type=I2; Scaling: 1Hex

PNU OP1-parameter name Value range Display See

setting status)
Par.
5.12 Communications
P680 Scom1 Act Value 0 to 999 16 3/ BR
i001=968 3/ B
* Process data assignment for actual-value output over serial interface SST1.
i002=0
Defines the parameter positions in the telegram.
...
i016=0
Notes:
Word 1 should be assigned status word 1 (r552=r968).
The length (number of words) of the process data part in the telegram is set
with P686, Index i001.
i001=Word 01 of the (process data part of the) telegram

...
1
P681 Scom2 Act Value 0 to 999 5 3/ BR
i001=599 3/ B
* Selection of the process data to be transmitted over serial interface SST2
i002=34
(actual values) with peer-to-peer protocol selected (P688=1).
i003=0
Defines the parameter positions in the telegram.
i004=0
i005=0
Notes:
The length (number of words) of the process data part in the peer-to-peer
telegram is set with P686, Index i003.

...
1
P682 SCB Protocol 0 to 5 - 3/ HBR
0 3/ H
* SCB can be operated as
master for the SCI boards or as
serial communications board
(see SCB manual).
0 = SCI-Module: Master for SCI boards SCI-Module

1 = 4 wire USS 4 wire USS
2 = 2 wire USS 2 wire USS
3 = Peer to Peer Peer 2 Peer
4 = Option-1: not used Option 1
5 = Option-2; not used Option 2
Condition:
SCB board must be reported via P090 and 0P91, respectively
1
PNU=2AAHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex
P683 SCom/SCB BusAddr 0 to 30 2 3/ BR
0 3/ B
* Bus address of the serial communication interfaces
i001 = SST1: bus address of serial comm. interface 1 (CUR)

i002 = SCB: SCB baud rate, if P682=1, 2
1
PNU=2ABHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex


setting status)
Par.
P684 SCom/SCB Baud 1 to 813 2 3/ BR
i001=6 3/ B
* Serial interfaces baud rate
i002=6
i003=13
1 300 Baud 300 Bd
2 600 Baud 600 Bd
3 1200 Baud 1200 Bd
4 2400 Baud 2400 Bd
5 4800 Baud 4800 Bd
6 9600 Baud 9600 Bd
7 19200 Baud 19200 Bd
8 38400 Baud 38400 Bd
9 57650 Baud 57650 Bd
10 76800 Baud 76800 Bd
11 93750 Baud 93750 Bd
12 115200 Baud 115200 Bd
13 187500 Baud 187500 Bd
i001 = SST1: serial comm. interface 1 (CUR)

i002 = SCB: SCB, if P682=1, 2, 3
i003 = SST2: serial comm. interface 2 (CUR with PTP1 option)
1
PNU=2ACHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex
P685 SCom/SCB #PKWDat 0 to 127 2 3/ BR
i001=127 3/ B
* Number of words (16 bit) of the parameter data part in the net data block of
i002=127
the telegram.
0: No parameter data part in the telegram

3, 4 Parameter data part is 3 (parameter identifier, Ind, parameter
value), 4 words long
127 Variable parameter data length for the transfer of parameter
description and texts

i002 = SCB: SCB, if P682=1, 2
1
PNU=2ADHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex
P686 SCom/SCB # PrDat 0 to 16 3 3/ BR
2 3/ B
* Number of words (16 bits) of the process data part in the net data block of
the telegram.

i002 = SCB: SCB, if P682=1, 2, 3
PWE=0 means that no process data are expected in the USS protocol and
that none are sent.
i003 = SST2: serial comm. interface 2 (CUR with PTP1 option), if

Peer-to-Peer protocol is selected (P688=1), from 1 to 5 net
data words can be sent.
1
PNU=2AEHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex


setting status)
Par.
P687 SCom/SCB TlgOFF 0 to 6500 3 2/ BR
[ms] i001=0 2/ BR
* Telegram OFF time of CUR and SCB
i002=0
If no correct telegram is received within the parameterized time a fault trip
i003=1
is set.

Value 0: No monitoring, no fault trip; must be parameterized for sporadic
(acyclic) telegrams, e. g. operator panel OP at serial comm. interface 1.

i002 = SCB: SCB, if P682=1, 2, 3
i003 = SST2: serial comm. interface 2 (CUR with PTP1 option), if

Peer-to-Peer protocol is selected (P688=1).
With active Peer-To-Peer protocol (P688 = 1) and telegram
failure time P687.i003 0, the unit remains in operating state
o008 until telegram traffic is correct (see P688).
With P687.i003 = 0 AND P681.i001 = 599 in the case of
telegram failure, bits 3 and 6 of the first SST2 Peer-to-Peer
receive data (the control/status word sent from the partner unit
in 12-pulse mode) are set to 0.
1ms
PNU=2AFHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex
P688 SST2 Protocol 0 to 1 - 3/ BR
0 3/ B
* Selection of the protocol for SST2 (serial interface 2 (CUR with PTP1
option))
0 Interface is provided for factory-internal diagnostics purposes, 7

data bits + 1 parity bit, even parity,1 stop bit)
1 Peer-to-Peer protocol
factory-internal
(8 data bits + 1 parity bit, even parity,1 stop bit)
Peer to Peer
With active Peer-To-Peer protocol (P688 = 1) and telegram
failure time P687.i003 0, the unit remains in operating state
o008 until telegram traffic is correct.
1
PNU=2B0Hex; Typ=O2; Normierung: 1Hex
P689 SCB Peer2PeerExt 0 to 1 5 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
Immediate transfer on of data received via the peer to peer protocol of
SCB.
Mark of these words of the received peer to peer telegram which are to be
transferred on immediately.
CUR only
0: No immediate transfer (only to CUR) Transfer
1: Immediate transfer (and passing to CUR)
i001 = W01: Word 01 of the (process data part of the) telegram

.....
Condition: P682 = 3 (peer to peer protocol)
1
PNU=2B1Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex


setting status)
Par.
P690 SCB Act Values 0 to 999 16 3/ BR
i001=968 3/ B
* Actual value output via the serial communications interface of the SCB
i002=0
board.
...
Defines, which parameter is to be transferred at which telegram address.
i016=0
Notes:
Word 1 should be set for status word 1 (r552=r968)
The length (number of words) of the process data part of the telegram is set
with P686, Index 02
i001 Word 01 of the (process data part of the) telegram

...
i016 Word16 of the (process data part of the) telegram
1
P694 CB/TB Act Values 0 to 999 16 3/ BR
i001=968 3/ B
* Actual-value output over the serial interface of the CB and/or TB module
i002=0
Defines which parameter is to be transferred at which telegram address.
...
i016=0
Note:
Word 1 should be set for status word 1 (r552=r968)
If "0" is entered (factory setting from i002 to i016), the option module does
not pass the current value of r000 to the control system (e.g. SIMATIC), but
the constant value "0".

...
i016 Word16 of the (process data part of the) telegram
1
P695 CB/TB TlgOFFTime 0 to 6500 - 3/ BR
[ms] 20 3/ BR
* Telegram lag time of CB and TB
If no correct telegram is received within the parameterized time a fault trip
is set.
Monitoring is carried out at intervals of 20 ms, therefore it is only
appropriate to set values that are multiples of 20 ms.

0: no monitoring, no fault trip; must be parameterized for sporadic
(non-cyclic) telegrams, e. g. operator panel OP at serial comm.
interface 1.
1 ms
P696 CB Parameter 1 0 to 65535 - 3/ HBR
0 3/ H
Communication board parameter 1.
See manual of the used communication board.
Parameter is only needed if a communication board is reported (P090 or

P091 = 1)
The communication board checks, if the set value is valid. If the value is not
accepted, the fault message 80 is issued with fault value 5
1
0 3/H
Communication board parameter 2
see P696
1


setting status)
Par.
0 3/ H
See P696
1
PNU=2BAHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex
0 3/ H
See P696
1
PNU=2BBHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex
0 3/ H
See P696
1
PNU=2BCHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex
0 3/ H
See P696
1
PNU=2BDHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex
0 3/ H
See P696
1
PNU=2BEHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex
0 3/ H
See P696
1
PNU=2BFHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex
0 3/ H
Communication Board Parameter 9
See P696
1
PNU=2C0Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex
0 3/ H
See P696
1
PNU=2C1Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex


setting status)
Par.
5.13 Diagnostics
r720 SW Version 3 3/U BR
Software version of the PCBs in positions 1, 2 and 3 of the electronic box.
Indices:
i001: Pos1: Software version of the PCB in position 1
i002: Pos2: Software version of the PCB in position 2 Pos1
i003: Pos3: Software version of the PCB in position 3 Pos2
Pos3
0.1
PNU=2D0Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex
r721 SW Generat. Date 3 3/U BR
Software generation date of the CUR board.
Indices: i001= Year Year

i002= Month Mon
i003= Day Day
1
r722 SW ID 3 3/U BR
Extended software version ID of the modules in slots 1, 2 and 3 of the

electronic box for internal purposes.
Indices:
i001: SPL1: Software code of the PCB in position 1
0.1
r723 PCB Code 3 3/U BR
Identification code of the PCBs in positions 1, 2 and 3 of the electronic box
Indices:
i001: SPL1: PCB code of the PCB in position 1
PCB codes:
CUR: 105
CB: 140 - 149
TB: 130 - 139
SCB: 120 - 129
1
r725 HeadroomCalcTime 0 to 100% - 3/ BR
[%] - 3/
Headroom of the CPU on the CUR module.
1%
PNU=2D5Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex PZD gr.: 1
100% computer time free
Analog output: 100%


setting status)
Par.
r730 SCB Diagnostics 16 3/ HBR
SCB diagnostics
All values in HEX display
If a quantity is represented, overflow takes place at FF Hex.
The meaning of several Indices depends of the selected SCB protocol
(P682).
i001: flTC Number of error-free telegrams

i002: Terr Number of error telegrams
i003: Ferr Number of byte frame-errors
i004: Orun Number of overrun errors
i005: Prty Parity error
i006: STX STX error
i007: ETX ETX error
i008: BCC Block check error
i009: L/KL USS/Peer to Peer: incorrect telegram length
SCI modules: required maximum number of terminals
according to process data wiring (P554 to P631).
i010: T/An USS: Timeout
SCI Modules: required analog inputs / outputs
according to process data wiring of the setpoint
channel and actual value output via SCI (P664) .
i011: BCd0 PCB code word 0
i012: BCd1 PCB code word 1
i013: Warn SCB-DPR- warning word
i014: Sl1? Information, if slave 1 needed and if yes, which type.
0: no slave needed
1: SCI1
2: SCI2
i015: Sl2? Information, if slave 2 needed and if yes, which type.
0: no slave needed
1: SCI1
2: SCI2
i016: IniF: with 'SCI modules': initialization fault
1
PNU=2DAHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex
r731 CB/TB Diagnostics 32 3/ HBR
For detailed information see manuals of the used communication boards
(CB) or technology boards (TB).
1
PNU=2DBHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex
r748 Fault Time 24 2/ BR
The instants at which faults occur (reading of the hours counter r013 at the
instant the fault occurs)
See parameter r947 for details
Trip description by: r947 Fault number

r949 Fault value
r951 List of fault texts
P952 Number of faults
1
PNU=2ECHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex


setting status)
Par.
5.14 Modulator
P773 Deadband Convert 0.01 to 100.00 4 3/ BR
[%] 0.01 3/ BR
The reversing threshold of the auto-reversing module (in rectifier direction)
If the (signed) setpoint of the DC link current (output of the DC link voltage
controller on the output side of the limiting module) exceeds the value of +
0.05% set with this parameter, the firing pulses of the rectifier bridge are
enabled. These pulses are inhibited if the setpoint of the DC link current
drops below the value set here.
RDS parameter
0.01 %
P774 Deadband Invert -100.00 to -0.01 4 3/ BR
[%] -3.00 3/ BR
** The reversing threshold of the auto-reversing module (in regenerating
direction)
If the (signed) setpoint of the DC link current (output of the DC link voltage
controller on the output side of the limiting module) exceeds the value of -
0.05% set with this parameter, the firing pulses of the rectifier bridge are
enabled. These pulses are inhibited if the setpoint of the DC link current
drops below the value set here..
RDS parameter
0.01
P775 Min Gating Angle 0 to 120 4 3/ BR
[el] 0 3/ BR
Alpha G limit (rectifier stability limit)
RDS parameter
1 el
P776 Max Gating Angle 120 to 165 4 3/ BR
[el] 150 3/ B
Alpha W limit (inverter stability limit)
RDS parameter
1 el
P777 Max Gating Angle Ramp 0.00 to 100.00 4 3/ BR
[%] of P075 20.00 3/ BR
Transition ramp of the alpha W limit from pulsating to continuous DC (for
currents < pulsating threshold, the control angle is limited to 165°, for
currents > (pulsating threshold+P777) to P776 with linear interpolation
inbetween)
RDS parameter
1%


setting status)
Par.
5.15 Factory parameters

P785 I2t Control Word 0 to 1 - 3/ HBR
2 1 3/ B
* Control word for the i t power section
2
0 Response of the i t monitor for the power section (i.e. 100% of
2
the i t value has been reached) results in an automatic
reduction of the limit for the current setpoint to the rated DC
current until the absolute value of the current setpoint has
dropped below the rated DC current before its limit, and the
calculated equivalent junction temperature rise is again below
the unit-specific response threshold. The current setpoint limit is
then raised again.
2
1 Response of the i t monitor for the power section (i.e. 100% of
2
the i t value has been reached) results in fault F022 and
disconnection.
1
P793 Line Voltage Delay 0.01 to 1.00 - 3/ BR
[s] 0.03 3/ BR
Stabilizing time for the line voltage
If the "Switch-on" command is given, the unit waits in status o010 for
voltage to be applied to the power section. The line voltage is not assumed
to be applied to the power terminals until amplitude, frequency and phase
symmetry lie within the permissible tolerance range for longer than the time
set with this parameter. The parameter applies to both the rectifier and
regenerative power terminals.
0.01 s
P799 Special Access 0 to 65535 - 3/U BR
3/ BR
Parameter for special access
1


setting status)
Par.
5.16 Profile parameters

P917 Change Reports 0 to 7 - 3/ BR
0 3/ B
* Control word for spontaneous messages
If the value of an active parameter is changed, the new value is reported to
the programmable controller connected by means of the spontaneous
reporting mechanism. This function can be activated and de-activated for
each interface.
Important:
When the control word is modified, spontaneous message buffers can be
deleted with the loss of spontaneous messages!
0 No spontaneous messages inactive

1 Output of spontaneous messages over the DPR interface TB/CB
(TB/CB) SCom
2 Output of spontaneous messages over the BASE SERIAL SCB (USS)
interface (SST1)
4 Output of spontaneous messages over SCB with USS protocol
Setting help:
Each interface is coded with a number.
Enter the number and/or the sum of several numbers assigned to the
interfaces to enable the spontaneous message mechanism for the relevant
interface(s).
1
P918 CB Bus Address 3 to 126 - 3/ HBR
3 3/ H
Protocol depending bus address for communication board; see manual of
this board.
Notes:
The communication board checks, if the set value is valid. (The bus
addresses 0 to 2 are reserved for master stations and therefore cannot be
set). If the value is not accepted, the fault message 80 is issued with fault
value 5
Condition:
P090=1 or P091=1 (communication board installed)
1
P927 Parameter Access 0 to 31 - 3/ BR
6 3/ BR
* Release of interfaces for the parameterization.
This parameter performs the same function as P053.
Parameter P053 can always be modified.
For description, see P053.
1
P928 Src Base/Reserve 0 to 6005 - 3/ BR
1005 3/ BR
* Source of the switching command 'base / reserve settings' (control word 2,
bit 30)
This parameter performs the same function as P590.
For description, see P590.
1
PNU=3A0Hex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex


setting status)
Par.
r947 Fault Memory 64 2/ BR
Display of the faults which have occurred at the last trips. Each fault
number has a fault value and a fault time assigned to it (see Chapter 7 for
details of fault numbers and fault values). The relationship between the
responsible parameters is shown in the diagram below.
The fault numbers for the last (8 max.) faults are stored under the indices of
parameter r947. The fault number for the current (not yet reset) trip is
indicated by r947.001, the fault number for the last reset fault is indicated
by index 9, the fault number of the last-but-one reset fault is indicated by
index 17, etc. The entry "0" here means that no previous fault has occurred.
In contrast to the converter (SIMOVERT Master Drive FC, VC, SC), in the
case of the rectifier/regenerating unit only one fault can occur for each trip,
therefore the only significant indices are 1, 9, 17, 25, 33, 41, 49 and 57.
A fault value in the appropriate index of parameter r949 is assigned to
every fault number. This provides more detailed information on the type of
fault.
Apart from this, for each trip, the fault time which is the actual value of the
operating hours counter (r013) is stored in parameter r748. The data for the
current (not yet reset) trip is present as "day", "hours" and "seconds" in
indices 1 to 3. The data for the already reset, previous trips is present in
groups of 3 elements on the following indices.
r947 r949 r748

Fault number Fault value Fault time
Index 1 Current Current Curr. d Index 1
0 0 Curr. h
0 0 Curr. s
0 0 1st ack. d Index 4
0 0 1st ack. h
0 0 1st ack. s
0 0 2nd ack. d Index 7
0 0 2nd ack. h
Index 9 1st ack. 1st ack. 2nd ack. s
0 0 ... Index 10
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
Index 17 2nd ack. 2nd ack.
... ...
Plain text describing the fault numbers is available under the corresponding
index of parameter r951.
If the electronics supply voltage fails, all fault numbers are saved, but only
those fault values and fault times relating to the last trip are stored. After
the supply voltage has been restored, the other indices have the value "0".
1
r949 Fault Value 64 2/ BR
Fault values of the faults; allows a more detailed diagnosis at several faults.
The fault values are saved in the same indices as the related fault numbers
(r947) - see parameter P947.
1


setting status)
Par.
r951 Fault Texts List 116 2/ BR
List of fault texts; every fault text is saved in the index equivalent to its fault
number.
1
P952 # of Faults 0 to 8 - 2/ BR
0 2/ BR
Number of faults stored in the fault memory (max. 8).
If the parameter is set to '0', the diagnosis memory (r748 - trip times, r947 -
fault number, r949 fault value) is cleared.
1
r953 Warning Param 1 - 3/ BR
Warning Parameter 1
If a warning (numbers 1 to 16) is active, the related bar in the display is ON
16 14 12 10
15 13 11 9
8 6 4 2
7 5 3 1
For the meaning of the individual warnings, see Chapter 7.
1
PNU=3B9Hex; Type=V2;Scaling: 1Hex
Warning Parameter 2
If a warning (numbers 17 to 32) is active, the related bar in the display is
ON
32 30 28 26
31 29 27 25
24 22 20 18
23 21 19 17
1
PNU=3BAHex; Type=V2;Scaling: 1Hex
Warning Parameter 3
If a warning (numbers 33 to 48) is active, the related segment in the display
is ON
48 46 44 42
47 45 43 41
40 38 36 34
39 37 35 33
1
PNU=3BBHex; Type=V2;Scaling: 1Hex
Warning Parameter 4
is ON
64 62 60 58
63 61 59 57
56 54 52 50
55 53 51 49
1
PNU=3BCHex; Type=V2;Scaling: 1Hex


setting status)
Par.
Warning Parameter 5
is ON
80 78 76 74
79 77 75 73
72 70 68 66
71 69 67 65
1
PNU=3BDHex; Type=V2;Scaling: 1Hex
Warning Parameter 6 (CB-warnings)

is ON
96 94 92 90
95 93 91 89
88 86 84 82
87 85 83 81
1
PNU=3BEHex; Type=V2;Scaling: 1Hex
Warning Parameter 6 (TB-warnings 1)

If a warning (numbers 97 to 112) is active, the related segment in the
display is ON
112 110 108 106

111 109 107 105
104 102 100 98
103 101 99 97
1
PNU=3BFHex; Type=V2;Scaling: 1Hex
Warning Parameter 6 (TB-warnings 2)

If a warning (numbers 113 to 128) is active, the related segment in the
display is ON
128 126 124 122

127 125 123 121
120 118 116 114
119 117 115 113
1
PNU=3C0Hex; Type=V2;Scaling: 1Hex
Display parameter of control word 1 (bit 0-15)
Identical with r550 (control word 1)
1
Display parameter of status word 1 (bit 0-15)
Identical with r552 (status word 1)
1
P970 Factory Settings 0 to 1 - 3/ B
1 3/ B
* Parameter reset to factory settings
0: Parameter reset: all parameters are reset to their original values Param.Reset
(factory settings). After this the parameter is reset to '1'.
1: no parameter reset
Return
Note: This function can also be selected via P052=1.
1
PNU=3CAHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex


setting status)
Par.
P971 EEPROM Storing 0 to 1 - 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
* Passing of the parameter values of the RAM to the EEPROM on a change
from 0 auf 1.
It takes about 15s to process all of the values. During this time, the PMU
stays in the Values mode.
1
PNU=3CBHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex
r980 PNU-Lst. 1 avail 116 3/ BR
List of the available parameter numbers; part 1.

The parameter numbers are listed in a positive sequence.
The first existing '0' shows, that no more parameter numbers are available.
Index range: 1 to 116.

As special function the value of i116 is the number of the parameter which
contains the next following part of the list. If i116 has a value of '0' then
there are no more parts of the list.
1
r981 PNU-Lst. 2 avail 116 3/ BR
List of the available parameter numbers; part 2
See r980.
1
r990 PNU-Lst.1 chnged 116 3/ BR
List of the changed parameter numbers; part 1.

The parameter numbers are listed in a positive sequence.
The first existing '0' shows, that no more parameter numbers are changed.
Index range: 1 to 116.

As special function the value of i116 is the number of the parameter which
contains the next following part of the list. If i116 has a value of '0' then
there are no more parts of the list.
1
PNU=3DEHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex
r991 PNU-Lst.2 chnged 116 3/ BR
List of the changed parameter numbers; part 2
See r990.
1
PNU=3DFHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex


12.95 Operator Control
6 Operator control
The rectifier/regenerating unit can be controlled via:
the PMU (Parameterization Unit) on the CUR module
the control terminal strip on the CUR (Section 3.3 “Control terminal strip“)
the OP1 operator control panel (Section 9.4 “Options/Operator control“)
the SST1 serial interface (RS485 and RS232) on PMU-X300
the optional SST2 serial interface (RS485) for peer-to-peer coupling
Operator control using the PMU (see diagram below) is described in this section.
Seven-segment displays
Reversing key
On key
Raise key
Changeover key, operator control level

Off key Lower key
P
X300
Figure 6.1 Parameterization unit
6.1 Operator control elements
Operator control elements Function

Rectifier/regenerating unit switch on (standard).
For faults: Return to the fault display.
Rectifier/regenerating unit shutdown depending on the parameterization of
OFF1 or OFF2 (P554 to P557).
No function
1) Changeover between parameter number, index and parameter value

P levels (see Figure 6.2), whereby the command only becomes effective when
the key is released.
2) Resetting the current fault message (see Figure 6.3)
3) In conjunction with the arrow keys <raise> and <lower>, additional
functions are possible (refer to Figs. 6.2 and 6.3), whereby is pressed
first followed by the other key. This command becomes effective once the
other key has been pressed.
Changing the parameter number when the parameter number level is
, displayed, changing the index when the index level is displayed, or the
parameter value when the parameter value level is displayed.
Table 6.1 Function of the operator control elements on the PMU

Operator Control 12.95
6.2 Displays
Tables 6.2 and 6.3 below give an overview of the displays that can be shown on the PMU:
Parameter number Index Parameter value

e.g. e.g. e.g.
Basic converter
Visualization
parameters Technology board
Basic converter
Setting
parameters Technology board
Table 6.2 Displaying visualization and setting parameters on the PMU
Actual value Parameter value Alarm Fault

not (yet)
possible
Display
Table 6.3 Status display on the PMU
NOTE
The parameters are described in Chapter 5 and the fault and alarm messages are described in Chapter 7.
Once the electronics supply voltage has been switched on, either the PMU operating display shows the current
operating state of the rectifier/regenerating unit (e.g. o009) or a fault or alarm message is displayed (e.g. F060).
The operating states are described in Section 5.1 and the fault and alarm messages are described in Sections
7.1 and 7.2.
As described in Section 6.3 (Figures 6.2 and 6.3), it is possible to change over from one display level to another.
By pressing , it is possible to change from the status display (e.g. o009) to the parameter number level in
which the separate parameters can be selected via <raise> or <lower>. The selected access level (P051) and
the operating state (r000, r001) determine here which parameters are displayed. All parameters are not always
visible (see Chapter 5/overview of the abbreviations/footnotes 5 to 8)!
Pressing again switches to the index level for indexed parameters (see Section 4.1.2) but directly to the
parameter value level for all other parameters and the index or the value can be modified via <raise> and
<lower>. The same conditions apply for changing a parameter value as were described for the parameter
number, i.e. a parameter value can only be modified under an appropriate access level and an appropriate
operating state.
If the 4 characters of the seven-segment display are insufficient for displaying a parameter value, only 4 figures
will be displayed initially (see Figure 6.4). The presence of further figures to the right or left of this "window" is
indicated by flashing of the left-hand or right-hand figure. If +<lower> or +<raise> are pressed
simultaneously, this "window" can be moved to view the parameter value.
By pressing again, it is possible to switch back to the parameter number level..

12.95 Operator Control
6.3 Structure
Ready-to-switch-on
Operating display
P
Parameter number level
P P
Fast changeover P P P Fast changeover
+ +
+ + +
P P P
Parameter no
indexed
yes
Index level
Highest
index
P P P
Parameter value level

Highest
value
P P P
Return to parameter
Figure 6.2 Operator control structure using the PMU

Operator Control 12.95
After
delay
time
Fault Display before Alarm
fault/alarm
P P P P Alarm P Alarm P
+ + cause or cause or
Fault Fault removed removed
acknowledged acknowledged
with a fault or or
Fault Fault
not
condition
not
acknowledged acknowledged
Figure 6.3 Operator control structure of the PMU for alarms and faults
Handling of fault and alarm messages (reset, move into the "background" in order to parameterize) is described
in Chapter 7 in detail.
P
+
P
+
Figure 6.4 Shifting the PMU display for parameters

values with more than 4 digits

12.95 Fault and Alarm Messages
7 Fault and Alarm Messages

When a fault or alarm is generated, it is displayed immediately on the PMU as well as on the optional OP1 (see
Section 6.3, Figure 6.3). An alarm disappears automatically from the display when the problem has been
corrected. A fault message must be reset by pressing the P key on the PMU or the reset key on the OP1 after
the problem has been corrected, before it is possible to return to a normal operating state.
NOTE
A current fault message or alarm can be "moved into the background" by pressing the P + keys on the PMU
simultaneously, in order to parameterize or to read the fault value via r949.001. Via the optional operator panel
OP1, in spite of an active fault message or alarm it is still possible to parameterize. If no key is pressed on the
PMU for 30 s, the fault message which was moved into the background or active alarm appears automatically
on the PMU. The message can be brought back into the foreground by simultaneously pressing the P + keys
on the PMU at the parameter number level..
7.1 Fault messages
General information on faults
The following information is available for each fault:
Parameter r947 Fault number

r949 Fault value
r951 Fault text list
P952 Number of faults
r748 Time of fault
For detailed information on the organization of the fault memory, see r947 in Section 5.16.
If a fault message is not acknowledged before the electronics power supply is switched off, this fault message
will appear again the next time the power supply is switched on. The unit will not start up unless this message is
acknowledged (except if auto restart has been selected; see under P366 and Section 4.3.10.1).

Fault and Alarm Messages 12.95
Fault Fault description Fault Meaning Possible causes

No. value Countermeasures
F001 Feedb Cont. - - - Check P591 Q.HS checkback
signal.
No checkback signal from main contactor
The parameter value must match
the main contactor checkback
If a main contactor checkback signal is
signal connection
configured and is not received within 500
- Check the main contactor
ms after the power-up command.
checkback signal circuit.
F003 Line Over V - - - Line overvoltage
- P071 set to wrong value
Line overvoltage
Voltage at terminals X1-U1/L1, or X1-

W1/L3 and/or X4-1U2/1T1, X4-1V2/1T2 or
X4-1W2/1T3 greater than the response
threshold (120% of P071).
F004 Line Under V - - - Line undervoltage
- Monitoring too finely or wrongly
Line undervoltage
set (P074, P071)
Voltage at terminals X1-U1/L1, or X1-
W1/L3 and/or X4-1U2/1T1, X4-1V2/1T2 or
X4-1W2/1T3 lower than the response
threshold (P074 and P071).
F005 Line Frequ. 1 Frequency of the regenerative -Line frequency < 45Hz or > 65Hz
bridge
Line frequency outside permissible range
2 < 45Hz
Frequency of the rectifier bridge
This fault message is generated if the line
3 < 45Hz
frequency is lower than 45 Hz or higher
Frequency of the regenerative
than 65Hz.
4 bridge
> 65Hz
Frequency of the rectifier bridge
> 65Hz
F006 Bus Over V - - -
DC link voltage
The unit was shutdown due to an

excessive DC link voltage.
Line voltage- Shutdown threshold

range
380 V to 460 V 835 V
500 V to 575 V 1042 V
660 V to 690 V 1244 V
F007 AuxPowerOFF 1, 2, 3 Electronics supply voltage of the - Check electronics power supply
rectifier/regenerating unit too low - Power supply fuse for parallel
Failure or overvoltage of the electronics
units blown
supply voltage in "Run" status
- Internal fault on the power
or Power interface module of the
interface module of a slave unit
at least one power section connected in 5 rectifier/regenerating unit or
parallel reports "Power supply faulted" parallel power section reports
"Power supply faulted"
F009 Rec PhaseFlt 1 Voltage failure in the rectifier - Parameter P074 wrongly set
bridge (X1-U1/L1, X1-V1/L2 or X1- - Phase failure in the rectifier
Phase failure in the rectifier bridge
W1/L3) bridge
2 - Line contactor dropped out in
The rms line voltage calculated from the
Waiting time in status o010 operation
area of each line voltage half-wave
elapsed - Fuse blown on three-phase side
(average rectification value x peak value)
of rectifier bridge
must be greater than the response value
for phase-failure monitoring
The interval between two identical line
voltage zeros of the voltage for the
rectifier converter must not be greater
than 450 deg.


F010 Inv PhaseFlt 1 Voltage failure in the regenerative - Parameter P074 wrongly set
bridge (X4-1U2/1T1, X4-1V2/1T2 - Phase failure in the rectifier
Phase failure in regenerative bridge
or X4-1W2/1T3) bridge
Waiting time in status o010 - Line contactor dropped out in
The rms line voltage calculated from the
2 elapsed operation
area of each line voltage half-wave
- Fuse blown on three-phase side
(average rectification value x peak value)
of rectifier bridge
must be greater than the response value
for phase-failure monitoring
The interval between two identical line
voltage zeros of the voltage for the
regenerating converter must not be
greater than 450 deg..
F022 I2t Overload - - - Drive operated too long under
2
overload conditions
I t monitor of the power section has
- Check to see whether the rated
responded
current of the R/G unit is
adequate for the specific
The monitor responds when 100 % of the
application
calculated I2t value of the power section is
reached.
F023 Temp Overl. 1 Heat sink temperature > 95 C - Heat sink (air inlets and outlets)
contaminated
Temperature of the power section too high
- Heat sink temperature sensor not
connected to X31, X32 on A1681
A check is made to see whether the heat
and/or A1682 module ("slave
sink temperature measured using
unit")
thermistor(s) is > 95 C
- Fan has no voltage
- Fan faulted
- Fan running in the wrong
direction
- Fan fuse (F3, F4) defective
NOTE:
- Measure inlet air ambient
temperature. If > 40 ºC, note
reduction curves. See Section
14.1.
Temperature of the power section too low 2 Heat sink temperature -45 C - Heat sink temperature sensor not
connected to X30 module on
A1681 and/or A1682
F029 Measure Flt 1 Channel V-U faulted - Fault in the voltage path on the
2 Channel V-W faulted power interface module (A1681
Fault in line voltage measurement
3 Channel W-U faulted and/or A1682 and/or A1685) or
on the electronic module (CUR)
An offset > 5% has been detected when
attempting to compensate for the offset of
the line voltage measurement
F030 DC Bus Short - - - Short-circuit in the DC link
DC link short-circuit
The monitor responds if the following

conditions obtain for longer than 0.5 sec:
- The current limit of the
rectifier/regenerating unit is reached
(this condition does not apply during
circuit identification or during DC link
forming)
- The rectifier or regenerative current is
greater than 10% of the rated DC
current (P075)
- The DC link voltage is less than 5% of
1.35*P071
F031 Fuse Blown - - - Thyristor branch fuse faulted
Fuse blown in a thyristor branch of the
rectifier/regenerating unit or of a parallel
power section.


F032 Phase Sequ.? - - - Phase sequence of the rectifier
bridge different from that of the
Wrong phase sequence
regenerative bridge
A check is make to see whether the phase
sequence of the rectifier bridge is the
same as that of the regenerative bridge.
F033 DC Bus Open - - - Rectifier fuse defective
- No inverter connected
The monitor responds if the following
conditions obtain for longer than 30sec in
the "RUN“ status:
- DC link current <1%
- Output voltage of the thyristor bridge
oscillates severely
F034 Par PwrSectF 1 Current asymmetry (overcurrent or - One of the thyristors is not firing
undercurrent in the parallel power - Different current ripple in the
Fault in power sections connected in
section compared with the current rectifier/regenerating unit and
parallel
in the rectifier/regenerating unit) parallel power section due to
different commutating reactors
At least one parallel power section is
- Cable connection between the
connected, has been selected with
rectifier/regenerating unit and a
parameter P076 and reports the fault
parallel power section is
message "Current asymmetry between
interrupted or faulted
rectifier/regenerating unit and parallel
power section".
F035 Ext Fault 1 - - - There is an "External fault 1"
signal at the selected binary input
External fault 1
(P575/source for "Ext. fault 1")
- The line to the corresponding
A parameter-programmable fault input has
binary input is interrupted.
become active.
External fault 2
Active in the "RUN“ when the pre-charging
binary input is interrupted..
time (P329) + 3s (200 ms for SW<3.0) has
elapsed.

been activated.
External fault 3
binary input is interrupted..
been activated.
F041 EEprom-Fault 1 "Parameter value outside the - Software has been replaced
permissible range". - Excessive interference (e.g. by
Parameter range fault
contactors without RC elements,
unshielded cables, faulty
Software monitoring of the permissible
shielding connections ...)
value range of the parameters and the
- Countermeasures:
functionality of the EEPROM chip
Acknowledge the fault
(permanent memory) on electronic module
Check EMC measures
CUR (type: X28C64, 8192 bytes)
Set MLFB (Section 4.3.9.2)
Establish factory setting (Section
4.3.9.1)
Repeat system start-up (Section
4.2.3)
2 "EEPROM location defective" - Hardware defect
- Severe EMC noise
- Countermeasures:
Replace the CUR module
Check EMC measures.
3 "EEPROM fault" - As for 1


F042 Buffer OFlow - - - CUR module faulted
- Excessive interference (e.g. by
Internal buffer overflow
Software monitoring of various software
buffers.
F047 Int Fault - - - CUR module faulted
Non-permissible microprocessor status
The microprocessor is monitored by
internal hardware for non-permissible
states
F048 RAM Fault - - - RAM defective (replace the CUR
module)
RAM defective
Software-based checking of the

functionality of the RAM chips on the CUR
module
F049 Watchdog! - - - CUR module defective
Watchdog timer has triggered a Reset
An internal hardware counter in the
shielding connections)
microprocessor checks to see whether the
program for calculating the firing pulses is
executed at least about every 400 ms (on
average, it is executed every 2.7 to 3.3
ms). If this is not the case, the counter
triggers a Reset. F047 then appears.
F060 No MLFB - - - After acknowledging in
BOOTSTRAP, enter a suitable
P070=0
parameter value for the unit with
P070 MLFB (6SEE70..) (only
possible with the corresponding
access stages of the two access
parameters; see Section 4.3.9.2).


F061 WrongPar Set 3 P141 (Rectifier Induct.), P143 - Carry out circuit identification
(Inverter Induct.) or P144 (C of DC (P052 = 21)
Parameter wrong or not yet set
link) are = 0.00
4 P318 is too large (with Ud As the inverter step limit P776 with
reduction selected) or P776 is set respect to the commutation
too small to facilitate constant duration (depending on uK value of
regenerative operation with the network) has an upper limit,
continuous DC link current for the P318 has to be set lower, or Ud
current ratio of reduction has to be activated via
rectifier/regenerating supply P571if it is not currently active.
voltage. The following must apply:
USupply, reg.
P318 ≤ 100% cosP776
USupply, rect.
or.
if operating without Ud reduction:
USupply, reg.
100% ≤ 100% cosP776
USupply, rect.
5 P318 is too large (with Ud P318 has to be set lower, or Ud
reduction selected) to facilitate reduction has to be activated via
constant regenerative operation P571if it is not currently active.
with pulsating DC link current for The following must apply:
the current ratio of Usupply, regenerating
rectifier/regenerating supply P318 ≤ 87 ,62%
voltage. USupply, rectifier
or
if operating without Ud reduction:
USupply, regenerating
100% ≤ 87 ,62%
USupply, rectifier
Autotransformer connected incorrectly 6 USupply, regenerating 1

<
USupply, rectifier 1,1
F065 SST1 Telegr. - - - Cable break
- Fault in the USS master
USS telegram to SST1 failed
Active from the first reception of a valid

protocol in all operating states
Following receipt of a valid telegram, no

further telegrams were received for longer
than the time set with parameter
P687.i001
F066 SST2 Telegr. - - - Cable break
Peer-to-peer telegram to SST1 failed
Following receipt of a valid telegram, no

further telegrams were received for longer
than the time set with parameter
P687.i003
F070 SCB Initial 1 SCB not plugged in or SCB module - Plug in the SCB
code wrong - Check the SCB and/or replace it
SCB initialization error
2 SCB not compatible - Correct the initialization data
5 Wrong initialization data
An error has occurred when initializing the
6 Timeout when initializing
SCB.
10 Error in the configuration channel
F072 SCB Heartb. - - - Replace the SCB
- Check the connection between
SCB heartbeat
the module rack and the option
module
SCB no longer processes the heartbeat
counter.
F073 Sl1 AnaIn1 - - - Check the connection between
the signal source and the SCI1-
Current at analog input 1, slave 1, under 4
module (slave 1) -X428:4, 5
mA


mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
F079 SCB Telegr. - - - Check connection to the SCB
SCB telegram failure
Following a correctly received telegram,

no further telegram has been received
within the time set with parameter
P687.i002.
F080 TB/CB Init. 1 TB/CB not plugged in - Contact problem in connection
2 TB/CB not compatible between module rack and TB
An error has occurred when initializing the
5 Error in initializing data and/or CB
module at the DPR interface.
6 Timeout when initializing - Slot does not agree with
7 TB/TC module code wrong assignment (P090, P091)
- Wrong module code r723
- Wrong module compatibility r724
F081 TB/CB Heartb - - - Contact problem in connection
between module rack and TB
TB/CB heartbeat error
and/or CB
- Hardware fault (replace TB
TB or CB has stopped processing the
and/or CB)
heartbeat counter.
F082 TB/CB Telegr 1 CB alarm channel faulty -
2 TB alarm channel faulty
TB/CB telegram failure
3 TB error channel faulty
4 CB task channel (CB CUR)
The exchange of data has been
5 faulty
CB answer channel (CUR CB)
interrupted.
6 faulty
P695 defines the telegram failure time
7 Internal error
8 TB task channel (TB CUR) faulty
TB answer channel (CUR TB)
9 faulty
10 Internal error
11 CB/TB Telegram failure
PMU task channel (CUR TB)
12 faulty
PMU answer channel (TB CUR)
21 faulty
22 CB/TB setpoint channel faulty
CB/TB actual value channel faulty
F090 Circuit ID F 1 If generating mode is inhibited - Set P076 = x2
(P076 = x1), circuit identification is
Circuit identification not possible
not possible!
2 If = 30°, not enough rectifier - Connection to DC link interrupted
current flows (less than 25% of the
rated DC current with
P160=150.0% or less than 10%
with P160=60.0%)
3 P141 (Rectifier Induct.) and/or - Commutating inductance too low
P143 (Inverter Induct.) and/or P144 (see Section 3.1)
(C for DC link) could not be - Connection to DC link interrupted
identified


4 A waiting time of 20s has already - Another unit is supplying the DC
elapsed but the circuit identification link
cannot be carried out because the - Wait until the DC link has
DC link voltage is too high discharged sufficiently, then start
(Ud>20% of 1.35*P071) circuit identification again
F091 Circuit ID C 1 The abort took place because the -
RUN or "R" status was exited for
Circuit identification or forming aborted
some reason (e.g. brief power
due to external cause.
outage) during forming or circuit
identification.
If circuit identification is aborted, only
2 The abort took place because the
those parameters are modified whose
reserve data set selection changed
assignment was completed before this
during forming or circuit
fault occurred.
identification.
OFF command was given.
4 The abort took place because an
ON command was not given within
20 sec after selecting the forming
function (P052=20) or the circuit
identification function (P052=21)
"Inhibit regenerating" command
was given during circuit
identification (see control word 1,
bit 12 and P572)


F103 Thy/Grnd Flt 1 Short-circuit of thyristor V11 or V24 - Thyristor defective
- Thyristor externally shorted
Fault when conducting the
2 Short-circuit of thyristor V12 or V25 (e.g. by ground fault in grounded
thyristor/ground-fault test
system and ground fault in the
3 Short-circuit of thyristor V13 or V26 motor)
This fault message can only occur if the
- Connection to DC link interrupted
thyristor/ground-fault test is activated with
4 Short-circuit of thyristor V14 or V21 (e.g. fuse blown)
parameters P353 / P354.
A software check is made to see whether
5 Short-circuit of thyristor V15 or V22 Possible reasons for the thyristor
all thyristors have blocking capability,
being defective:
whether they can be fired, and whether
6 Short-circuit of thyristor V16 or V23 - Interruption in the RC circuit
there is a ground fault
- Converter and compensation
Identification of the firing lines and the
control not optimized (excessive
associated thyristors should always be
current peaks)
made with the aid of the relevant wiring
- Cooling not guaranteed (e.g. fan
diagram (see Section 3-5 "Power
not running, ambient temperature
terminals").
too high, to little air intake, heat
sink severely contaminated)
- Excessive voltage peaks in
supply system
8 Ground fault in DC link or in motor / - Ground fault
rectifier fuse defective - Connection to DC link interrupted
(e.g. fuse blown)
9 I = 0 - Message defective - CUR module defect
11 Thyristor cannot be fired (X11) - Firing pulse line to relevant

12 Thyristor cannot be fired (X12) thyristor interrupted
13 Thyristor cannot be fired (X13) - Ribbon cable X109 not correctly
14 Thyristor cannot be fired (X14) plugged in or interrupted (and
15 Thyristor cannot be fired (X15) ribbon cable X27 in the case of
16 Thyristor cannot be fired (X16) power section connected in
parallel)
- Defect in electronics and/or
power interface module
- internal interruption on the gate
line in the thyristor module
17 2 or more thyristors of the rectifier - Connection to DC link interrupted
bridge cannot be fired (e.g. fuse blown)
- As under 11 to 16
21 Thyristor cannot be fired (X21) - As under 11 to 16
22 Thyristor cannot be fired (X22)
27 2 or more thyristors of the - Parameter P076 wrong
regenerative bridge cannot be fired - As under 11 to 16
31 Thyristor cannot block - As under 1 to 6
(gate X11 or X21)
32 Thyristor cannot block
(gate X12 or X22)
(gate X13 or X23)
(gate X14 or X24)
(gate X15 or X25)
(gate X16 or X26)
F116 Fault on the intelligent I/O module - - -
to
F150 See User's Manual of the TB module

7.2 Alarm messages
The warning message appears periodically as A=Alarm/Warning and a three-digit in the display of the PMU A
warning cannot be acknowledged. It extinguishes automatically when the cause of the warning is eliminated.
Several messages may occur at the same time, in which case they appear one after the other in the display
If the rectifier/regenerating unit is operated with the OP1 operator panel, the warning appears in the bottom line
of the display. The red LED starts blinking first (see the operating instructions for the OP1)
Alarm Parameter Description Countermeasures

No. No.

Bit No.
A015 P953 ext.Warn 1 External warning arrived! Check whether the line to the
Parameter-programmable external warning input 1 relevant binary input is interrupted.
has been activated Check parameter P588 Src No Ext Warn 1.
14 See also Section 4.3.2.
A016 P953 ext. Warn 2 External warning arrived! Check whether the line to the
Parameter-programmable external warning input 1 relevant binary input is interrupted.
has been activated Check parameter P589 Src No Ext Warn 2.
15 See also Section 4.3.2.
A022 P954 Heatsk Temp Check r011 Heat sink temperature.
The heat sink temperature is > 90 ºC Measure inlet air and/or ambient temperature. If >
5 40°C, note the reduction curves. See Section 14.1.
Check
- whether fan -E1(-E2) is connected and rotating in the
right direction.
- whether the air inlet and outlet openings are clean and
clear.
- the connection of the temperature sensor to -X30 (-
X31, -X32).
A025 P954 I2t Warning Check whether the rated DC current of the
2
rectifier/regenerating unit is adequate for the specific
The I t value of the power section is too high. The
application.
8 warning is triggered when 90% of the permissible
I2t value is reached. See also under fault F022 and
parameter P785. The permissible I2t value is
reached at the maximum permissible load cycle
(see Section 14, Figure 14.1)

Alarm Parameter Description Countermeasures

No. No.

Bit No.
A049 P956 no Slave P660 SCI AnalogInConf
In the case of serial I/O (SCB1 with SCI1/2), no Check the slave.
0 slave is connected and/or the fiber optic conductor Check the cable.
is interrupted or the slaves have no voltage.
A050 P956 Slave not ok Check P660 SCI AnalogInConf
In the case of serial I/O, the slaves required
1 according to the parameter settings are not
available (slave number an/or slave type).
A051 P956 Peer Bdrate Match the baud rates of the SCB modules connected to
In a peer-to-peer connection, the baud rate each (P684 SST/SCB Baudrate)
2 selected is too high and/pr different
A052 P956 Peer PrD-L Reduce the number of words

In a peer-to-peer connection, an excessive P686 SCom/SCB # PrDat.
3 process data length has been set (>5).
A053 P956 Peer Lng f.

In a peer-to-peer connection, the process data Match the word lengths of the sender and receiver
4 length of the sender and receiver do not agree P686 SCom/SCB # PrDat
A065 P957 Auto Restart Important

The line voltage is outside the tolerance band at An auto restart may constitute a danger for persons and
0 the moment (e.g. power outage). The firing pulses property. Make sure you really want to have auto restart
are therefore inhibited. On power recovery, (WEA).
however, the WEA option (P366) implements an If necessary, change P366 WEA.
auto restart.
A081.. r958 CB Warning 1...16
A096 See user's manual for the CB module
0...15
A097.. r959 TB Warning 1 16
A112 See user's manual for the TB module
0...15
A113.. r960 TB Warning 17...32
A128 See user's manual for the TB module
0...15


12.95 Maintenance
8 Maintenance
WARNING
The rectifier/regenerating units are operated with high voltages.
All work on the unit must be carried out in agreement with the national electrical regulations
(in Germany: VBG 4).
Maintenance and repair work must only be carried out by qualified personnel.
Use must only be made of the spare parts approved by the manufacturer.
It is imperative to observe the prescribed maintenance intervals and the repair and
replacement instructions.
As the result of the dc link capacitors in the connected SIMOVERT Master Drives, the unit
still contains a hazardous voltage up to 5 min. after isolation (power terminal and electronic
power supply). This is why it is only permitted to open the unit after observing an
appropriate waiting time.
The power and control terminals may still be live even in the event of motor standstill.
Despite disconnecting the power terminals from the supply, terminal X19 may still be live
due to the external fan supply.
If work on the activated unit is necessary:
do not touch any live parts.
use only proper measuring equipment and protective work clothing.
stand or sit on an unearthed and isolated surface that does justice to ESD requirements.
You should know the order and factory numbers of your unit when consulting the service department. You will
find these numbers and other important data on the rating plate of the unit.
8.1 Maintenance recommendations

The fans are designed for a service life of 35,000 hours (Size C) and 40,000 hours (Size E, H and K) at an
ambient temperature of TA = 40 °C. To guarantee the availability of the unit at all times, the fans must be
replaced in good time.

Maintenance 12.95
8.2 Replacing components

8.2.1 Replacing the fan
WARNING
The fan must only be replaced by qualified personnel.
As the result of the dc link capacitors in the connected SIMOVERT Master
Drives, the unit still contains a hazardous voltage up to 5 min. after isolation.
Size C
X20
The fan is located on the underside of the unit
Undo both M4 x 49 Torx screws

Remove the protective grille M4 x 49
Torx T20
Pull the fan down and extract the connector
X20
Install a new fan in reverse order
Before commissioning the unit, check that the
fan does not rub and also check the air flow Fan E1
direction (arrow pointing upward). The air Protective grille
must be discharged from the unit in the
M4 x 49 / Torx T20
upward direction.
Figure 8.1 Protective grille and fan (24 V) for size C
Size E
X29
The fan is located on the right underside of the unit.
Undo the M4 x 8/T20 Torx screw securing the fan

Extract the plug-in terminal X29 M4 x 8
Undo the M4 x 8/T20 Torx screw for earth connection Torx T20
Pull the fan out of the unit towards the front left
Install a new fan in reverse order
Before commissioning the unit, check that the fan does not
rub and also check the air flow direction. The air must be
discharged from the unit in the upward direction.
Fan E1
Figure 8.2 Fan (AC 230V) for size E

12.95 Maintenance
Size H
M8 M8
The fan is located in the fan box on the top of the unit.
Unplug X20.
Fan E1
Undo both M8 (SW 13) fixing screws. X20
Loosen the two M4 fixing screws and swing the plastic
cover out sideways..
Pull the fan box out of the unit forwards as far as the
M4
stop.
Then lift it up over the stop (at the back) and remove it
completely from the unit. Figure 8.3 Fan (AC 230V) for size H
Installation is carried out in reverse order.

Important!
The two M8 fixing screws are used to earth the fan box,
so they must be screwed down firmly.
Size K
M8
The two fans are located in the fan box on the top of the
unit.
Unplug X20.
Undo both M8 (SW 13) fixing screws. Fan E1 Fan E2
Pull the fan box out of the unit forwards.
Installation is carried out in reverse order.
X20
Figure 8.4 Fan (AC 230V) for size K
WARNING
The fan box weighs approx. 16 kg for size H, and approx. 32 kg for size K. This must be
taken into account when removing the fan box.
Non-observance of warning notices can result in severe personal injury or considerable
property damage.

Maintenance 12.95
8.2.2 Replacing modules
WARNING
Modules must only be replaced by qualified persons.
Modules must not be removed or inserted under a live voltage.
CAUTION
The modules contain electrostatically sensitive devices. You must discharge your own body
before touching an electronic module. This is best done by touching a conductive earthed
object (e.g. a bare metal part of the control cabinet) directly beforehand.
Replacing modules in the electronics box

(option)
Undo the securing screws of the modules S lo t 1 (C U R )

above and below the insertion /removal aids S lo t 3 (O p tio n s )
By means of the insertion /removal aids, S lo t 2 (O p tio n s )
carefully pull the module out of the
electronics box, making sure that the module
does not get stuck
Carefully insert the new module in the guide
rails until it moves no further in the
electronics box
Firmly screw down the module with the
securing screws above and below the
insertion / removal aids.
Figure 8.5 Electronics box, equipped with CUR (slot 1)

and options (slots 2 and 3)

12.95 Maintenance
Assigning the "Start-up" parameters for the CUR option module (A10)
For general information see Chapter 4
F060
P and Higher key Switch over from fault display to parameterization
P051 = 3 Access stage "Expert mode“
P052 = 2 MLFB setting (initialization)
P070 = WARNING
Initialization is mandatory.
Specify the ID number of the MLFB in P070 of the
rectifier/regenerating unit (rating plate on the unit) as per
MLFB table Section 4.3.9.2.
P052 = 0 Return from setting MLFB
P and Lower key Change back to fault display and acknowledge F060
P-key
See Section
4.2.2 or 4.2.3
WARNING
Replacing firing-circuit module A23
Carry out circuit identification after replacing the A23 (see Chapter 4).
Sizes H and K
The earth connection must be restored by tightening the screws marked with an earthing
sign on the electronics box (size H) or on the electronics slide-in unit (size K).
Replacing the PMU for size C

Rear side of

the front cover
Release the snaps on the front cover
Open-up the front cover
Withdraw connector X108 on the CUR

Snap catch
Carefully depress the latch upwards on the
inner side of the front cover using a PMU
screwdriver
Remove the PMU board
Install the new PMU board in the inverse
sequence. Figure 8.6 Rear side of the front cover with PMU board

Maintenance 12.95
Replacing the EPROM on the CUR module (upgrading to a new software version)
On setup and during servicing work, the current parameter settings in the logbook in Chapter 12 should be
saved For information on reading out the parameters changed from the factory settings easily, see Section
4.3.9.3 (saving the parameter values using SIMOVIS) and Section 4.3.9.8 (displaying modified parameters). It
should be checked that these entries are up-to-date before the EPROM is replaced because when the
electronics supply voltage is switched on again, the function "generate factory settings" is carried out
automatically (see Section 4.3.9.1). Then only the values of parameters P070 and P077 are retained.
WARNING
The EPROM must only be replaced by qualified persons. The EPROM must
not be removed or inserted under a live voltage.
Non-observance of warning notices can result in death, severe personal injury
or considerable property damage.
The EPROM is located in slot D14 of module CUR.
CAUTION
The modules contain electrostatically sensitive devices. You must discharge your own
body before touching an electronic module. This is best done by touching a conductive
earthed object (e.g. a bare metal part of the control cabinet) directly beforehand.
Procedure for replacing EPROMs:
Switch off electronics supply voltage

Undo fixing screws for module CUR above and below the insertion/removal aids.
Remove the module from the electronics box carefully with the help of the insertion/removal aids.
Remove old EPROM carefully from the socket and replace it with a new EPROM. It is important to ensure
that the EPROM is mounted the right way round (pin 1 aligned correctly) and that pins are not bent.
Slide module into the electronics box carefully in the guide rails as far as the stop.
Screw the module into place again using the fixing screws.
After switching the electronics supply voltage on again, wait until the function "generate factory setting" is
complete. Then restore the parameter values in accordance with the logbook or reload the values saved
using SIMOVIS into the unit.
If the parameters are restored in accordance with the logbook, circuit identification (see Section 4.3.9.7) must
be carried out (due to special parameter P772).
8.2.3 Replacing thyristor modules
The thyristor modules are secured with self-tapping screws. When replacing the thyristor modules, it is
imperative to use original-length screws with locking elements to secure them.
Also use original-length screws when screwing the thyristor modules to the busbars.

12.95 Maintenance
8.2.4 Replacing thyristor blocks

8.2.4.1 Disassembling the thyristor blocks for size H
8 8 13
2
13 8
7 7 7 7 12
G G G G G G G
K K K K K K K
12 7
5
Level B Level A
4
14 11 3
9 9 9
9
G G G
G 12
K
12 K
12 K
12 10 K
10
13 8
2
13 8 13 8 13 8
Front thyristor block, level A (weight of a thyristor block, approx. 9.5 kg)
Swing out the two doors by removing two M4 slit Torx screws in each case.
Detach cable from the modules and the screen fixture.
Remove 2 M6 hexagon-head bolts and swing out electronics box as far as the stop.
Only on disassembling the central thyristor block, open 4 twisted cables and detach cable for the two
thermistors that are only located on the central thyristor block.
Unplug the gate and cathode cables (G, K) .
Remove 3 M8 hexagon-head bolts
Loosen the two M8 hexagon-head screws , push rail approx. 150 mm upwards and swing the thyristor
block out forwards.
Loosen M6 nut 11 and pull the thyristor block out upwards at an angle.
Rear thyristor block, level B (weight of a thyristor block, approx. 9.5 kg)
Unplug the gate and cathode cables(G, K) 12.
Remove 3 M8 hexagon-head bolts 13.

Maintenance 12.95
The thyristor blocks are installed in the reverse order.

12.95 Maintenance
8.2.4.2 Disassembling the thyristor blocks for size K
3
10
10
Level B Level A
GK GK GK GK GK GK 12 8
8 15
15
9
9 3
16 11
5
5
5
13 7
4 6 13 4
14 6
7
14 7 5
Front thyristor block, level A (weight of a thyristor block, approx. 25 kg)

Remove the 3 covers by removing 7 M4 hexagon-head bolts and 3 M4 nuts .
Remove the copper plate by removing 6 M10 hexagon-head bolts .
Remove the copper plate by removing 4 M10 hexagon-head bolts .
Unplug the gate and cathode cables
(G, K).
Only on disassembling the central thyristor block, remove the two thermistors that are only located on the
central thyristor block by removing the screws (Torx drive T25).
Loosen the two M10 hexagon-head screws and swing the thyristor block out forwards.
Rear thyristor block, level B (weight of a thyristor block, approx. 25 kg)
Unplug gate and cathode cables (G, K) 12.
Remove 2 M10 hexagon-head screws 13.
Loosen M10 nut 16, swing the thyristor block out forwards and pull the thyristor block out upwards at an
angle.
The thyristor blocks are installed in the reverse order.

12.95 Options
9 Options
9.1 Options which can be integrated into the electronics box

One or two option boards, listed in Table 9.1, can be inserted in the electronics box using the LBA option (local
bus adapter).
The options are supplied with the option description.
Desig- Description Order No.

nation
LBA Local bus adapter for the electronics box. This is Board 6SE7090-0XX84-4HA0
required for installing T100, T300, CB1, TSY, SCB1 and description 6SE7080-0CX84-4HA0
SCB2
T100 Technology board Board 6SE7090-0XX87-0BB0
description 6SE7080-0CX87-0BB0
T300 Technology board for controlling technological Board 6SE7090-0XX84-0AH0
processes description 6SE7080-0CX84-0AH0
SCB1 Serial communications board with fiber-optic cable for Board 6SE7090-0XX84-0BC0
serial I/O system and peer-to-peer connection description 6SE7080-0CX84-0BC0
SCB2 Serial communications board for peer-to-peer Board 6SE7090-0XX84-0BD0
connection and USS protocol via RS485 description 6SE7080-0CX84-0BD0
Use of the serial interface with USS protocol Application 6SE7087-6CX87-4KB0
description
CB1 Communications board with interface for SINEC L2- Board 6SE7090-0XX84-0AK0
DP, (Profibus) description 6SE7087-0CX84-0AK0
Use of the PROFIBUS DP interface Application 6SE7087-6CX87-0AK0
description
Table 9.1 Option boards and bus adapter
Slots in the electronics box Boards

Left Slot 1 (CUR) CUR
Center Slot 3 (options) CB1 / SCB1 / SCB2
Right Slots 2 (options) CB1 / SCB1 / SCB2 / T100 / T300
NOTE
Only one of each option board type may inserted in the electronics box.
TB (technology boards, e.g. T300) must always be inserted at slot 2.
If only one option board is used it must always be inserted at slot 2.
Table 9.2 Slots in the electronics box

Options 12.95
Current input of DC 24V power supply: Boards Current drain (mA)

24V DC supply
The figures are required in addition to the 1A
consumed by the basic unit. CB1 190
SCB1 50
SCB2 150
T100 550
T300 without tacho 620
Table 9.3 Current drain of the option boards
9.2 Interface boards

The boards, listed in the following table must be externally mounted and wired-up on the external system side.
Desig- Description Order No.

nation
SCI1 Serial I/O board (only in conjunction with SCB1). Board 6SE7090-0XX84-3EA0
Analog and binary input and outputs for coupling to the description 6SE7080-0CX84-0BC0
SCB1 via fiber-optic cable
SCI2 Serial I/O board (only in conjunction with SCB1) Board 6SE7090-0XX84-3EF0
Binary inputs and outputs for coupling to the SCB1 via description 6SE7080-0CX84-0BC0
fiber-optic cable.
Table 9.4 Interface boards
9.3 Power Supply

A SITOP power supply as described in Catalog KT10 is recommended for the rectifier/regenerating unit
(connector X9).

12.95 Options
9.4 Operator control
Option Description
OP1 User-friendly operator control panel with plain text
display
Order No.: 6SE7090-0XX84-2FF0
Fault
Table 9.5 Operator control options Run
The optional user-friendly operator panel OP1 is connected to I
the SST1 serial interface of the basic unit.

O P
The following parameters influence the function of the OP1 or
the interface SST1:
Jog 7 8 9
P050, P051, P053, P054, P683 to P687
For further information, see the OP1 manual. 4 5 6
1 2 3
0 +/- Reset
Figure 9.1 OP1
9.5 Mechanical design
Option Description
Busbar option Size E For interconnecting the rectifier and regenerative bridges in operation without
autotransformer
(see Chapter 2, Figure 2.6)
Front door, bottom and Increases degree of protection to IP20
cover plates, and PC
covers for Size E
EMC screened housing For screened cables
Table 9.6 Mechanical options

Options 12.95
9.6 RS485 interface (PTP1)

The SST2 serial interface for the basic unit is not available until submodule A2 (C98043-A1690-L1) has been
plugged into the CUR electronics module (A10).
With the parameterization P688=1, the peer-to-peer transmission protocol is implemented on SST2.
The RS485 interface cable required for peer-to-peer coupling to a second unit is described in Section 3.8.7.
9.6.1 Order designation
Three different versions of this module (short designation PTP1, item number C98043-A1690-L1, equipment
identifier A2) can be ordered. The order numbers (MLFB) for these versions are:
1. Module PTP1 with two spacers (1 module) MLFB: 6SE7090-0XX85-1NA0
2. Standard package for 12-pulse mode (2 PTP1 modules with two

spacers for each of two units) MLFB: 6SE7090-0XX85-1TA0
3. Retrofitting package for 12-pulse mode (2 PTP1 modules with two

spacers, 2 CUR control electronics modules and two EPROMs
with up-to-date software for two units) MLFB: 6SE7090-0XX85-1TB0
Versions 1 and 2 require a CUR control electronics module of hardware version 06 or higher (indicated on the
fourth number block of the item number on the module: C98043-A1680-L1-06, C98043-A1680-L1-07, ...) and
software version 3.0 or higher (see the label on the EPROM, fourth number block must be 30 or higher: V98113-
A1800-A001-30, V98113-A1800-A001-31, ... The software version can also be read from parameter r720.01.
The contents must be 3.0 or greater).
9.6.2 Installation
À
Undo the fixing screws of the CUR (A10) above and below the
removal handles . Á
Remove the module carefully from the electronics box using the A10
handles . CUR
Versions 1 and 2: Module PTP1 is a submodule of the CUR. The PMU

PTP1 is fitted to the electronics module using the preassembled
spacers. The female rods X115 and X116 must be fitted onto the
corresponding male pins on the CUR. X100
Version 3: The PTP1 and EPROM are already fitted to the CUR. X101
X102 X115
Slide CUR module (A10) with PTP1 (A2) into the electronics box A2
carefully along the guide rails as far as the stop. X117
X104 X116
Screw the module into position with the fixing screws above and
below the removal handles .
Á
À Â

12.95 Options
9.6.3 Function and terminal description
See circuit diagram in Section 3.5 "Single-line diagrams with suggested circuit arrangements".
Function Terminal Connected values / Description
RS485 serial interface X117-1 RS485R + receive cable RS485 positive

(SST2) X117-2 RS485R - receive cable RS485 negative
X117-3 RS485T+ send cable RS485 positive
X117-4 RS485T- send cable RS485 negative
X117-5 Signal earth
The bus termination resistors required for peer-to-peer mode are installed on the module:
150 between terminal X117-1 and terminal X117-2
390 from terminal X117-1 to +5V supply
390 from terminal X117-2 to ground
9.6.4 Parameterization
The following parameters influence the function of the SST2 interface for the basic unit (for details see Section
5.12):
P681 (i001 to i005) Selection of process data for transmission
P684.i003 Baudrate
P686.i003 Number of net data words for peer-to-peer link
P687.i003 Telegram failure time
P688 Selection of the protocol
Parameterization for "12-pulse mode" see Section 3.8.3.
9.7 SIMOVIS
WARNING
Only qualified personnel who are familiar with the SIMOVIS operating
instructions and with the operating instructions of the connected devices and
their safety instructions are permitted to intervene at the drive using the PC.
Incorrect use of the software can result in death, severe personal injury or
What is SIMOVIS?
SIMOVIS is a program that runs on standard PCs for the setup and diagnostics of converters.
The connection to this unit is implemented via the RS485 interface and USS protocol.
If your PC does not have an RS485 interface, you have to connect an RS232/RS485 interface converter to the
COM1 or COM2 RS 232 interface.
An interface converter of this type is supplied under the order number 6SX7005-0AA00.

Options 12.95
SIMOVIS functions
Menu-driven setting up using the PC: all parameters can be set that are required for operation.
Reading and writing any preferred parameter sets (Upread, Download).
Setting and monitoring all parameters of the unit using graphical methods.
Operation of the unit via screen forms. Issuing control commands.
Evaluation of faults and alarms: Overview of faults and alarms for all equipment connected to the bus.
SIMOVIS is supplied with every unit, on diskette, in the diskette pocket at the back of the manual.
The installation and operating instructions for the software is supplied in the form of a Windows WRITE file and
as an ASCII text file on the installation disks:
ANLEITNG.WRI .............Operating instructions in Windows Write format

ANLEITNG.TXT ..............Operating instructions in ASCII text format.
If WINDOWS (Version 3.1 upwards) is installed on your PC, you can load ANLEITNG.WRI into MS-WRITE and
print it out (7 pages).
It is also possible under DOS to print out the file ANLEITNG.TXT.
In order to accommodate the different number of lines per page for different printers, page divisions were
omitted.
The simplest way to print the file out is as follows:
COPY ANLEITNG.TXT LPT1:
Please note that an ASCII character set is active on a laser printer (e.g. PC-8) ; and that a printer with endless
paper is set to "Skip over perforation".

12.95 Spare-parts
10 Spare-parts
For rectifier/regenerating units sizes C to K
Equipment Designation Order number Used in

identifier
A10 PCB electronics (CUR) 6SE7090-0XX85-1DA0 all unit types - 1AA0
A23 PCB- Power Interface 6SE7028-6EC85-1HA0 6SE7022-1EC85-1AA0
6SE7024-1EC85-1AA0
6SE7028-6EC85-1AA0
A23 PCB- Power Interface 6SE7036-1EE85-1HA0 6SE7031-7EE85-1AA0
6SE7032-2EE85-1AA0
6SE7033-1EE85-1AA0
6SE7033-8EE85-1AA0
6SE7034-6EE85-1AA0
6SE7036-1EE85-1AA0
A23 PCB- Power Interface 6SE7028-8FC85-1HA0 6SE7022-7FE85-1AA0
6SE7024-1FC85-1AA0
6SE7027-2FC85-1AA0
6SE7028-8FC85-1AA0
A23 PCB- Power Interface 6SE7035-4FE85-1HA0 6SE7031-5FE85-1AA0
6SE7032-4FE85-1AA0
6SE7032-7FE85-1AA0
6SE7033-5FE85-1AA0
6SE7034-2FE85-1AA0
6SE7035-4FE85-1AA0
A23 FBG- Power Interface 6SE7034-2HE85-1HA0 6SE7031-4HE85-1AA0
6SE7032-2HE85-1AA0
6SE7032-7HE85-1AA0
6SE7034-2HE85-1AA0
6SE7035-3HE85-1AA0
A23 PCB- Power Interface 6SE7041-8EK85-1HA0 6SE7038-2EH85-1AA0
6SE7041-0EH85-1AA0
6SE7041-3EK85-1AA0
6SE7041-8EK85-1AA0
A23 PCB- Power Interface 6SE7041-8HK85-1HA0 6SE7037-7FH85-1AA0
6SE7041-0FH85-1AA0
6SE7041-3FK85-1AA0
6SE7041-5FK85-1AA0
6SE7041-8FK85-1AA0
6SE7037-7HH85-1AA0
6SE7041-0HH85-1AA0
6SE7041-3HK85-1AA0
6SE7041-5HK85-1AA0
6SE7041-8HK85-1AA0
A23 PCB- Power Interface 6SE7041-8EK85-1MA0 6SE7041-3EK85-1AD0
6SE7041-8EK85-1AD0
A23 PCB- Power Interface 6SE7041-8HK85-1MA0 6SE7041-3FK85-1AD0
6SE7041-5FK85-1AD0
6SE7041-8FK85-1AD0
6SE7041-3HK85-1AD0
6SE7041-5HK85-1AD0
6SE7041-8HK85-1AD0
PMU Parameterization unit 6SE7090-0XX84-2FA0 all unit types - 1AA0

Spare-parts 12.95

identifier
A601 PCB -snubber RC network 6SE7032-2EE85-1JA0 6SE7031-7EE85-1AA0
6SE7032-2EE85-1AA0
A601 PCB -snubber RC network 6SE7034-6EE85-1JA0 6SE7033-1EE85-1AA0
6SE7033-8EE85-1AA0
6SE7034-6EE85-1AA0
A601, A602 PCB -snubber RC network 6SE7034-6EE85-1JA0 6SE7036-1EE85-1AA0
A601 PCB -snubber RC network 6SE7031-4FE85-1JA0 6SE7031-5FE85-1AA0
A601, A602 PCB -snubber RC network 6SE7031-4FE85-1JA0 6SE7032-4FE85-1AA0
6SE7032-7FE85-1AA0
6SE7033-5FE85-1AA0
6SE7034-2FE85-1AA0
A601 PCB -snubber RC network 6SE7035-4HE85-1JA0 6SE7035-4FE85-1AA0
A601 PCB -snubber RC network 6SE7031-4HE85-1JA0 6SE7031-4HE85-1AA0
6SE7035-3HE85-1AA0
A601, A602 PCB -snubber RC network 6SE7031-4HE85-1JA0 6SE7032-2HE85-1AA0
6SE7032-7HE85-1AA0
6SE7034-2HE85-1AA0
V11 bis V16 Thyristor module 6SY7010-0AA13 6SE7022-1EC85-1AA0
6SE7022-7FC85-1AA0
V11 bis V16 Thyristor module 6SY7010-0AA16 6SE7024-1FC85-1AA0
6SE7031-5FE85-1AA0
V11 bis V16 Thyristor module 6SY7010-0AA01 6SE7031-7EE85-1AA0
V11 bis V16- Thyristor module 6SY7010-0AA07 6SE7032-4FE85-1AA0
V11 bis V16 Thyristor module 6SY7010-0AA22 6SE7034-2FE85-1AA0
V11 bis V16 Thyristor module 6SY7010-0AA30 6SE7031-4HE85-1AA0
6SE7033-5FE85-1AA0

12.95 Spare-parts

identifier
6SE7024-1FC85-1AA0
6SE7027-2FC85-1AA0
6SE7028-8FC85-1AA0
6SE7032-4FE85-1AA0
6SE7034-2FE85-1AA0
6SE7032-2HE85-1AA0
6SE7032-7HE85-1AA0
Ebene A Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB01 6SE7038-2EH85-1AA0
network
Ebene B Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB02 6SE7038-2EH85-1AA0
network
Ebene A Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB03 6SE7041-0EH85-1AA0
network
Ebene B Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB04 6SE7041-0EH85-1AA0
network
Ebene A Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB05 6SE7041-3EK85-1AA0
network 6SE7041-3EK85-1AD0
Ebene B Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB06 6SE7041-3EK85-1AA0
Ebene A Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB07 6SE7041-8EK85-1AA0
Ebene B Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB08 6SE7041-8EK85-1AA0
Ebene A Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB12 6SE7037-7FH85-1AA0
network
Ebene B Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB13 6SE7037-7FH85-1AA0
network
Ebene A Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB15 6SE7041-0FH85-1AA0
network
Ebene B Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB16 6SE7041-0FH85-1AA0
network
Ebene A Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB17 6SE7041-3FK85-1AA0
network 6SE7041-3FK85-1AD0
Ebene B Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB18 6SE7041-3FK85-1AA0

Spare-parts 12.95

identifier
Ebene A Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB26 6SE7037-7HH85-1AA0
network
Ebene B Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB27 6SE7037-7HH85-1AA0
network
Ebene A Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB28 6SE7041-0HH85-1AA0
network
Ebene B Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB30 6SE7041-0HH85-1AA0
network
Ebene A Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB31 6SE7041-3HK85-1AA0
network 6SE7041-3HK85-1AD0
Ebene B Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB32 6SE7041-3HK85-1AA0
F1 Fuse link 6SY7010-2AA01 all unit types
F2 Fuse link 6SY7010-2AA02 6SE7022-1EC85-1AA0
6SE7024-1EC85-1AA0
6SE7028-6EC85-1AA0
6SE7022-7FC85-1AA0
6SE7024-1FC85-1AA0
6SE7027-2FC85-1AA0
6SE7028-8FC85-1AA0
6SE7031-7EE85-1AA0
6SE7032-2EE85-1AA0
6SE7033-1EE85-1AA0
6SE7033-8EE85-1AA0
6SE7034-6EE85-1AA0
6SE7036-1EE85-1AA0
6SE7031-5FE85-1AA0
6SE7032-4FE85-1AA0
6SE7032-7FE85-1AA0
6SE7033-5FE85-1AA0
6SE7034-2FE85-1AA0
6SE7035-4FE85-1AA0
6SE7031-4HE85-1AA0
6SE7032-2HE85-1AA0
6SE7032-7HE85-1AA0
6SE7034-2HE85-1AA0
6SE7035-3HE85-1AA0

12.95 Spare-parts

identifier
F5 Fuse link 6SY7010-2AA01 6SE7038-2EH85-1AA0
6SE7041-0EH85-1AA0
6SE7037-7FH85-1AA0
6SE7041-0FH85-1AA0
6SE7037-7HH85-1AA0
6SE7041-0HH85-1AA0
6SE7041-3EK85-1AA0
6SE7041-3EK85-1AD0
6SE7041-8EK85-1AA0
6SE7041-8EK85-1AD0
6SE7041-3FK85-1AA0
6SE7041-3FK85-1AD0
6SE7041-5FK85-1AA0
6SE7041-5FK85-1AD0
6SE7041-8FK85-1AA0
6SE7041-8FK85-1AD0
6SE7041-3HK85-1AA0
6SE7041-3HK85-1AD0
6SE7041-5HK85-1AA0
6SE7041-5HK85-1AD0
6SE7041-8HK85-1AA0
6SE7041-8HK85-1AD0
F3, F4 Fuse link 6SY7010-2AA03 6SE7031-7EE85-1AA0
6SE7032-2EE85-1AA0
6SE7033-1EE85-1AA0
6SE7033-8EE85-1AA0
6SE7034-6EE85-1AA0
6SE7036-1EE85-1AA0
6SE7031-5FE85-1AA0
6SE7032-4FE85-1AA0
6SE7032-7FE85-1AA0
6SE7033-5FE85-1AA0
6SE7034-2FE85-1AA0
6SE7036-4FE85-1AA0
6SE7031-4HE85-1AA0
6SE7032-2HE85-1AA0
6SE7032-7HE85-1AA0
6SE7034-2HE85-1AA0
6SE7035-3HE85-1AA0

Spare-parts 12.95

identifier
F2, F3, F4 Fuse link 6SY7010-2AA23 6SE7038-2EH85-1AA0
6SE7041-0EH85-1AA0
6SE7037-7FH85-1AA0
6SE7041-0FH85-1AA0
6SE7037-7HH85-1AA0
6SE7041-0HH85-1AA0
6SE7041-3EK85-1AA0
6SE7041-3EK85-1AD0
6SE7041-8EK85-1AA0
6SE7041-8EK85-1AD0
6SE7041-3FK85-1AA0
6SE7041-3FK85-1AD0
6SE7041-5FK85-1AA0
6SE7041-5FK85-1AD0
6SE7041-8FK85-1AA0
6SE7041-8FK85-1AD0
6SE7041-3HK85-1AA0
6SE7041-3HK85-1AD0
6SE7041-5HK85-1AA0
6SE7041-5HK85-1AD0
6SE7041-8HK85-1AA0
6SE7041-8HK85-1AD0
6SE7024-1FC85-1AA0
F10 Fuse link 6SY7010-2AA07 6SE7031-7EE85-1AA0
6SE7032-2EE85-1AA0
6SE7034-2FE85-1AA0
6SE7034-2HE85-1AA0
F10 Fuse link 6SY7010-2AA13 6SE7022-7FC85-1AA0
F10 Fuse link 6SY7010-2AA16 6SE7031-5FE85-1AA0
6SE7031-4HE85-1AA0
6SE7032-2HE85-1AA0
6SE7032-7HE85-1AA0
6SE7035-3HE85-1AA0
F11 bis F26 Fuse link 6SY7010-2AA22 6SE7038-2EH85-1AA0
F111 bis F262 Fuse link 6SY7010-2AA22 6SE7041-3EK85-1AA0
6SE7041-3EK85-1AD0

12.95 Spare-parts

identifier
F11 bis F26 Fuse link 6SY7010-2AA12 6SE7041-0EH85-1AA0
6SE7041-0FH85-1AA0
6SE7041-0HH85-1AA0
F111 bis F262 Fuse link 6SY7010-2AA12 6SE7041-8EK85-1AA0
6SE7041-8EK85-1AD0
6SE7041-8FK85-1AA0
6SE7041-8FK85-1AD0
6SE7041-8HK85-1AA0
6SE7041-8HK85-1AD0
F11 bis F26 Fuse link 6SY7010-2AA11 6SE7037-7FH85-1AA0
6SE7037-7HH85-1AA0
F111 bis F262 Fuse link 6SY7010-2AA11 6SE7041-3FK85-1AA0
6SE7041-3FK85-1AD0
6SE7041-3HK85-1AA0
6SE7041-3HK85-1AD0
F111 bis F262 Fuse link 6SY7010-2AA21 6SE7041-5FK85-0AA0
6SE7041-5FK85-0AD0
6SE7041-5HK85-0AA0
6SE7041-5HK85-0AD0
R100 NTC thermistor 6SY7010-6AA01 6SE7022-1EC85-1AA0
6SE7024-1EC85-1AA0
6SE7028-1EC85-1AA0
6SE7022-7FC85-1AA0
6SE7024-1FC85-1AA0
6SE7027-2FC85-1AA0
6SE7028-8FC85-1AA0
6SE7031-7EE85-1AA0
6SE7032-2EE85-1AA0
6SE7033-1EE85-1AA0
6SE7033-8EE85-1AA0
6SE7034-6EE85-1AA0
6SE7036-1EE85-1AA0
6SE7031-5FE85-1AA0
6SE7032-4FE85-1AA0
6SE7032-7FE85-1AA0
6SE7033-5FE85-1AA0
6SE7034-2FE85-1AA0
6SE7035-4FE85-1AA0
6SE7031-4HE85-1AA0
6SE7032-2HE85-1AA0
6SE7032-7HE85-1AA0
6SE7034-2HE85-1AA0
6SE7035-3HE85-1AA0

Spare-parts 12.95

identifier
R100 NTC thermistor 6SY7010-6AA02 6SE7038-2EH85-1AA0
6SE7041-0EH85-1AA0
6SE7037-7FH85-1AA0
6SE7041-0FH85-1AA0
6SE7037-7HH85-1AA0
6SE7041-0HH85-1AA0
6SE7041-3EK85-1AA0
6SE7041-3EK85-1AD0
6SE7041-8EK85-1AA0
6SE7041-8EK85-1AD0
6SE7041-3FK85-1AA0
6SE7041-3FK85-1AD0
6SE7041-5FK85-1AA0
6SE7041-5FK85-1AD0
6SE7041-8FK85-1AA0
6SE7041-8FK85-1AD0
6SE7041-3HK85-1AA0
6SE7041-3HK85-1AD0
6SE7041-5HK85-1AA0
6SE7041-5HK85-1AD0
6SE7041-8HK85-1AA0
6SE7041-8HK85-1AD0
E1 Fan 6SY7000-0AA48 6SE7022-1EC85-1AA0
6SE7024-1EC85-1AA0
6SE7028-1EC85-1AA0
6SE7022-7FC85-1AA0
6SE7024-1FC85-1AA0
6SE7027-2FC85-1AA0
6SE7028-8FC85-1AA0
E1 Fan 6SY7010-7AA01 6SE7031-7EE85-1AA0
6SE7032-2EE85-1AA0
6SE7033-1EE85-1AA0
6SE7033-8EE85-1AA0
6SE7034-6EE85-1AA0
6SE7036-1EE85-1AA0
6SE7031-5FE85-1AA0
6SE7032-4FE85-1AA0
6SE7032-7FE85-1AA0
6SE7033-5FE85-1AA0
6SE7034-2FE85-1AA0
6SE7035-4FE85-1AA0
6SE7031-4HE85-1AA0
6SE7032-2HE85-1AA0
6SE7032-7HE85-1AA0
6SE7034-2HE85-1AA0
6SE7035-3HE85-1AA0
E1 Fan 6SY7010-7AA02 6SE7038-2EH85-1AA0
6SE7041-0EH85-1AA0
6SE7037-7FH85-1AA0
6SE7041-0FH85-1AA0
6SE7037-7HH85-1AA0
6SE7041-0HH85-1AA0

12.95 Spare-parts

identifier
E1,E2 Fan 6SY7010-7AA02 6SE7041-3EK85-1AA0
6SE7041-3EK85-1AD0
6SE7041-8EK85-1AA0
6SE7041-8EK85-1AD0
6SE7041-3FK85-1AA0
6SE7041-3FK85-1AD0
6SE7041-5FK85-1AA0
6SE7041-5FK85-1AD0
6SE7041-8FK85-1AA0
6SE7041-8FK85-1AD0
6SE7041-3HK85-1AA0
6SE7041-3HK85-1AD0
6SE7041-5HK85-1AA0
6SE7041-5HK85-1AD0
6SE7041-8HK85-1AA0
6SE7041-8HK85-1AD0
T1 bis T4 Current transformer 6SY7010-5AA01 6SE7022-1EC85-1AA0
6SE7024-1EC85-1AA0
6SE7028-1EC85-1AA0
6SE7022-7FC85-1AA0
6SE7024-1FC85-1AA0
6SE7027-2FC85-1AA0
6SE7028-8FC85-1AA0
T1 bis T4 Current transformer 6SY7010-5AA02 6SE7031-7EE85-1AA0
6SE7032-2EE85-1AA0
6SE7033-1EE85-1AA0
6SE7033-8EE85-1AA0
6SE7034-6EE85-1AA0
6SE7036-1EE85-1AA0
6SE7031-5FE85-1AA0
6SE7032-4FE85-1AA0
6SE7032-7FE85-1AA0
6SE7033-5FE85-1AA0
6SE7034-2FE85-1AA0
6SE7035-4FE85-1AA0
6SE7031-4HE85-1AA0
6SE7032-2HE85-1AA0
6SE7032-7HE85-1AA0
6SE7034-2HE85-1AA0
6SE7035-3HE85-1AA0
T1, T2 Current transformer 6SY7010-5AA03 6SE7038-2EH85-1AA0
6SE7041-0EH85-1AA0
6SE7037-7FH85-1AA0
6SE7041-0FH85-1AA0
6SE7037-7HH85-1AA0
6SE7041-0HH85-1AA0

Spare-parts 12.95

identifier
T1, T2 Current transformer 6SY7010-5AA04 6SE7041-3EK85-1AA0
6SE7041-3EK85-1AD0
6SE7041-8EK85-1AA0
6SE7041-8EK85-1AD0
6SE7041-3FK85-1AA0
6SE7041-3FK85-1AD0
6SE7041-5FK85-1AA0
6SE7041-5FK85-1AD0
6SE7041-8FK85-1AA0
6SE7041-8FK85-1AD0
6SE7041-3HK85-1AA0
6SE7041-3HK85-1AD0
6SE7041-5HK85-1AA0
6SE7041-5HK85-1AD0
6SE7041-8HK85-1AA0
6SE7041-8HK85-1AD0

12.95 Logbook
12 Logbook
The logbook must be kept up-to-date by the operating personnel.
All service and maintenance work carried out on the rectifier/regenerating unit should be entered briefly in
keywords into the logbook.
Continuous entries are important for maintenance and could be significant when it comes to warranty claims.
Similarly, in the event of software upgrading, it is important that a record of the parameter settings is available,
because during this procedure all values are reset to their original factory settings.
Location: ....................................................... Unit Order No.: ..................................................
Serial No.: ..................................................

Date Name Department Signature
Start-up settings
Start-up settings
change
Par- Parameter Factory setting Start-up setting Start-up setting

No. designation change
P050 Language 0
P051 Access Level 2
P052 Function select 0
P053 Parameter Access 6
P054 Display Light 0
P070 MLFB(6SE70 ... ) 0
P071 Line Volts dependent on P070
P074 Limit LowVoltage 61
P075 Rtd Amps dependent on P070
P076 Config. PCircuit 02
P077 Factory set.type 0
P090 Board Position 2 0
P091 Board Position 3 0
P140 Rectifier Resist i001=0.000 i001= i001=
i002=0.000 i002= i002=
i003=0.000 i003= i003=
i004=0.000 i004= i004=
P141 Rectifier Induct i001=0.00 i001= i001=
i002=0.00 i002= i002=
i003=0.00 i003= i003=
i004=0.00 i004= i004=
P142 Inverter Resist. i001=0.000 i001= i001=
i002=0.000 i002= i002=
i003=0.000 i003= i003=
i004=0.000 i004= i004=

Logbook 12.95

P143 Inverter Induct. i001=0.00 i001= i001=
i002=0.00 i002= i002=
i003=0.00 i003= i003=
i004=0.00 i004= i004=
P144 DC Bus Capacit. i001=0.00 i001= i001=
i002=0.00 i002= i002=
i003=0.00 i003= i003=
i004=0.00 i004= i004=
P160 Motor Curr Limit i001=150.0 i001= i001=
i002=150.0 i002= i002=
i003=150.0 i003= i003=
i004=150.0 i004= i004=
P161 Regen Curr Limit i001=-150.0 i001= i001=
i002=-150.0 i002= i002=
i003=-150.0 i003= i003=
i004=-150.0 i004= i004=
P310 DC Curr Reg Gain i001=0.15 i001= i001=
i002=0.15 i002= i002=
i003=0.15 i003= i003=
i004=0.15 i004= i004=
P311 DC Curr Reg Time i001=0.015 i001= i001=
i002=0.015 i002= i002=
i003=0.015 i003= i003=
i004=0.015 i004= i004=
P313 DC Volts Reg Gain i001=3.00 i001= i001=
i002=3.00 i002= i002=
i003=3.00 i003= i003=
i004=3.00 i004= i004=
P314 DC Volts RegTime i001=3.00 i001= i001=
i002=3.00 i002= i002=
i003=3.00 i003= i003=
i004=3.00 i004= i004=
P316 DC V-Reg +Limit i001=0.01 i001= i001=
i002=0.01 i002= i002=
i003=0.01 i003= i003=
i004=0.01 i004= i004=
P317 DC V-Reg -Limit i001=-1.00 i001= i001=
i002=-1.00 i002= i002=
i003=-1.00 i003= i003=
i004=-1.00 i004= i004=
P318 DC V(set,red) i001=80.00 i001= i001=
i002=80.00 i002= i002=
i003=80.00 i003= i003=
i004=80.00 i004= i004=

12.95 Logbook

P319 DC V(set,red)Hys i001=6.00 i001= i001=
i002=6.00 i002= i002=
i003=6.00 i003= i003=
i004=6.00 i004= i004=
P320 Smooth Load Amps i001=5 i001= i001=
i002=5 i002= i002=
i003=5 i003= i003=
i004=5 i004= i004=
P329 PreChange Time i001=500 i001= i001=
i002=500 i002= i002=
i003=500 i003= i003=
i004=500 i004= i004=
P353 Thyristor Test 0
P354 GroundFault Test 2
P366 Auto Restart 0
P408 Caps FormingTime i001=10.0 i001= i001=
i002=10.0 i002= i002=
i003=10.0 i003= i003=
i004=10.0 i004= i004=
P409 Contactor Delay 0.0
P486 Src Current Setp i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P517 DC Volts Dev Lim i001=2.00 i001= i001=
i002=2.00 i002= i002=
i003=2.00 i003= i003=
i004=2.00 i004= i004=
P518 Deviation Time i001=0.10 i001= i001=
i002=0.10 i002= i002=
i003=0.10 i003= i003=
i004=0.10 i004= i004=
P554 Src ON/OFF1 i001=1010 i001= i001=
i002=1001 i002= i002=
P555 Src1 OFF2 i001=1010 i001= i001=
i002=1002 i002= i002=
P556 Src2 OFF2 i001=1 i001= i001=
i002=1 i002= i002=
P557 Src3 OFF2 i001=1 i001= i001=
i002=1 i002= i002=
P561 Src InvRelease i001=1 i001= i001=
i002=1 i002= i002=
P565 Src1 Fault Reset i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=1003 i002= i002=

Logbook 12.95

i002=0 i002= i002=
i002=2001 i002= i002=
P568 Src Jog1 ON i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P569 Src Jog2 ON i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P571 Src Reduce DC V i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P572 Src RegenRelease i001=1 i001= i001=
i002=1 i002= i002=
P573 Src No ExtFault3 i001=1 i001= i001=
i002=1 i002= i002=
P574 Src Motor/Regen i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
i002=1 i002= i002=
P578 Src RDataSetBit0 i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P579 Src RDataSetBit1 i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P583 Src 12-Pulse Mode i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
i002=1 i002= i002=
P587 Src Master/Slave i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P588 Src No Ext Warn1 i001=1 i001= i001=
i002=1 i002= i002=
P589 Src No Ext Warn2 i001=1 i001= i001=
i002=1 i002= i002=
P590 Src Base/Reserve 1005
P591 Src ContactorMsg 1
P600 Trg Bit Ready On i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P601 Trg Bit Rdy Oper i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P602 Trg Bit Operat i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P603 Trg Bit Fault i001=1002 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=

12.95 Logbook

P604 Trg Bit No OFF2 i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P606 Trg BitONblocked i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P607 Trg Bit Warning i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P608 Trg Bit Deviat. i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P610 Trg Reren Ready i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P611 Trg Low Voltage i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P612 Trg Bit Contact i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P613 Trg DC V reduced i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P614 Trg Motor/Regen i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P618 Trg Current Lim. i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P619 Trg Bit Ext Flt1 i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P620 Trg Bit Ext Flt2 i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P621 Trg Bit ExtWarn i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P622 Trg Bit i2t Inv i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P623 Trg BitFltTmpInv i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P624 Trg BitWarTmpInv i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P631 Trg Bit Charging i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P655 CUR AnaOutActVal 37
P656 CUR AnaOut Gain 10.00
P657 CUR AnaOutOffset 0.00
P658 AO Curr(act)Conf 0

Logbook 12.95

P660 SCI AnalogInConf i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
i003=0 i003= i003=
i004=0 i004= i004=
i005=0 i005= i005=
i006=0 i006= i006=
P661 SCI AnaInSmooth i001=2 i001= i001=
i002=2 i002= i002=
i003=2 i003= i003=
i004=2 i004= i004=
i005=2 i005= i005=
i006=2 i006= i006=
P662 SCI AnalogInOffs i001=0.00 i001= i001=
i002=0.00 i002= i002=
i003=0.00 i003= i003=
i004=0.00 i004= i004=
i005=0.00 i005= i005=
i006=0.00 i006= i006=
P664 SCI AnaOutActVal i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
i003=0 i003= i003=
i004=0 i004= i004=
i005=0 i005= i005=
i006=0 i006= i006=
P665 SCI AnaOut Gain i001=10.00 i001= i001=
i002=10.00 i002= i002=
i003=10.00 i003= i003=
i004=10.00 i004= i004=
i005=10.00 i005= i005=
i006=10.00 i006= i006=
P666 SCI AnaOut Offs i001=0.00 i001= i001=
i002=0.00 i002= i002=
i003=0.00 i003= i003=
i004=0.00 i004= i004=
i005=0.00 i005= i005=
i006=0.00 i006= i006=

12.95 Logbook

P680 Scom1 Act Value i001=968 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
i003=0 i003= i003=
i004=0 i004= i004=
i005=0 i005= i005=
i006=0 i006= i006=
i007=0 i007= i007=
i008=0 i008= i008=
i009=0 i009= i009=
i010=0 i010= i010=
i011=0 i011= i011=
i012=0 i012= i012=
i013=0 i013= i013=
i014=0 i014= i014=
i015=0 i015= i015=
i016=0 i016= i016=
P681 Scom2 Act Value i001=599 i001= i001=
i002=34 i002= i002=
i003=0 i003= i003=
i004=0 i004= i004=
i005=0 i005= i005=
P682 SCB Protocol 0
P683 SCom/SCB BusAddr i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P684 SCom/SCB Baud i001=6 i001= i001=
i002=6 i002= i002=
i003=13 i003= i003=
P685 SCom/SCB #PKWDat i001=127 i001= i001=
i002=127 i002= i002=
P686 SCom/SCB # PrDat i001=2 i001= i001=
i002=2 i002= i002=
i003=2 i003= i003=
P687 SCom/SCB TlgOFF i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
i003=1 i003= i003=
P688 SST2 Protocol 0
P689 SCB Peer2PeerExt i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
i003=0 i003= i003=
i004=0 i004= i004=
i005=0 i005= i005=

Logbook 12.95

P690 SCB Act Values i001=968 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
i003=0 i003= i003=
i004=0 i004= i004=
i005=0 i005= i005=
i006=0 i006= i006=
i007=0 i007= i007=
i008=0 i008= i008=
i009=0 i009= i009=
i010=0 i010= i010=
i011=0 i011= i011=
i012=0 i012= i012=
i013=0 i013= i013=
i014=0 i014= i014=
i015=0 i015= i015=
i016=0 i016= i016=
P694 CB/TB Act Values i001=968 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
i003=0 i003= i003=
i004=0 i004= i004=
i005=0 i005= i005=
i006=0 i006= i006=
i007=0 i007= i007=
i008=0 i008= i008=
i009=0 i009= i009=
i010=0 i010= i010=
i011=0 i011= i011=
i012=0 i012= i012=
i013=0 i013= i013=
i014=0 i014= i014=
i015=0 i015= i015=
i016=0 i016= i016=
P695 CB/TB TlgOFFTime 20
P696 CB Parameter 1 0

12.95 Logbook

P773 Deadband Convert i001=0.01 i001= i001=
i002=0.01 i002= i002=
i003=0.01 i003= i003=
i004=0.01 i004= i004=
P774 Deadband Invert i001=-3.00 i001= i001=
i002=-3.00 i002= i002=
i003=-3.00 i003= i003=
i004=-3.00 i004= i004=
P775 Min Gating Angle i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
i003=0 i003= i003=
i004=0 i004= i004=
P776 Max Gating Angle i001=150 i001= i001=
i002=150 i002= i002=
i003=150 i003= i003=
i004=150 i004= i004=
P777 Max Gating Angle i001=20.00 i001= i001=
Ramp i002=20.00 i002= i002=
i003=20.00 i003= i003=
i004=20.00 i004= i004=
P785 I2t Control Word 1
P793 Line Voltage Delay 0.03
P799 Spezial Access 0
P917 Change Reports 0
P918 CB Bus Address 3
P927 Parameter Access 6
P928 Src Base/Reserve 1005
P952 # of Faults 0
P970 Factory Settings 1
P971 EEPROM Storing 0

Logbook 12.95
No. Date/time Name/department Fault and diagnostic Measures

messages

12.94 Environmental Compatibility
13 Environmental Compatibility
Environmental aspects during development
The number of parts has been reduced substantially by the use of highly integrated components and by a
modular structure of the complete converter series. This reduces energy consumption during production.
Particular attention was paid to reducing volume, mass and type diversity of the metal and plastic parts.
Plastic parts used: ABS: Front cover

Fan grille, fan cover (Size C)
PMU support
PP: Hinge
Insulating plate
Handle
Bus retrofit
PC: Size E:
Protection against accidental contact
IP20 enclosure
Insulation of customer connections
Plastic part of fan box
PA6: Insulating films

Terminal housing
On all essential parts, flame retardants containing halogen and insulating material containing silicone have been
substituted by materials that are devoid of noxious substances.
Environmental compatibility was an important criterion in the selection of externally source items.
Environmental aspects during production
Externally sourced items are mainly transported in returnable packaging. The packaging material itself is
recyclable, consisting mainly of cardboard.
Except for the hot-dip-galvanized enclosure for size E, H and K, no special surface coatings are used.
SMD components are used on the printed-circuit boards.
Production is emission-free.
Environmental aspects of disposal
The unit can be dismantled into recyclable mechanical components by means of easily removable screw and
snap joints.
The PC boards can be disposed of thermally. The number of components containing hazardous substances is
only slight.
The plastic parts are marked in conformity with DIN 54840 and bear the recycling symbol.

Environmental Compatibility 12.94

12.95 Technical Data
14 Technical Data
In the event of conditions of use other than those listed in this chapter, please contact your local Siemens branch
or national subsidiary.
Coolant temperature 0 °C to +40 °C

Storage temperature 25 °C to +70 °C
Transport temperature 25 °C to +70 °C
Environmental class 3K3 DIN IEC 721-3-3 / 04.90
Soiling 2 DIN VDE 0110 Part 1 / 01.89
moisture not permitted
Overvoltage category (power section) III DIN VDE 0110 Part 2 / 01.89
Overvoltage resistance class 1 DIN VDE 0160 / 04.91
(with converter connected)
Type of protection DIN VDE 0470 Part 1 / 11.92 =
^ EN 60529
Size C:
Standard IP20
Size E:
Standard IP00
Option IP20
Interference immunity IEC 801-2, IEC 801-4
Mechanical strength DIN IEC 68-2-6 / 06.90
Frequency range Constant amplitude of
deflection acceleration
Hz mm m/s2 (g)
10 to 58 0.075
stationary use
more than 58 to 500 9.8 (1)
3.5
during transport
9.8 (1)
The units can also be operated in load class II. The permissible values must be taken from the following tables.
I
(A)
Load class ΙΙ
136%
Load class Ι
100%
91%
60s 240s
t/(s)
Figure 14.1 Power output according to load class II
Siemens AG 6SE7087 6AK85-1AA0 14-1

Technical Data 12.95
R/R unit 6SE70..-.....-1AA0 22-1EC85 24-1EC85 28-6EC85

Rated voltage, rated frequency, rated current
Rated voltage V
Rectifier connection 380 to 460V three-phase AC ±15 % 1)
Regenerative connection using an (auto) transformer
1.2 times the voltage of the rectifier connection
DC link voltage 510 to 620V DC ±15 %
Rated frequency fn Hz
Input 46 to 64 (automatic frequency matching)
Output DC
Rated current A
(rms value)
With autotransformer
Regenerating, line 20 40 82
side
Regenerating, unit 17 33 68
side
Rectifier operation 18 36 74
Without autotransformer
Regenerating, unit 17 33 68
side
Rectifier operation 18 36 74
Load class I to EN 60146-1-1 of the DC link current (average value)
in rectifier operation; currents reduced to 92% in regenerative operation
Rated current A 21 41 86
(average)
DC link connection
Rectifier operation
Load class II to EN 60146-1-1 of the DC link current (average value)
Rated current A 19 37 78
Base load duration s 240
Excess current A 29 56 117
Excess current duration s 60
Losses, cooling
Power dissipation kW 0,14 0,19 0,31
Maximum
Cooling air requirement m3/s 0,028 0,028 0,028
Sound pressure level, dimensions, weight
Sound pressure level dB(A) 60 60 60
Size C C C
Width mm 180 180 180
Height mm 600 600 600
(without securing bracket)
Depth mm 350 350 350
Weight app. kg 23 23 23
1) 3AC 208 to 230V Input voltage: see Chapter 1 Description

R/R unit 6SE70..-.....-1AA0 31-7EE85 32-2EE85 33-1EE85 33-8EE85 34-6EE85 36-1EE85

Rated voltage V
Output DC
Rated current A
(rms value)
Regenerating, line 165 212 297 360 444 581
side
Regenerating, unit 137 177 247 300 370 484
side
Rectifier operation 149 192 269 326 403 526
side
Rated current A 173 222 310 375 463 605
(average)
DC link connection
Rectifier operation
Rated current A 157 202 282 341 421 551
Excess current A 236 303 423 512 632 826
Losses, cooling
Power dissipation kW 0,69 0,97 1,07 1,16 1,43 1,77
Maximum
Cooling air requirement m3/s 0,2 0,2 0,2 0,2 0,2 0,2
Sound pressure level dB(A) 75 75 75 75 75 75
Size E E E E E E
Width mm 269 269 269 269 269 269
Height mm 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050
Depth
- Standard mm 340 340 340 340 340 340
Option mm 350 350 350 350 350 350
Weight app. kg 44 43.5 44 51.5 51.5 63

R/R unit 6SE70..-.....-1AA0 38-2EH85 41-0EH85 41-3EK85 41-8EK85

Rated voltage V
Output DC
Rated current A
(rms value)
Regenerating, line 784 980 1276 1702
side
Regenerating, unit 654 817 1064 1481
side
Rectifier operation 710 888 1156 1542
side
Rated current A 821 1023 1333 1780
(average)
DC link connection
Rectifier operation
Rated current A 747 931 1213 1620
Excess current A 1121 1396 1820 2430
Losses, cooling
Power dissipation kW 3.29 3.70 4.84 6.24
Maximum
Cooling air requirement m3/s 0.55 0.55 1.0 1.0
Sound pressure level 50 Hz dB(A) 80 80 86 86
60 Hz 83 83
Size H H K K
Width mm 508 508 800 800
Height mm 1400 1400 1725 1725
Depth mm 551 551 550 550
Weight app. kg 175 175 450 470
Parallel units (-1AD0) of size K for connecting in parallel have the same technical data as the corresponding
"basic units" (-1AA0). Please note the unit correspondence and notes of Section 3.7!
The permissible output current in parallel mode is reduced (due to current division between the power sections)
by 10 % as compared to the sum of the rated currents of the separate power sections.

R/R unit 6SE70..-.....-1AA0 22-7FC85 24-1FC85 27-2FC85 28-8FC85

Rated voltage V
DC link voltage 675 to 780V DC ±15
Output DC
Rated current A
(rms value)
Regenerating, line 26 40 69 90
side
side
side
Rated current A 27 41 72 94
(average)
DC link connection
Rectifier operation
Rated current A 25 37 66 86
Excess current A 37 56 98 128
Losses, cooling
Power dissipation kW 0,19 0,21 0,29 0,35
Maximum
Cooling air requirement m3/s 0,028 0,028 0,028 0,028
Sound pressure level dB(A) 60 60 60 60
Size C C C C
Width mm 180 180 180 180
Height mm 600 600 600 600
(without securing bracket)
Depth mm 350 350 350 350
Weight app. kg 23 23 23 23

R/R-unit 6SE70..-.....-1AA0 31-5FE85 32-4FE85 32-7FE85 33-5FE85 34-2FE85 35-4FE85

Rated voltage V
Input 46 to 64 (automatic fredquency matching)
Output DC
Rated current A
(rms value)
Regenerating, line 145 224 257 339 404 514
side
side
side
Rated current A 151 235 270 354 420 536
(average)
DC link connection
Rectifier operation
Rated current A 137 214 246 322 382 488
Excess current A 206 321 369 483 573 732
Losses, cooling
Power dissipation kW 0,76 1,14 1,11 1,36 1,38 2,00
Maximum
Cooling air requirement m3/s 0,2 0,2 0,2 0,2 0,2 0,2
Sound pressure level dB(A) 75 75 75 75 75 75
Size E E E E E E
Width mm 269 269 269 269 269 269
Height mm 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050
Depth
- Standard mm 340 340 340 340 340 340
Option mm 350 350 350 350 350 350
Weight app. kg 43.5 44.5 44.5 53.5 53.5 68

R/R unit 6SE70..-.....-1AA0 37-7FH85 41-0FH85 41-3FK85 41-5FK85 41-8FK85

Rated voltage V
Rectifier connection 500 to 575 V three-phase AC ±15 %
DC link voltage 675 to 780 V DC ±15 %
Output DC
Rated current A
(rms value)
Regenerating, line 741 980 1235 1401 1803
side
Regenerating, unit 617 817 1029 1168 1502
side
Rectifier operation 671 888 1119 1269 1633
side
Rated current A 774 1023 1285 1464 1880
(average)
DC link connection
Rectifier operation
Rated current A 704 931 1169 1332 1711
Excess current A 1057 1396 1754 1998 2566
Losses, cooling
Power dissipation kW 3.30 4.03 5.40 5.87 7.65
Maximum
Cooling air requirement m3/s 0.55 0.55 1.0 1.0 1.0
Sound pressure level 50 Hz dB(A) 80 80 86 86 86
60 Hz 83 83
Size H H K K K
Width mm 508 508 800 800 800
Height mm 1400 1400 1725 1725 1725
Depth mm 551 551 550 550 550
Weight app. kg 175 175 450 450 470

R/R unit 6SE70..-.....-1AA0 31-4HE85 32-2HE85 32-7HE85 34-2HE85 35-3HE85

Rated voltage V
Rectifier connection 660 to 690V three-phase AC ±15 %
Input 46 to 64 (automatic Frequency matching)
Output DC
Rated current A
(rms value)
side
side
side
Rated current A 140 222 270 420 536
(average)
Zwischenkreisanschluß
beim Einspeisen
Rated current A 127 202 246 382 488
Excess current A 191 303 369 573 732
Losses, cooling
Power dissipation kW 0,82 1,26 1,15 1,68 1,81
Maximum
Cooling air requirement m3/s 0,2 0,2 0,2 0,2 0,2
Sound pressure level dB(A) 75 75 75 75 75
Size E E E E E
Width mm 269 269 269 269 269
Height mm 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050
Depth
- Standard mm 340 340 340 340 340
Option 350 350 350 350 350
Weight app. kg 44.5 53.5 53.5 63 68

R/R unit 6SE70..-.....-1AA0 37-7HH85 41-0HH85 41-3HK85 41-5HK85 41-8HK85

Rated voltage V
Rectifier connection 660 to 690 V three-phase AC ±15 %
DC link voltage 890 to 930 V DC ±15 %
Output DC
Rated current A
(rms value)
side
side
side
Rated current A 774 1023 1285 1464 1880
(average)
DC link connection
Rectifier operation
Rated current A 704 931 1169 1332 1711
Excess current A 1057 1396 1754 1998 2566
Losses, cooling
Power dissipation kW 3.70 4.15 5.54 5.97 7.62
Maximum
Cooling air requirement m3/s 0.55 0.55 1.0 1.0 1.0
Sound pressure level 50 Hz dB(A) 80 80 86 86 86
60 Hz 83 83
Size H H K K K
Width mm 508 508 800 800 800
Height mm 1400 1400 1725 1725 1725
Depth mm 551 551 550 550 550
Weight app. kg 175 175 450 450 470

14.1 Power reduction at increased coolant temperature

The rated current must be reduced according to Figure 14.2 for cooling medium temperatures exceeding 40°C.
Cooling medium temperatures > 50°C are not permissible.
permissible rated current

in %
100
90
80
75
70
60
Coolant temperature
in °C
10 20 30 40 50
Figure 14.2 Maximum permitted rated current depending on coolant temperature
14.2 Power reduction at altitudes > 1000m above MSL

The rated current must be reduced as shown in Figure 14.3 in the event of installation altitudes > 1000 m above
mean sea level. Installation altitudes > 2000 m above MSL (please enquire)
permissible rated current permissible rated voltage

in % in %
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 70
60 60
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 0 1000 2000 3000 4000

Installation altitude Installation altitude
in m above sea level in m above sea level
Figure 14.3 Maximum values for rated current and rated voltage depending on installation altitude

14.3 Applied standards

DIN VDE 0100 Erection of power installations with rated voltages up to 1000 V,
Part 540 A11.91 Selection and erection of electrical equipment, earthing, PE conductor,
equipotential bonding conductor
DIN VDE 0106 Protection against electric shock:

Part 1 A05.82 Classification of electrical and electronic equipment (IEC 536)
Part 100 A03.83 Arrangement of actuation elements in the proximity of shock-hazard parts
DIN VDE 0110 Part 1 and 2 Isolation coordination for electrical equipment in low-voltage installations
A01.89
DIN VDE 0113 Safety of machines: electrical equipment of machines,

Part 1 A06.93 General requirements (EN 60204-1:1992)
DIN VDE 0160 E04.91 Equipping power installations with electronic equipment
DIN VDE 0298 Use of cables and insulated cables for power installations:
Part 2 A11.79 Recommended values for the current carrying capacity of cables with rated
voltages U0 / U to 18/30 kV
Part 4 A02.80 Recommended values for the current carrying capacity of cables
DIN VDE 0470 Part 1 A12.92 Types of protection, shock, foreign body and water protection for electrical
equipment (EN 60529: 1991)
DIN VDE 0558 Part1 A07.87 Semiconductor converters: general regulations and special regulations for
line-commutated converters
DIN VDE 0843 Electromagnetic compatibility of instrumentation and control equipment in

industrial process engineering:
Part 2 A09.87 Z Interference resistance to static electricity discharges; requirements and
measurement methods (IEC801-2) Ersetzt durch DIN EN 60801, Teil 2
(09.87)
DIN VDE 0875 RFI suppression of electrical equipment and installations:

Part 11 A12.88 Z (EN 55014: 1987) Ersetzt durch DIN VDE 0875, Teil 14 und DIN VDE 0075
Part 1 A07.92 (EN 55011: 1991)
DIN 41494 Part 5 A9.80 Equipment practice for electronic facilities; subracks and modules
DIN 41651 Part 1 A9.89 Connectors for printed circuits for connecting ribbon cables with round
conductors; indirect insertion, grid dimension 2.54 mm
DIN IEC 68 Part 2 Elektrotechnik; Grundlegende Umweltprüfverfahren; Prüfungen
DIN IEC 721 Electrical engineering; classification of environmental conditions:

Part 3 A08.87 classes of influencing quantities
IEC 801 Electromagnetic compatibility for industrial - process measurement and

control equipment
Part 4 Electrical fast transient / burst requirements
EN 60146-1-1: 1993 Semiconductor converters;

General requirements and line-commutated converters:
Part 1-1 Definition of basic requirements (IEC146-1-1991)

Sources
DIN standards and foreign standards: Beuth-Verlag GmbH
Burggrafenstraße 6
10787 Berlin
DIN VDE regulations: VDE-Auslieferungsstelle

Merianstraße 29
63069 Offenbach

11.94 Index
15 Index
To appear shortly

Index 11.94

SIMOVIS
Disk1
SIMOVIS
Disk 2
09.97
The following versions have appeared so far: Version Internal Part number
A C98130-A1234-A1-01-7647
B C98130-A1234-A1-02-7647
C C98130-A1234-A1-03-7647
E C98130-A1234-A1-05-7647
F C98130-A1234-A1-06-7647
Version F consists of the following chapters
Chapter Pages Date of Edition

0 General 10 12.95
1 Description 2 12.95
2 Transport, unpacking, assembly 8 12.95
3 Connection 60 12.95
4 Start-Up 50 12.95
5 Parameter List 44 12.95
6 Operator control 4 12.95
7 Fault and Alarm Messages 12 12.95
8 Maintenance 8 12.95
9 Options 6 12.95
10 Spare parts 10 12.95
11 Blank 0 —
12 Logbook 10 12.95
13 Environmental compatibility 2 05.95
14 Technical data 12 12.95
15 Index 1 11.94
Drives and Standard

Products from Siemens
Electronic Plant Vienna
P.O. Box 83, A-1211 Vienna
Subject to change without notice Order-No: 6SE7087-6AK85-1AA0

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Printed in Austria

28 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

28 Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

28 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SIMOVERT Master Drives Operating Instructions

Edition: F Order No.: 6SE7087-6AK85-1AA0

These Operating Instructions are available in the following languages:

Language German French Spanish Italian

Order-No.: 6SE70 . . . . 80-0AK85-1AA0 . . 87-7AK85-1AA0 . . 87-8AK85-1AA0 . . 87-2AK85-1AA0

Unit Software Release: starting with 3.0

The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its

Siemens AG 1994 All rights reserved

0 Definitions ................................................................................................................... 0-7

1 Description .................................................................................................................. 1-1

2 Transport, unpacking, assembly ....................................................................... 2-1

3 Connection .................................................................................................................. 3-1

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-1AA0 0-3

0-4 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-1AA0

4.3.9.8 Display modified parameters (P052 = 22) ..................................................................... 4-45

5 Parameter list ............................................................................................................. 5-1

6 Operator control ....................................................................................................... 6-1

6.2 Displays .......................................................................................................... 6-2

7 Fault and Alarm Messages ................................................................................... 7-1

8 Maintenance ............................................................................................................... 8-1

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-1AA0 0-5

8.2.4 Replacing thyristor blocks................................................................................................. 8-7

9 Options ......................................................................................................................... 9-1

10 Spare parts .................................................................................................................. 10-1

13 Environmental compatibility................................................................................ 13-1

14 Technical data............................................................................................................ 14-1

15 Index .............................................................................................................................. 15-1

0-6 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-1AA0

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-1AA0 0-7

Electrostatically Sensitive Devices (ESDs)

Sitting position Standing position Standing / Sitting position

0-8 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-1AA0

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-1AA0 0-9

0-10 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-1AA0

DC 280V to 310V ±15% at AC system input voltage 208 to 230V ±15%

1.2 Principle of operation

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-1AA0 1-1

1-2 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-1AA0

2 Transport, Unpacking and Assembly

2.1 Transport and unpacking

2.3 Aids to assembly

The following are required for securing size E:

The following are required for securing size H:

The following are required for securing size K:

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-1AA0 2-1

Requirements for the installation site

Figure 2.1 Installation in control cabinets

2-2 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-1AA0

Rectifier/Regenerating Unit Operating Instructions

Weight: refer to section 14 (technical data)

1U2 1V2 1W2

7) Fan-Customer connection (X19)

Figure 2.3 Dimension drawing, size E

Rectifier/Regenerating Unit Operating Instructions

Rectifier/Regenerating Unit Operating Instructions

No displacement of the centre of gravity

A10 3) Screen connection for cables

Figure 2.5 Dimension drawing, size K

A23 6) Remove transport plate and